MXM365N Service Manual

TopPage
1 : ‘14/Jun 2 : ‘16/Jan
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM565/S3E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-M365N/M364N
MX-M465N/M464N
MX-M565N/M564N
MX-M465N A/M565N A 1
MX-M564N A
AR-M460N/M560N 2
MODEL AR-M460N X
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND [C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION. . . . . . . . . . C-1
INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND [E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT
[5] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND [G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[8] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 [i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i-1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA [J] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1
HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[L] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[11] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 12-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[13] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [A] EXTERIOR
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [B] OPERATION PANEL
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .B-1
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
the developing unit, and the fusing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . C-1
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
2. Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 [D] SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . D-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
3. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .E-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-4
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .F-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
[5] SIMULATION
[G] LSU SECTION
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
3. Details of simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
2. Trouble code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
4. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
[8] MAINTENANCE
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . J-1
servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
2. Contents of the maintenance codes
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
(Relationship between various counters values and
display messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 [K] TRANSFER SECTION
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works . . . . . . . . 8-3 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .K-1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
1. HDD/SD card/CF card partition and data contents . . . 9-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
2. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and [L] FUSING SECTION
the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . L-1
3. Necessary procedure and notes for replacement of the 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
mirroring kit HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[11] SPECIFICATIONS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 [O] PWB SECTION
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 [P] FAN SECTION
[13] TOOL LIST 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
1. Exclusive-use tools list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
MX-M503N
NOTE FOR SERVICING Service
4) Manualthe grounding wire, never connect it to the
When connecting
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
* Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, * Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, * A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc. grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock. * Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an 5) Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not forcibly
It may cause a burn.
bend, pull, or strain the power cord.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
7) Do not put a metallic object or a container with water in it inside
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) Do not perform servicing, touch the power plug, insert a tele-
phone jack, or operate the machine with wet or only hands.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury. 3. Note for installing site
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink Do not install the machine at the following sites.
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. perature and humidity.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to Paper may get damp and form moisture inside the machine,
damage fingers when servicing. causing paper jam or copy dirt.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
toner may explode and burn you. described future in the Service Manual.
10) When replacing the lithium battery on the PWB, used the spec-
ified battery only.
If a battery of different specification is used, the battery may
cause malfunction or breakdown of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed on
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2) Place of much vibration

CAUTION It may cause a breakdown.
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
3) Poorly ventilated place
2) If there is any abnormality such as smoke or an abnormal
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone inside it.
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage such a machine may produce an odor of ozone. Install the
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may machine in a well ventilated place strike, and ventilate occa-
result. sionally.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
MX-M565N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and toner may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or copy quality issues.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in copy quality issues.
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
(case), use an earth band as shown below:
* Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy quality issues.
7) Place near a wall

Some machines require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be result.
11-13/16"
* When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desks and the copier desks speci-
fied, it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-M565N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. kinds.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect These kinds are classified according to the shape of the screw
the power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the kinds of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operatable.
tion check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
4) Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or when a special care is required, the details are
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the a case.
eyes. NOTE: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is electrode or a current flows, use enough care to tighten
performed, safety may not be assured. securely to avoid loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit, and the Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
fusing unit Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
copy and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Drum unit)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights. Tapping screws (for iron)
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tightening Tightening Tightening
for a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
sheets of paper to cover it.) (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
eign material on the OPC drum surface. (Plate thickness
(Transfer unit) 0.8mm or above)
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
eign material on the transfer roller. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
(Developing unit)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- (Plate thickness
eign material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
(Fusing unit)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-M565N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-M503N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual
1. System diagram
A. MX-M365N/M465N/M565N series
MX-FN17 MX-PN11A/B/C/D MX-PC12

FINISHER PUNCH MODULE PLASMACLUSTER ION
GENERATOR
MX-PNX5A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
MX-M365N MX-XB16
MX-TU12 MX-M465N MOUNTING KIT
EXIT TRAY CABINET
MX-M565N
DIGITAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-TR13 N
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-LT10
LONG PAPER FEEDING
TRAY
MX-FN10 MX-RB22
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER PAPER PASS UNIT
MX-FN11
FINISHER MX-LC11
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
MX-DE12 MX-DE13 MX-DE14 MX-DE20

STAND/1x500 SHEET STAND/2x500 SHEET STAND/3x500 SHEET STAND/500&2000 SHEET
PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
MX-PNX6A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
MX-FN18
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
MX-KB11 N MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1

KEYBOARD XPS EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION STAMP UNIT INTERNET FAX
KIT EXPANSION KIT
MX-EB11 MX-FR44U/FR44
MX-FR44U/FR MX-EB12 N MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3
ENHANCED COMPRESSION DATA SECURITY KIT MIRRORING KIT APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT
KIT INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE
MX-AM10 MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0

WEB BROWSING EXPANSION SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE
KIT KIT KIT KIT KIT KIT
MX-UN01A MX-UN05A MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA

Sharp OSA Net work Scanner Sharp OSA Net work Scanner Sharp OSA Net work Scanner Sharp OSA Net work Scanner Sharp OSA Net work Scanner
Tool 1 License Kit Tool 5 License Kit Tool 10 License Kit Tool 50 License Kit Tool 100 License Kit
MX-M565N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

TopPage
B. MX-M364N/M464N/M564N series
MX-FN17 MX-PN11A/B/C/D MX-PC12

FINISHER PUNCH MODULE PLASMACLUSTER ION
GENERATOR
MX-PNX5A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
MX-M364N MX-XB16
MX-TU12 MX-M464N MOUNTING KIT
EXIT TRAY CABINET
MX-M564N
DIGITAL
MX-TR13 N
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-LT10
LONG PAPER FEEDING
TRAY
MX-FN10 MX-RB22
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER PAPER PASS UNIT
MX-FN11
FINISHER MX-LC11
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
MX-DE12 MX-DE13 MX-DE14 MX-DE20

STAND/1x500 SHEET STAND/2x500 SHEET STAND/3x500 SHEET STAND/500&2000 SHEET
MX-PNX6A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
MX-FN18
MX-KB14 N MX-PK11 MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1

KEYBOARD PS3 EXPANSION KIT XPS EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION STAMP UNIT
KIT
MX-FWX1 MX-FR45U MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-USX1

INTERNET FAX DATA SECURITY KIT APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE
EXPANSION KIT INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE KIT
MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-UN01A MX-UN05A

SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE Sharp OSA Network Scanner Sharp OSA Network Scanner
KIT KIT KIT KIT Tool 1 License Kit Tool 5 License Kit
MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA MX-EB13

Sharp OSA Net work Scanner Sharp OSA Net work Scanner Sharp OSA Net work Scanner USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER
Tool 10 License Kit Tool 50 License Kit Tool 100 License Kit

TopPage
1 : ‘14/Jun 2 : ‘16/Jan
C. AR-M460N/M560N series
2 MX-FN17 MX-PN11A/B/C/D
FINISHER PUNCH MODULE
MX-PNX5A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
AR-M460N
AR-M560N
AR-M460N X
DIGITAL
MX-LT10
LONG PAPER FEEDING
TRAY
MX-FN10
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-RB22
PAPER PASS UNIT
MX-LC11
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
MX-FN11
FINISHER
MX-PNX6A/B/C/D MX-DE12 MX-DE13 MX-DE14 MX-DE20

PUNCH MODULE STAND/1x500 SHEET STAND/2x500 SHEET STAND/3x500 SHEET STAND/500&2000 SHEET
MX-FN18
AR-SU1 MX-EB13
STAMP UNIT USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER
2. Machine configuration
MX-M365N / M465N MX-M565N MX-M364N/M464N/M564N AR-M460N/M560N
1 MX-M465N A / M565N A MX-M564N A AR-M460N X
Copy STD
2
PCL printer STD
PS printer STD OPT N/A
Main body LCD COLOR WSVGA 10.1" COLOR WSVGA 7.0"
FAX OPT*1 N/A
Scan STD
Document Feeder STD DSPF STD RSPF
Exit Tray Cabinet STD/OPT *2 STD
Sharp OSA STD OPT N/A
Key Board STD / OPT*2 OPT N/A
Web Browsing OPT STD / OPT*2 N/A N/A
Wireless LAN STD*1 OPT*1
HDD (GB) 320 N/A
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option. N/A: Not available. *1: No support in some region. *2: Option in some region.

1 : ‘14/Jun 2 : ‘16/Jan
3. Combination of options
MX-M365N MX-M364N
1 MX-M465N MX-M464N
AR-M460N
Section Name Model name MX-M565N AR-M560N Remarks
MX-M465N A MX-M564N
2 MX-M565N A MX-M564N A
AR-M460N X
Document DUPLEX SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― STD STD ― ―

Feed System REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― ― ― STD STD
Paper Feed STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DE12 OPT OPT OPT OPT
System STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DE13 OPT OPT OPT OPT
STAND/3 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DE14 OPT OPT OPT OPT
STAND/500 & 2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DE20 OPT OPT OPT OPT
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LC11 OPT OPT OPT OPT
LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY MX-LT10 OPT OPT OPT OPT
Paper Exit EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TR13 N OPT OPT OPT ―
System EXIT TRAY CABINET MX-TU12 STD/OPT STD/OPT STD/OPT STD *1
FINISHER MX-FN17 OPT OPT OPT OPT
PUNCH MODULE MX-PN11 OPT OPT OPT OPT For MX-
A/B/C/D FN17
PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RB22 OPT OPT OPT OPT
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN10 OPT OPT OPT OPT
FINISHER (4K) MX-FN11 OPT OPT OPT OPT
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN18 OPT OPT OPT OPT
PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5 OPT OPT OPT OPT For MX-
A/B/C/D FN10
PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX6 OPT OPT OPT OPT For MX-
A/B/C/D FN11/
FN18
Printer PS3 EXPANSION MX-PK11 STD STD OPT ―
Expansion BARCODE FONT KIT MX-PF10 OPT OPT OPT ―
XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 OPT OPT OPT ―
Image send FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FX11 OPT OPT OPT ― *2
expansion STAMP UNIT AR-SU1 OPT OPT OPT OPT
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX OPT OPT OPT ―
ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT MX-EB11 OPT OPT ― ―
Authentication DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR44U OPT OPT ― ―
/ Security DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR45U ― ― OPT ―
CARD COLUTION KIT MX-EC50 OPT OPT ― ― *2
MIRRORING KIT MX-EB12 N OPT OPT ― ―
Application / SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1 OPT OPT OPT ―
Solution SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5 OPT OPT OPT ―
SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10 OPT OPT OPT ―
SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50 OPT OPT OPT ―
SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0 OPT OPT OPT ―
SHARP OSA NETWORK SCANNER TOOL 1 MX-UN01A OPT OPT OPT ―
LICENSE KIT
LICENSE KIT
LICENSE KIT
LICENSE KIT
SHARP OSA NETWORK SCANNER TOOL MX-UN1HA OPT OPT OPT ―
100 LICENSE KIT
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1 OPT OPT OPT ―
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE MX-AMX2 STD/OPT STD/OPT OPT ― *1
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3 STD/OPT STD/OPT OPT ― *1
WEB BROWSING EXPANSION KIT MX-AM10 OPT STD/OPT ― ― *1
OTHER KEYBOARD MX-KB11 N STD/OPT STD/OPT ― ― *1
KEYBOARD MX-KB14 N ― ― OPT ―
USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER MX-EB13 ― ― OPT OPT *2
PLASMACLUSTER ION GENARATOR MX-PC12 OPT OPT OPT ― *2
PLASMACLUSTER ION GENERATOR MX-XB16 OPT OPT OPT ― *2
MOUNTING KIT
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Installable. ―: Cannot be connected.

*1: Option in some region.
*2: No support in some region

MX-M503N
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual
1. Supply system table
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name collective Remarks
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge x1 40K MX-560NT 10 Life: A4/Letter
6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer x1 600K MX-560NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 300K MX-560DR 10
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Korea
Quantity in
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge x1 40K MX-560GT 10 Life: A4/Letter
6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer x1 600K MX-560GV 10
C. Asia/Hong Kong
Quantity in
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge x1 40K MX-560AT 10 Life: A4/Letter
6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer x1 600K MX-560AV 10
D. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines/Taiwan
Quantity in
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge x1 40K MX-560FT 10 Life: A4/Letter
6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer x1 600K MX-560FV 10
E. China
Quantity in
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge x1 40K MX-560CT 10 Life: A4/Letter
6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer x1 600K MX-560CV 10
MX-M565N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Model name Content Quantity Life Package Remarks
1-1 Upper Heat Roller Kit MX-560UH Upper heat roller 1 300K 10 For 46 / 56 cpm
Upper separation pawl / pawl spring 6 machine
1-2 Upper Heat Roller Kit MX-362UH Upper heat roller 1 300K 10 For 36 cpm
2-1 Lower Heat Roller Kit MX-560LH Lower heat roller 1 300K 10 For 46 / 56 cpm
Lower separation pawl / pawl spring 4 machine
2-2 Lower Heat Roller Kit MX-362LH Lower heat roller 1 300K 10 For 36 cpm machine
Lower separation pawl / pawl spring 2
3-1 Web cleaning kit MX-560WC Web pressure roller bearing 2 300K 10 For 46 / 56 cpm
Web pressure roller 1 machine
Web roller 1
3-2 Web cleaning kit MX-362WC Web pressure roller bearing 2 300K 10 For 36 cpm machine
Web pressure roller 1
Web roller 1
4 Transfer kit MX-560TU Transfer roller 1 300K 10
Discharge plate 1
5 DV filter kit MX-560DS DV filter UN 1 600K 10
6 Main charger kit MX-560MK Drum cleaning blade 1 300K 10
Molt cushion for side seal F/R 1
Drum separation pawl unit 4
Main charger unit 1
Side sheet F/R for toner reception seal 1
7 Toner collection box MX-560HB Toner collection box 1 100K 10 6% coverage of A4
size paper
8 Filter kit MX-361FL Ozone Filter 1 300K 10
9 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For MX-FN11/FN18
11 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For MX-FN17/FN10
12 Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 — 20
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand
1-1 Upper heat roller kit MX-560UH Upper heat roller 1 300K 10 For 46 / 56 cpm
1-2 Upper heat roller kit MX-362UH Upper heat roller 1 300K 10 For 36 cpm machine
Upper separation pawl / pawl spring 4
2-1 Lower heat roller kit MX-560LH Lower heat roller 1 300K 10 For 46 / 56 cpm
2-2 Lower heat roller kit MX-362LH Lower heat roller 1 300K 10 For 36 cpm machine
Web roller 1
Web roller 1
Discharge plate 1
5 DV filter kit MX-560DS DV filter unit 1 600K 10
Main charger unit 1
size paper
8 Filter kit MX-361FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10

C. Asia/Middle East/Agency
Web roller 1
Web roller 1
Discharge plate 1
Main charger unit 1
size paper
D. Hong Kong
Web roller 1
Web roller 1
Discharge plate 1
Main charger unit 1
size paper

3. Production number identification C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
A. Drum cartridge side of the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Internal product name Destination Incompatibility
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows. A 3 MX5 6 0 N T 1 A
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. B 00001 131001 B
1: Number
Production Serial No. Production Version
For this model, this digit is 2.
place in production day year/month/day
2: Alphabet
Example: 1st of production on October 01, 2013
Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month. D. Environmental conditions
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
(Humidity)
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date. 85%
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing. 60%
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
20%
10 30 35
B. Developer
(Temperature)
BK
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C
conditions Humidity 65  5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

MX-M503N
[3] Service Manual
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions
A. External view
1 4 8 7
15
5
16
6
14 2
10
13
11
12
12
11
7 14
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals.
Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
3 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Exit tray unit (right exit tray) When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
7 Finisher This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
8 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
9 Tray 1 Paper holding cassette.
10 Tray 2 (when a paper feed tray is installed or when Paper holding cassette
the Stand/500&2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)
11 Tray 3 (when a paper feed tray is installed or when Paper holding cassette.
12 Tray 4 (when a paper feed tray is installed or when Paper holding cassette.
13 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed) Large capacity paper holding tray.
14 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold
function for folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
15 Keyboard This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can be stored under the
operation panel.
16 Paper pass unit Transports paper to the finisher.
MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1

B. Internal operation parts
1 2
11
10
6 9
8
7

1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge contains toner for the developed image in the copy/print processes. when toner
completely runs out of the cartridge, the cartridge must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat and pressure are applied to fuse the transferred image into the paper.
3 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
4 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided copying/printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
5 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure to
pull out the bypass tray extension.
6 Main power switch Used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the
"on" position.
7 Waste toner box A container that collects waste toner which has not been transferred to paper during the copy/print
process.
8 Handle Pull handle out and grasp it when moving the machine.
9 Right cover of stand/ Open this cover to remove a mis-feed from tray 3 or tray 4.
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer right cover of stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer (when a stand/
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)
10 Paper tray right side cover Open cover to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 1 or tray 2.
11 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper mis-feed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.

C. Connectors
1
2
3
4
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the When using the USB port, be
machine. This connector cannot be used under the factory setting. The connector on the careful of the total current
front section can be used under the factory setting. When the keyboard is installed to the consumption not to exceed 500mA.
machine, an exclusive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is disabled.)
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For
the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0. A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine
as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
4 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to
this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector
must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
5 Power plug
D. Operation panel
(1) MX-M365N/M465N/M565N series
1 4 2

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
3 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
4 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
5 [Home Screen] button Touch this key to display the home screen.
Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the
machine.

2 : ‘16/Jan
(2) MX-M364N/M454N/M564N series
2 AR-M460N/M560N series
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(9)
(10) (11) (12) (13)
(14) (15) (16) (17)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations. The [HOME], [JOB STATUS] and [SYSTEM SETTINGS] keys are also available here. When a key is
touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an
operation.
2 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Touch this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
4 PRINT mode indicators * READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
* DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Touch this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators * LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
* DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 Stylus pen This can be used to touch a key displayed on the touch panel.
10 [STOP] key Press this key to copy job or scanning of an original.
11 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in monochrome. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
12 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine’s main power switch is in the on position.
13 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
14 [LOGOUT] key Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial.line
15 [#/P] key When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
16 [CLEAR ALL] key Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have
been selected and start operation from the initial state.
17 [POWER SAVE] key Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.

E. DSPF
(1) Roller
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No. Name Function/ Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separates document pages to prevent against a double-feed.
4 No. 1 registration roller (Drive) Controls paper transport timing and creates buckle to eliminate possible paper skew.
5 No. 1 registration roller (Idle) Applies pressure to document page and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from No. 1 registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document.
8 No. 2 registration roller (Drive) Synchronizes timing between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
9 No. 2 registration roller (Idle) Applies pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document.
10 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from the No. 1 scan section to the transport roller 3.
11 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document.
12 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.
13 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document.
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit roller to
document.
(2) Sensors and Switches
SCOV
SPED1
SPLS2
SPPD1
SPPD2 SPRDMD STUD
SPLS1
STLD
SPWS
SPOD
SPPD3 SPED2
SOCD SPPD5
SLCOV
SPPD4
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SCOV DSPF upper door open/close detector Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detector Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower door.
SOCD DSPF open/close detector Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit detector Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty detector Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short detector Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long detector Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPOD DSPF document exit detector Transmission type Detects document exit of the document.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass detector 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random detector Transmission type Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPWS DSPF document width detector Volume resistor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit detector Transmission type Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit detector Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.

(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB and lamps
SPF FAN
SPFM
STRC
SPFC SPUM
STRRC SPOM
SRRC SLUM
3
1
2
DSPF COPY LAMP

DSPF DSPF copy lamp LED lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document
COPY LAMP images.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the motors and the clutches.
SPFM DSPF transport motor Hybrid step motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor PM step motor Drives the document exit roller.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Hybrid step motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 registration roller.

1 DSPF control PWB Control PWB for DSPF
2 DSPF driver PWB Driver PWB for DSPF
3 DSPF CCD PWB Scans document images.

F. RSPF
(1) Roller
5 4 12 2 3 1
7 6 8 9 10 11

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separates document page to prevent against a double-feed.
4 Resist roller (Drive) Controls paper transport timing and creates buckle to eliminate possible paper skew.
5 Resist roller (Idle) Applied pressure to document and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from resist roller to transport roller 2.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. / Transports document to the resist roller when
reversing the document.
12 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly.
(2) Sensors and Switches
SCOV
SPPD1 SPED SPLS2
SPPD2 SPLS1
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4

SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPED RSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 RSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 RSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 RSPF document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document.

(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB
SPFM
SRRC SPM
SPRS

SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section.
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Releases the pressure of the transport roller 3 when reversing a document and
transporting it to the resist roller.
SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.

1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the RSPF section.

G. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS CCD
TFD2 TFD3
POD3
POD2
SHPOS APPD1
POD1
DSW_ADU
WEBEND
TH_MY TH_US
FPFD
PCS MPLD
BD
TCS APPD2
TH_DV/HUD_DV
PPD2 TNBOX
TNFD MPWS
PPD1 MPED
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS11
CSS12 DSW_C1
CSS13 CSPD1
CSS14
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type
BD Laser beam detection Detects the laser scan start timing.
CCD CCD unit Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass. Transmission type
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear Tact switch
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 - 4.
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected.
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close Transmission
type
DSW_C1 Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 transport cover open/close.
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section. Reflection type
HUD_DV/ Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and humidity
TH_DV
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. Transmission type
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size. Transmission type
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller. Reflection type
PCS Image density sensor Detects toner patch density. Reflection type
SHPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_MY(TH_UM) Main thermistor Fusing temperature detection (main) Thermistor
TH_US Sub thermistor Fusing temperature detection (sub) Thermistor
TNFD Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste Transmission type
toner near end and the waste toner full.
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste Transmission type
toner near end and the waste toner full.
WEBEND Web end detection Detects life end of the web cleaner. Transmission type

H. Switches
PWRSW
MSW
DSW-F
DSW-R

DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing,
motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing,
motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the AC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source.

I. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
MPFS
FRS
PSPS
HPFC
TDSC
CPUC1
CPFC1

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
CPFC1 Paper transport clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller.
CPFC2 Paper transport clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper transport section of
the paper feed tray section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
(Paper feed tray 1)
FRS Lower pawl separation solenoid Electromagnetic clutch Controls the lower pawl separation solenoid
HPFC Transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the transport roller
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
(Manual paper feed)
PSPS Separation solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Separates paper from the OPC drum.
TDSC Toner supply clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply.

J. Drive motor
OSM
POM
WEBM
FUM
ADUM
PGM
MIM
DM
PFM RRM
CPFM
CLUM1

ADUM ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM Drum motor Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor Brush-less motor Drives the fusing unit.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) unit.
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the paper feed section.
Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Stepping motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

K. Lamps and gates
CCFT CLI
2
1
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW
DL

CCFT LED back-light Cold Cathode Fluorescent Tube Back-light for LED
CLI Scanner lamp LED Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL Discharge lamp LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum
HL_UM Heater lamp (main) Halogen lamp Heats the heat roller (main).
HL_US Heater lamp (sub) Halogen lamp Heats the heat roller (sub).
HL_UW Heater lamp (for warm-up) Halogen lamp Heats up supplementarily when warming-up.(For 46/56com machine)
No. Name Type Function/Operation

1 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to
discharge paper to the right tray.
2 ADU reverse gate Switches the transport route of paper to the duplex (ADU) section.

L. Fans and filters
POFM1
POFM3
POFM2
LSUFM
PROFM1
OZFM1 PSFM2
2 PSFM1
Signal name Name Function/Operation

LSUCFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU section.
OZFM1 Ozone fan Exhausts ozone.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan 2 Cools the power unit.
POFM1 Paper exit cooling fan 1 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section.
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan 2 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section.
POFM3 Paper exit cooling fan 3 Cools the paper.
PROFM1 Process fan Cools process section.

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.

M. PWB
10
22 23
11 12 20 11 13 12 20
9 8
7
2
1
19
18
14
6
16
3
17
15

1 RD I/F PWB Interfaces each sensor signal in the right door unit section.
2 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size in the paper feed tray.
3 DC power PWB Generates a DC voltage.
4 HV PWB Generates the main charger voltage, the developing bias voltage, and the transfer voltage.
5 AC power PWB Controls the power source and noise filter function.
6 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner and the operation panel section.
7 CCD PWB Scans document images.
8 LED drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
9 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
10 Document detection light emitting PWB Drives the document size detection LED.
11 LVDS PWB Converts display signals into LCD display signals.
12 PW-KEY PWB Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
13 HW-KEY-PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
14 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
15 MFP PWB Controls data related to images, and controls the whole machine.
16 LSU-Mother PWB Interfaces signals of the MFP PWB and another PWB.
17 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
18 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
19 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
20 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
21 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal
22 Wireless LAN PWB Connects the network with the wireless LAN
23 USB CONV PWB Converts to the USB connection

N. Fuses/Thermostats
TS_UM
TS_US
5
4
3
2
1 11
10
8
9
6
7
Signal name Name Specifications Section

TS UM Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
(For HL_UM)
TS US Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
(For HL_US/HL_UW)
NO Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 F401 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB
6 F1 Fuse 20A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V) AC power PWB
7 F2 Fuse T10AH250V (200V only) AC power PWB
8 F001 Fuse 15A 250V (100V) / T10.AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
9 F051 Fuse T2AH 250V DC power PWB
10 F201 Fuse T10AH 250V (100V) / T6.3AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
11 F301 Fuse T4AH 250V DC power PWB

O. Rollers
30
29
27
28
32
31
22
21
20
19
34
33
23
24
9
8
4
1
2
17
18 3
25 15
26 16
6 14
12
13
5 7
10
11

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
tray)
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
tray)
3 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from manual paper feed section to the transport roller 9.
4 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
5 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section
6 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
7 Separation roller (Paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feeding
8 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section / controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relative relations
between the image and paper.
9 Registration roller (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
11 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed desk tray to the transport roller 4.
12 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 3.
13 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
14 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 4.
15 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper.
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and 3 to the transport roller 5.
17 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
18 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Paper is buckled between the registration roller and this roller to
correct the paper skew and set timing relation between images and paper.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper
20 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the fusing section to the paper exit section and the switchback
section.
22 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 8.
24 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 7 to the transport roller 9.
26 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 8 to the transport roller 5.
27 Paper exit roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper to paper exit roller 2 or transport roller 7.
28 Paper exit roller 3 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper.
29 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper.
30 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the left paper exit section.
31 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper.
32 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper to the right paper exit tray.
33 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
34 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies pressure to the fusing roller.

MX-M503N
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
2D Transfer separation bias voltage adjustment 8-17
ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, 3A Print engine image skew adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2
image position, image 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10
magnification ratio, void area 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment 50-10/50-1
adjustments 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment 50-10
(Manual adjustments)
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (OC mode) 4B Scan image sub scanning direction distortion adjustment
4C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment
4D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew 5A DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF 5B DSPF/RSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
mode) 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode) 48-1
6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 7 Scan image magnification 7A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1
ratio adjustment (Manual 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1/48-5
adjustment) 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 48-1
7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 48-1
ADJ 8 Scan image off-center 8A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment (Manual 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
adjustment)
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position, void area adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 10 Copy image position, image 10A Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1
loss, and void area 10B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF mode scanner scan position adjustment) 53-8
adjustment 10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-6
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ 11 Gray balance/density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
11A Scanner 11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Document table mode) 63-3 (63-5)
calibration (1)
(CCD 11A Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
calibration) (2)
11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
(3)
11B Copy/Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic adjustmen) 46-74
11C Copy quality 11C Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjust- 46-24
adjustment (1) ment)
(Basic 11C Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
adjustment) (2)
11D Copy/Image 11D Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy 46-2
send/FAX (1) mode) (separately for the low density area and high density area) )
image quality (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment 11D Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment 46-10
(Individual (2) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 11D Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each monochrome 46-16
(3) copy mode)
11D Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density 46-19
(4) scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
MX-M565N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 1

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 11 Gray balance/density 11D Copy/Image 11D Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the 46-32
adjustment send/FAX (5) automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust
image quality normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
adjustment 11D Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment )for each mode) 46-63
(Individual (6) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 11D Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction 46-37
(7) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
11D Monochrome copy/color scan mode sharpness adjustment 46-30
(8) (No need to adjust normally)
11D Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
(9) (Normally unnecessary the setting change)
11D DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
(10) (No need to adjust normally)
11D Automatic gray balance adjustment by the user (Copy gray balance 26-53
(11) automatic adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
11D Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for each dither (Automatic 46-54
(12) adjustment)
11D Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(13)
11D Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(14)
11E Printer image 11E Printer gray balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 67-24
quality (1)
adjustment 11E Printer gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
(Basic (2)
adjustment)
11F Printer image 11F Printer density adjustment (Low density section density adjustment) 67-36
quality (1) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment 11F Printer high density image density reproduction setting (Supporting the 67-34
(Individual (2) high density section tone gap) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 11F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No 67-54
(3) need to adjust normally)
11F Automatic gray balance adjustment by the user (Printer gray balance 26-53
(4) automatic adjustment ENABLE) setting and adjustment) (Normally
unnecessary to the setting change)
ADJ 12 Image send, FAX send 12A Color image send mode, image density and gradation adjustment (by each mode) 46-4
mode, image quality 12B Monochrome image send mode, image density and gradation adjustment (by each mode) 46-5
adjustment 12C Image send mode, image color balance adjustment 46-8
12D FAX send mode, image sharpness adjustment 46-39
ADJ FAX send mode image 13A Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Collective adjustment of all the 46-40
13 quality adjustment FAX mode)
13B Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Normal mode) 46-41
13C Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Fine mode) 46-42
13D Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Super fine mode) 46-43
13E Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Ultra fine mode) 46-44
13F Image density and gradation adjustment in the in the iFAX send mode (600dpi mode) 46-45
ADJ 14 Setting of the auto exposure mode operating conditions in copy, scan and FAX 46-19
ADJ 15 Paper size detection 15A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2
adjustment 15B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 16 Document size detection 16A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
adjustment (Document table 16B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
mode)
ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 18 Image lead edge position, 18A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Document 50-28
image off-center, image table mode)
magnification ratio 18B Image off-center automatic adjustment (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
adjustment 18C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning direction 50-28
(Automatic adjustment) image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Document table mode)
18D Copy image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image magnification 50-28
ratio automatic adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position adjustment

3. Details of adjustment
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 20mm 20mm
40mm 40mm
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
NOTE: Do not hold the adjacent section of the MG roller strongly.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover.
Note for use of a thickness gauge

* Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
* The gauge must pass freely.
* The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole

position
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
NOTE: All DV material must be removed before beginning step 2. * When there is a blur on the print image.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw. * When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
NOTE: All DV material must be removed before beginning step 2.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.)
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.675mm in between 20mm -
40mm from the edge of the developing doctor.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 20mm - 40mm 2～3mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.675 0.025mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.

5) Measure the distance between the marking position and the
doctor tip of the developing unit, and check that it is 11.0 1-C Toner density control reference value
0.5mm. setting
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel- This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. * When developer is replaced.
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM 25-2.
When setting the toner density control reference value, pull out
the toner cartridge in advance.
11.0±0.5mm 0
　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 25 - 0 2 C L OS E
A U TO M AT I C D E VE L OP E R A D JU S TM E N T
A T D EV E AD J _L _ K : 1 28 10 K EY
A T D EV E AD J _M _ K : 1 28
EX I T B10AKCEY
K C LE A R
A T D EV E VO _ L_ K : 1 28
A T D EV E VO _ M_ K : 1 28
1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing 1 0K

4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and 1 0K

7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
K E X EC U TE 1/1
2) Close the front cabinet and press [EXECUTE] button.
0
　　
TE S T　SI M U LA T IO N 　　N O. 2 5 -0 2 CL O S E
AU T OM A TI C DE V EL O PE R AD J US T M EN T
T C S_ K : 45 1 0 KE Y
T S G_ K : 45
E X IT 1B0AC
KEKY C L E AR
1 0 KE
1 Y 1 0 K2 EY 1 0 3KE Y
1 0 KE
4 Y 1 0 K5 EY 1 0 6KE Y
1 0 KE
7 Y 1 0 K8 EY 1 0 9KE Y
1 0 KE
* Y 1 0 K0 EY 1 0 #KE Y
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole

10 K E Y ST A R T
position comes to the specified range. K EX E CU T E 1 /1
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller

main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust- Adjustment completed
ment plate with the fixing screw.
0
　　　S
T E ST I MU L AT I O N　　N O . 25 - 02 C L OS E
A UT O MA T I C D EV E LO P E R A DJ U S TM E NT
AT D EV E A D J _L _ K : 12 8 1 0 K EY
AT D EV E A D J _M _ K : 12 8
EX I T 1B0AKCK
EY C LE A R
AT D EV E V O _ L_ K : 12 8
AT D EV E V O _ M_ K : 12 8
10 K1 E Y 10 K2 E Y 10 3K EY
10 K4 E Y 10 K5 E Y 10 6K EY
10 K7 E Y 10 K8 E Y 10 9K EY
10 K* E Y 10 K0 E Y 10 #K EY
1 0 KE Y S TA R T
K E XE C UT E 1/1
Abnormal end
0
　　　S C LO S E
T ES T IM U LA T I ON 　　N O .2 5 -0 2
AU T O MA T IC DE V E LO P ER AD J U ST M EN T
TC S _K : E E -E L 1 0 KE Y
TS G _K : 45
EXIT 1B0AKECKY CL E AR
10 K1 EY 10 K2 EY 1 0 KE
3 Y
10 K4 EY 10 K5 EY 1 0 KE
6 Y
10 K7 EY 10 K8 EY 1 0 KE
9 Y
10 K* EY 10 K0 EY 1 0 KE
# Y
1 0K E Y S TA R T
K EX E C UT E 1 /1

3) After completion of the adjustment of the toner density control 2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
reference value, insert the toner cartridge.
Setting Actual voltage
4) Close the front cabinet. Item/Display Content
range 36 46 56
5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner
MID A MIDDLE Charging/grid 150 - -665V -670V -
DLE SPEED bias set value 850 ±5V ±5V 670V
density, and the output value is displayed. The above opera- GB_K
tion is executed for 2 minutes, and the average value of the ±5V
toner density sensor detection level is set (saved) as the refer- LO A LOW Charging/grid 150 - -665V -665V -665V
W SPEED bias set value 850 ±5V ±5V ±5V
ence toner density control value. When the reference toner
GB_K
density control adjustment operation is completed, [EXE-
CUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. This makes known 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle
about whether the adjustment operation is completed or not. speed mode and press [OK] key.
NOTE: Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
If the operation is interrupted within 2 minutes, the adjustment the label attached on the high voltage power PWB.
result is not reflected. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during
rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns
to the normal display. If [EE-EU], [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is dis- GBK: XXX
played, setting of the reference toner density control value is The default value s specified for each model must be changed
not completed normally. as follows. 46cpm/56cpm machine: +5
Error display Content Details of content

EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 77, or
sensor control voltage level over 207
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 177, or sensor
control voltage level less than 52
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level less than 125, or
sensor control voltage level over 131
NOTE: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-

2.
Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the high
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values voltage power PWB. Since the adjustment value label is attached
on the high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage check the adjustment value. This is a troublesome procedure.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Therefore, it is advisable to put down the adjustment value in
advance. When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced.
dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes
* U2 trouble has occurred. are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. a certain relationship.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
0
　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 08 - 0 2 C L O SE
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
M H V/ G RI D S E T TI N G A N D O UT P UT
A： 6 4 5 ： M ID D LE S PE E D G B _K 10 K E Y
checking the print image quality.
A 64 5
［ 1 5 0 ～ 8 50 ］ E XI T 10BAKCEKY C L EA R
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K
2EY 1 0K3 E Y
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K
5EY 1 0K6 E Y
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K
8EY 1 0K9 E Y
1 0K* E Y 1 0K
0EY 1 0K# E Y
1 0 K EY S T AR T
M I DD L E LO W E X EC U TE OK
10 key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or after 30 sec
0
　　　S
M H V/ G RI D S E T TI N G A ND O UT P UT
A： 5 0 0 ： M ID D LE S PE E D G B_ K 10 K EY
A 50 0
［ 1 5 0 ～ 8 50 ］ EX I T B10AKCEYK C LE A R
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K
2EY 10 K3 EY
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K
5EY 10 K6 EY
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K
8EY 10 K9 EY
1 0K* E Y 1 0K
0EY 10 K# EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T

2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the high
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced. voltage power PWB. Since the adjustment value label is attached
* U2 trouble has occurred. on the high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. check the adjustment value. This is a troublesome procedure.
Therefore, it is advisable to put down the adjustment value in
advance.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
0
　　　S
T E ST I MU L AT I O N　　 NO . 08 - 01 C L OS E meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
D V S ET T I NG AN D OU T PU T
A ： 4 75 ： M ID D LE SP E E D D VB _ K 10 K E Y
checking the print image quality.
A 475
［ 0 ～ 700 ］ EX I T 10
BAKCEKY C LE A R
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment

1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K E Y
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K E Y
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced.
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K E Y * U2 trouble has occurred.
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K E Y * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
M ID D L E LO W E X EC U TE OK
10 key EXECUTE 0
　　　S
T ES T IM U L AT I ON 　　N O .0 8 - 06 C LO S E
EXECUTE or after 30 sec TH V SE T TI N G A N D O UT P U T

A： 90 ： TC PL A I N B W S P X 1 0 K EY
A 90
B： 82 ： T C P LA I N B W D P X
［ 0 ～ 2 55 ］ EXIT 1B0AKCK
EY CL E A R
C： 82 ： T C H EA V Y 1 B W S PX
0 D： 82 ： T C H EA V Y 1 B W D PX
E： 82 ： T C H EA V Y 2 B W S PX 10 K1 EY 10 K2 E Y 1 0 K3 EY
　　　S
F： 82 ： T C H EA V Y 3 B W S PX
D V S E TT I NG A ND OU T PU T
G： 82 ： T C O HP B W 10 K4 EY 10 K5 E Y 1 0 K6 EY
A： 6 0 0 ： M ID D LE S PE E D D V B_ K 10 K E Y
A 60 0 H： 82 ： T C E NV E L OP E B W
［ 0 ～ 700 ］ E XI T 10
BAKCEKY C LE A R 10 K7 EY 10 K8 E Y 1 0 K9 EY
I： 82 ： TC TH I N B W
J： 82 ： T C G LO S S Y B W
10 K* EY 10 K0 E Y 1 0 K# EY
K： 82 ： T C A DS O R PT I ON
1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 1 0K
3EY
L： 55 ： T C I NT E R VA L B I AS 　M I D
1 0K E Y S TA R T
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 1 0K
6EY
E XE C UT E OK
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 1 0K
9EY
10 key EXECUTE
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 1 0K
#EY
EXECUTE or after 30 sec

1 0 KE Y S T AR T
0
　　　S
T H V S ET T IN G AN D O U TP U T
A： 2 0 0 ： T C P LA I N B W S P X 10 K EY
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted. A 20 0

B： 8 2 ： T C P L AI N BW DP X
［ 0 ～ 255 ］ EX I T 10AKCEY
B K C LE A R
C： 8 2 ： T C H E AV Y 1 B W S P X
D： 8 2 ： T C H E AV Y 1 B W D P X
Item/Display Setting Default value
Content E： 8 2 ： T C H E AV Y 2 B W S P X 1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
range 36 46 56 F： 8 2 ： T C H E AV Y 3 B W S P X
G： 82： TC OHP BW 1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY

MID A MIDDLE Developing 0 - 700 -475V±5V H： 8 2 ： T C E N VE L O PE BW
DLE SPEED bias set value I： 8 2 ： T C T HI N BW

1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
DVB_K J： 8 2 ： T C G L OS S Y B W
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
K： 8 2 ： T C A D SO R P TI O N
LO A LOW Developing 0 - 700 -475V±5V L： 5 5 ： T C I N TE R V AL BI A S　 MI D
W SPEED bias set value E X EC U TE OK

1 0 KE Y S T AR T
DVB_K
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
speed mode and press [OK] key. key. By setting the default value the specified voltage is out-
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on putted.
the label attached on the high voltage power PWB.
Content Default value
Setting
Item/Display 36 46 56
GBK: XXX range
cpm cpm cpm
The default value s specified for each model must be changed A TC PLAIN BW Transfer current 0 - 255 90 107 111
as follows. 46cpm/56cpm machine: +5 SPX standard paper
front surface
B TC PLAIN Transfer current 0 - 255 82 94 99
BW DPX standard paper
back surface
C TC HEAVY1 Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82
BW SPX heavy paper front
surface
D TC HEAVY1 Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82
BW DPX heavy paper back
surface
E TC HEAVY2 Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82
BW SPX heavy paper2

Content Default value 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Setting
Item/Display 36 46 56 3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
range
cpm cpm cpm key.
F TC HEAVY3 Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82 By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted.
BW SPX heavy paper3
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer separation bias
G TC OHP BW Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82
voltage is outputted.
OHP
H TC ENVE- Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82 Setting Default
LOPE BW envelope Item/Display Content
range value
I TC THIN BW Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82 A PLV MID Separation bias output 0 - 255 180
thin paper (FACE) (Front surface)
J TC GLOSSY Transfer current 0 - 255 82 82 82 B PLV MID Separation bias output 0 - 255 180
BW glossy paper (BACK) (Back surface)
K TC Transfer current 0 - 255 82 94 99 C PLV LOW Separation bias output 0 - 255 150
ADSORP- adsorption (FACE) (Front surface)
TION BW process D PLV LOW Separation bias output 0 - 255 150
(BACK) (Back surface)
L TC INTERVAL Transfer current 0 - 255 55 55 55
BIAS MID between paper
middle speed
M TC INTERVAL Transfer current 0 - 255 55 55 55 ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image
BIAS LOW between paper
low speed
position, image magnification
N TC BACKEND Transfer bias 0 - 255 73 77 82 ratio, void area adjustments
backend
O TCCLEAN- Transfer cleaning 0 - 255 160 160 160
(Manual adjustments)
ING bias
P TC CLEAN- Transfer cleaning 0 - 255 160 160 160 3-A Print engine image skew adjustment
ING PRO- bias procon (LSU parallelism adjustment)
CON This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
2-D Transfer separation bias voltage * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 64-2 mode.
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced. 0
　　　S
* U2 trouble has occurred. S E LF PR I NT ( B W) : S ER V I CE
A： 1 ： P RI N T P A TT E RN ( 1, 2 , 9～1 1 , 17 ～1 9, 2 1 ,2 2 ,2 9 , 33 ～3 5) 10 K EY
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. A 1

B： 1 ： D O T1 ( DO T 1 >= 2 　IF A :2 ，1 1 )
［ 1 ～ 68 ］ EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. C： 2 5 4 ： D O T2 ( DO T 2 >= 2 　IF A :2 ，1 1 )
D： 2 5 5 ： D E NS I TY ( F IX E D”2 5 5 ”　I F A :9 )
1) Enter the SIM 8-17 mode. E： 1 ： M U LT I C O U NT 1 0K

1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
F： 8 ： E X PO S UR E : S T AN D A RD DI T H ER
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
0 G： 2 ： P A PE R : CS1
H： 1 ： D U PL E X : NO
　　　S
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
T H VA C S E TT I N G A ND OU T P UT I： 1 ： P AP E R　 TY P E : PL A IN
A： 1 8 0 ： P LV MI D ( FA C E) 10 K EY
A 18 0 1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
B： 1 8 0 ： P L V M ID ( B AC K )
［ 0 ～ 255 ］ EX I T B10AKCEYK C LE A R
C： 1 5 0 ： P L V L OW ( F AC E )
D： 1 5 0 ： P L V L OW ( B AC K ) 1 0 KE Y S T AR T
E X EC U TE OK
1 0K
1EY 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
1 0K
4EY 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
2) Set the set items to the values shown below.
1 0K
7EY 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY Item Setting value
A 1
1 0K
*EY 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
B 1
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
C 254
E X EC U TE OK
D 255
10 key EX ECU TE 3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by
changing the value of G.
EX ECU TE
or after 30 sec 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The check pattern is printed out.
0
　　　S
5) Check the printed image for any skew.
T H VA C S E TT I N G A ND OU T P UT Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat-
A： 2 0 0 ： P LV MI D ( FA C E) 10 K EY
A 20 0 tern.
B： 1 8 0 ： P L V M ID ( B AC K )
［ 0 ～ 255 ］ EX I T B10AKCEYK C LE A R
C： 1 5 0 ： P L V L OW ( F AC E )
There are following two methods of checking the image for any
D： 1 5 0 ： P L V L OW ( B AC K )
1 0K
1EY 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
skew (right angle).
Method 1:
1 0K
4EY 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
Measure the maximum length of the diagonal lines of the rect-

1 0K
7EY 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
angle print pattern. Check the difference in the length of the
1 0K
*EY 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
Method 2:
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
E X EC U TE OK

Compare the right angle of vertical side and the horizontal side 6) Open the front cover.
of the rectangle print pattern with the right angle of A3 or 11" x 7) Adjust the print image distortion adjustment screw to set the
8.5" paper for judgment of good or no good. print image distortion to the minimum.
(NOTE)
In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
8) Execute procedures 4) and 5).

Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
(Repeat procedures 4), 5) and 7) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.)
3-B Print engine image magnification ratio

adjustment (Main scanning direction)
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
and D of the diagonal lines. 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range. C - D = ±0.8mm 0
　　　S
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
P A PE R C E NT E R O F FS E T S E TU P
is no need to adjust. A 11 6
A： 1 1 6 ： B K- M AG 10 K E Y
B： 6 0 ： M A IN - MF T
［ 60 ～ 140 ］ E XI T 10BAKCEKY C LE A R
C： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 1
(Method 2) D： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 2
E： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 3 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 1 0K
3EY
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the F： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 4
rectangle print pattern. G： 6 0 ： M A IN - LC C 1 0K

4EY 1 0K
5EY 1 0K
6EY
H： 4 2 ： M A IN - AD U
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 1 0K
9EY
I： 6 0 ： S UB - MF T
J： 6 0 ： S U B- C S1
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 1 0K
#EY
K： 6 0 ： S U B- D SK
Comparison line L： 6 0 ： S U B- L CC
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
E X EC U TE OK
0.5mm or less
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray.
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
Direction A Direction B key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The check pattern is printed out.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper

and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
240 0.5mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed Z1
2.0 2.0mm
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
X
4.0 1.0mm Y
3-C Print engine print area (void area)
2.0 - 5.0mm
adjustment
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
Z2
* When the duplex section is disassembled. 2.0 2.0mm
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
0
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 　　　S
L E AD ED G E A D JU S TM E NT V AL U E
(Note) A： 5 0 ： R RC A 10 K EY
A 50
B： 6 0 ： R R CB - CS 1
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 3B print ［ 0 ～ 99 ］
C： 6 0 ： R R CB - DS K
EX I T B10AKCEYK C LE A R
engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direc- D： 6 0 ： R R CB - LC C
tion) in advance. E： 6 0 ： R R CB - MF T 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
F： 6 0 ： R R CB - AD U
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. G： 4 0 ： L E AD 1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
H： 2 0 ： S I DE
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
I： 4 0 ： D EN A
0 J： 3 0 ： D E NB
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 50 - 1 0 C L OS E K： 2 0 ： F R ON T /R E A R
P A PE R C E NT E R O F FS E T S E TU P L： 5 0 ： O F FS E T_ O C
A： 1 1 6 ： B K- M AG 10 K E Y
A 11 6 1 0 KE Y S T AR T
B： 6 0 ： M A IN - MF T OK
［ 60 ～ 140 ］ E XI T 10
BAKCEKY C LE A R
C： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 1
D： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 2
1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 1 0K
3EY
6) Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
E： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 3
F： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 4
the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
G： 6 0 ： M A IN - LC C 1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 1 0K
6EY
H： 4 2 ： M A IN - AD U Setting Default
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 1 0K
9EY Item/Display Content
I： 6 0 ： S UB - MF T
range value
J： 6 0 ： S U B- C S1
K： 6 0 ： S U B- D SK
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 1 0K
#EY A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
L： 6 0 ： S U B- L CC edge reference position
1 0 KE Y S T AR T adjust- (OC)
E X EC U TE OK
B ment RRCB-CS1 Resist Standar 1 - 99 60
value motor ON d Tray
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the trays, and select the set C RRCB-DSK timing Desk 1 - 99 60
item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the D RRCB-LCC adjust- LCC 1 - 99 60
adjustment target paper feed tray. E RRCB-MFT ment Manual 1 - 99 60
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. paper
The adjustment pattern is printed. feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 60
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
are in the range of the standard values.
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
Content Standard adjustment value
value adjustment
X Lead edge void area 4.0  1.0mm
I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
adjust- adjustment
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0  2.0mm ment
J DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction

Setting Default 1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
Item/Display Content
range value
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
0
scanning correction value 　　　S
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 P A PE R C E NT E R O F FS E T S E TU P

A： 1 1 6 ： B K- M AG 10 K E Y
print area value A 11 6
B： 6 0 ： M A IN - MF T
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 ［ 60 ～ 140 ］

C： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 1
E XI T 10
BAKCEKY C LE A R
value value D： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 2
E： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 3 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 1 0K
3EY
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
F： 6 0 ： M A IN - CS 4
value G： 6 0 ： M A IN - LC C 1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 1 0K
6EY
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 H： 4 2 ： M A IN - AD U
value I： 6 0 ： S UB - MF T
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 1 0K
9EY
S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50 J： 6 0 ： S U B- C S1

1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 1 0K
#EY
K： 6 0 ： S U B- D SK
T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50 L： 6 0 ： S U B- L CC
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50 1 0 KE Y S T AR T

E X EC U TE OK
correction value
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is 2) Use the scroll key to select a paper feed tray which is to be
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void adjusted. (Items B - H)
area is decreased.
Setting Default
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is Item/Display Content
range value
changed by 0.1mm.
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 116
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related magnification ratio BK
as follows: B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area value (Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between value (Tray 1)
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust. value (Tray 2)
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
of all paper feed tray. value (Tray 3)
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
value (Tray 4)
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
each paper tray.
value (LCC)
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
that the void area is within the specified range. value (ADU)
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the NOTE:
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the Before execution of this
adjustment check to
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
insure that the adjustment
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. items A - G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
3-D Print engine image off-center adjustment this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 50
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. motor ON paper feed
* When a paper tray is replaced. J SUB-CS1 Timing Standard 1 - 99 50
adjustment tray
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
K SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
* When ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
(Main scanning direction) is performed.
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled. O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual 1-6 1 2
* When the duplex section is disassembled. paper feed (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
CS2 Tray 2 3
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced. CS3 Tray 3 4
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. CS4 Tray 4 5
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. LCC LCC 6
* U2 trouble has occurred. P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
(Note) cedure 2).
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
item. The adjustment pattern is printed.
* Check that the ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
adjustment (Main scanning direction) has been properly rect position.
adjusted. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.

RV
2.0mm 2.0mm ADJ 4 Scan image distortion
adjustment (OC mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the LED lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which
are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the
scanner unit A from the drive wire.
FV
2.0mm 2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA

FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 ±2.0mm
FV = 2.0 ±2.0mm
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed. When the adjustment value is increased, the adjust-
ment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is
decreased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame
side. When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
changed by about 0.1mm. Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
conditions of procedure 5) are satisfied. In case a satisfactory
result cannot be obtained by repeating the above procedures, When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
perform the following procedure. the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B. 4-B Scan image sub scanning direction
distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
L
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
B. If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce- make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
dures, perform the following procedures. Loosen the fixing
screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La Lb
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
the following procedures.
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)

5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- frame side.
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
is satisfied. If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be
deleted with the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image
distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit).
4-C Scan image main scanning direction

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the

scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail. Repeat the proce-
dures 2) - 5) until the difference between the image distortions
(distortion balance) is deleted.
L L 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
L = 10mm specified range. Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the dis-
tortion in the main scanning direction is in the specified range.
L
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image dis-
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
4-D Scan image distortion adjustment
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
(Whole scanner unit)
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.) This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 4A, ADJ 4B, and ADJ 4C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
and right-hand side images distortions.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
A A A
A
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.
(The distortions are balanced.) If the above condition is satis-
fied, go to the procedure 6). If not, perform the following proce-
dures.

When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise. When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is
adjustment (DSPF model) more than 1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the
DSPF rear frame counterclockwise. Repeat steps 2) to 3) until
5-A DSPF parallelism adjustment an acceptable result is obtained.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. the main unit.
* When a DSPF JAM is generated.
* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation.
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
5-B DSPF/RSPF skew adjustment

(Front surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The DSPF/RSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF/RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact). If the above require- the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
ment is not met, do step 3). the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
1mm
A Paper pass direction

A
0mm B
3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Open the DSPF/RSPF unit and loosen the screw.
paper in DSPF/RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image
for skews (Set in the DSPF/RSPF feed tray so that the mark
on the adjustment chart is at the edge).
* Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF/RSPF skew adjusting screw on the
right side of the DSPF/RSPF rear frame.
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
0 - 1.0mm
5-C DSPF skew adjustment

(Back surface mode)
A
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)".
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side, back sides of the paper.
then do step 3).
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
2
A Paper pass direction

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for adjust.
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
* Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment

6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
c
mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode)
d
[Check Method 2] * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction * The CCD unit has been replaced.
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within * When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
1.0mm. * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
0 - 1.0mm
0
A 　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 48 - 0 1
M A GN I FI C AT I O N A DJ U ST M E NT
C L OS E
A： 5 0 ： C CD ( MA I N ) 10 K EY
A 50
B： 5 0 ： C C D( S UB )
［ 1 ～ 99 ］ EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
C： 5 0 ： S P F( M AI N )
D： 5 0 ： S P F( S UB )
E： 5 0 ： S P FB ( MA I N ) 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the

front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) 1 0 KE Y S T AR T
OK
of "ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)".
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
procedures of step 3) or later. Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
3) Open the upper door and remove the adjustment cover. adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
100mm scale angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
1.0mm direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
Copy image than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(1mm (1%) One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
the original) At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the in procedure 9).
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
B
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 0.8%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is cal system structure.
replaced.

6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back direction) to change the installing position. When the copy
surface mode) image is longer than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the
This adjustment is required in the following cases: direction B. When the copy image is shorter than the original
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. One scale of mark-
off line corresponds to 0.2%. At that time, fix the CCD unit so
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
that it is in parallel with the scale on the front and the rear side
adjusted.
of the CCD unit base.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. in procedure 4).
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws and transport PG upper.
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the 7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
CCD unit base as shown below. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
0.8%, repeat the procedures of 4) - 6) until the condition is sat-
isfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.

ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* Never loosen the screws marked with 5.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust- position adjustment) must have been completed.
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.

7-A Main scanning direction image 7-B Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
(Document table mode) (Document table mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below. below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

0
　　　S
0
　　　S
A： 5 0 ： C CD ( MA I N ) 10 K EY
A 50 M A GN I FI C AT I O N A DJ U ST M E NT
B： 5 0 ： C C D( S UB ) 10 K EY
A： 5 0 ： C CD ( MA I N )
EX I T 10AKCEY
B K C LE A R
［ 1 ～ 99 ］
C： 5 0 ： S P F( M AI N ) A 50
B： 5 0 ： C C D( S UB )
D： 5 0 ： S P F( S UB ) ［ 1 ～ 99 ］ EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
C： 5 0 ： S P F( M AI N )
E： 5 0 ： S P FB ( MA I N ) 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
D： 5 0 ： S P F( S UB )
E： 5 0 ： S P FB ( MA I N ) 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
OK
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
OK
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy. Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 0.8%). If the copy magnification ratio is within the Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
specified range (100 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If cation ratio 100%
Original dimension
the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified range,
perform the following procedure.
(Example 1)
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- (Shorter than
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed the original)
by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 0.8%).
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
(Example 2)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 0.8%). If the copy magnification ratio is within the
specified range (100 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If
the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified range,

5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
0
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. When the 　　　S
adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio M A GN I FI C AT I O N A DJ U ST M E NT

10 K EY
is changed by about 0.1%. A 50
A： 5 0 ： C CD ( MA I N )
B： 5 0 ： C C D( S UB )
［ 1 ～ 99 ］ EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
C： 5 0 ： S P F( M AI N )
D： 5 0 ： S P F( S UB )
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is E： 5 0 ： S P FB ( MA I N ) 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
within the specified range (100 ±0.8%).

1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
7-C Main scanning direction image 1 0K

7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
magnification ratio adjustment 1 0K

*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: OK
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.

Setting Default
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. Item Display Content
range value
* When U2 trouble occurs. A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. magnification ratio
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled. adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
a. Adjustment procedures magnification ratio
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- adjustment (CCD)
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. The adjustment chart is pre- C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
pared by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper,
adjustment (Main scan)
and put marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
10mm from each edge.
adjustment (Sub scan)
Paper pass direction E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
A4 size surface magnification ratio
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the

magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
(Both the front surface * Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the magni-
and the back surface) fication ratio is increased by 0.1%.
10mm 10mm
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original the scroll key.
images. SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface)
original SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Back surface)
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
copy tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
10 50 100 150 200 250
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
10 50 100 150 200 250 machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
formula: tion mode.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

7-D Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment 0
(DSPF/RSPF mode) 　　　S
C L OS E
A： 5 0 ： C CD ( MA I N ) 10 K EY
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: A 50
B： 5 0 ： C C D( S UB )
EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. ［ 1 ～ 99 ］
C： 5 0 ： S P F( M AI N )
D： 5 0 ： S P F( S UB )
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. E： 5 0 ： S P FB ( MA I N ) 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
* When U2 trouble occurs.

1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.

1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures 1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- 1 0 KE Y S T AR T

OK
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. The adjustment chart is pre-
pared by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper,
Setting Default
and put marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at Item Display Content
range value
10mm from each edge.
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
10mm adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Paper pass direction magnification ratio
A4 size adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
10mm E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. adjustment (Main scan)
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
images.
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the
10

50
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.

6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
100
10
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
original
150
(Front surface)
50
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

200
100
(Back surface)
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
copy
150
key, and press [OK] key.

When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
200
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed

by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01%.
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula: Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%) NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
tion mode.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

4) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
ADJ 8 Scan image off-center 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
adjustment The entered value is set. When the set value is increased, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by
(Manual adjustment) 0.1mm.
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. copy mode and make a copy. Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6)
until the above condition is satisfied.
8-A Scan image off-center adjustment
(Document table mode) 8-B Scan image off-center adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (DSPF/RSPF mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the * When U2 trouble occurs.
adjustment mode (document table). * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 8A
Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
A must have been properly adjusted.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
A=B Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
direction.
B Paper transport direction
Front surface Back surface
2) Check the copy image center position.

If A' - B' = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
A'
Draw a line at the center of the

front surface and the back surface
A' - B' = 1.0mm of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
(100%)
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF/RSPF.

B'
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
original copy
a
0
　　　S
O R IG I NA L C E N TE R O F FS E T S E TU P
A： 50： OC 10 K EY
A 50
B： 5 0 ： S P F( S ID E 1 )
［ 1 ～ 99 ］ EX I T 10AKCEY
B K C LE A R
C： 5 0 ： S P F( S ID E 2 )
b
1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
If the difference is within the range of 0 2.7mmm there is no
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
need to perform the adjustment. If the adjustment is required,
perform the following procedures.
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
OK

4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. Setting Default
range value
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
(SIM 50 -1 2) 0 document off-center
　　　S
O R IG I NA L C E N TE R O F FS E T S E TU P adjustment
A： 50： OC 10 K EY
A 50
B： 5 0 ： S P F( S ID E 1 )
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
［ 1 ～ 99 ］
C： 5 0 ： S P F( S ID E 2 )
EX I T 10AKCEY
B K C LE A R
front surface
magnification ratio
1 0K
1EY 1 0K2 E Y 10 3K EY
adjustment (Sub
1 0K
4EY 1 0K5 E Y 10 6K EY scan)
1 0K
7EY 1 0K8 E Y 10 9K EY
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
1 0K
*EY 1 0K0 E Y 10 #K EY timing is delayed.
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
OK
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
0
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
(SIM5 0-6) countermeasures against the case when shades are
　　　S C L O SE
L E AD ED G E A D JU S TM E N T V AL U E( S P F)
A： 5 0 ： S ID E 1 10 K E Y
produced.
A 50
［ 1 ～ 99 ］
B： 5 0 ： S I DE 2
E XI T 10
BAKCEKY C L EA R
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
C： 2 0 ： L E AD _ ED G E (S I DE 1 )
D： 2 0 ： F R ON T _R E A R( S ID E 1 )
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 1 0K3 E Y

(SIM50-12)
E： 4 0 ： T R AI L _E D G E( S ID E 1 )
F： 4 0 ： L E AD _ ED G E (S I DE 2 )
G： 2 0 ： F R ON T _R E A R( S ID E 2 ) 1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 1 0K6 E Y

SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
H： 2 0 ： T R AI L _E D G E( S ID E 2 ) SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 1 0K9 E Y
I： 5 0 ： O FF S ET _ S PF 1
J： 5 0 ： O F FS E T_ S P F2 (SIM50-6)
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 1 0K# E Y
K： 5 0 ： S C AN _ SP E E D_ S PF 1
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode

1 0 K EY S T AR T
OK OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
SIM50-12
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Setting Default (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
Item Display Content
range value shifted to the rear.) Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a sat-
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 isfactory result is obtained.
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
center adjustment machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
center adjustment system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode.
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position,
SIM50-6 (DSPF) void area adjustment
Setting
range
Default
value
(Printer mode)
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
document scan * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
position adjustment
(CCD) * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 * U2 trouble has occurred.
document scan * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
position adjustment
(CIS)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
amount amount setting (3mm) in the printer mode.
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 0
　　　S
(SIDE1) edge image loss
L E AD ED G E A D JU S TM E NT V AL U E( P R IN T ER )
amount setting A： 3 0 ： D EN - C 10 K EY
A 30
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 40 B： 3 0 ： D E N- B
［ 1 ～ 99 ］
C： 2 0 ： F R ON T /R E A R
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
D： 5 0 ： D E NB - MF T
amount amount setting 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
E： 5 0 ： D E NB - CS 1
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20 F： 5 0 ： D E NB - CS 2
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount G： 5 0 ： D E NB - CS 3 1 0K

4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
setting H： 5 0 ： D E NB - CS 4
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
I： 5 0 ： D EN B -L C C
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
J： 5 0 ： D E NB - AD U
(SIDE2) edge image loss K： 5 0 ： D E NB - HV
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
amount setting L： 1 ： M U LT I C O U NT
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 E X EC U TE OK

1 0 KE Y S T AR T
document off-center
adjustment

2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper printed. When the adjustment value is increased, the distance
in it. from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is
Setting Default decreased. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance
range value is changed by about 0.1mm.
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
lead edge image position.
(PRINTER MODE) NOTE: To adjust the void area, change the adjustment values of
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 items B and C.
adjustment
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
adjustment
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
ADJ 10 Copy image position, image
area adjustment correction loss, and void area adjustment
value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
(Manual adjustment)
adjustment correction value This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
adjustment correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value 10-A Copy image position, image loss, void area
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Document table mode)
adjustment correction value This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50 * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
adjustment correction value * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
K DENB-HV Heavy paper rear edge void 1 - 99 50 * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
area adjustment correction
value * U2 trouble has occurred.
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1) * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
selection paper feed
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
CS1 Tray 1 2
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4 NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
CS4 Tray 4 5 the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image
LCC LCC 6 magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com-
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO) pleted normally.
NO selection No 1 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below. Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning
direction and that its lead edge is in contact with the document
The adjustment pattern is printed. guide plate. Place white paper on the document table so that
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment the scale lead edge can be seen.
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard adjustment value: 4.0 ±2.0mm
4.0 2.0mm

5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.

Scale image 3.0mm position
Paper lead
0
edge
　　　S
L E AD ED G E A D JU S TM E NT V AL U E
A： 5 0 ： R RC A 10 K EY
A 50
B： 6 0 ： R R CB - CS 1
［ 0 ～ 99 ］ EX I T 10AKCEY
B K C LE A R
C： 6 0 ： R R CB - DS K
D： 6 0 ： R R CB - LC C 100%
E： 6 0 ： R R CB - MF T 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
5mm 10mm
F： 6 0 ： R R CB - AD U
G： 4 0 ： L E AD 1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
H： 2 0 ： S I DE
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
I： 4 0 ： D EN A
J： 3 0 ： D E NB
200%
K： 2 0 ： F R ON T /R E A R
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY 5mm 10mm
L： 5 0 ： O F FS E T_ O C
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
OK
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values. 5) Image loss adjustment
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
Setting Default
Item/Display Content default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
edge edge reference change these adjustment items.
adjust- position (OC)
Paper lead edge
B ment RRCB-CS1 Resist Standard 1 - 99 60
value motor Tray
C RRCB-DSK ON Desk 1 - 99 60
timing LCC Copy area
D RRCB-LCC 1 - 99 60
adjust- Manual Maginification ratio : 400%
E RRCB-MFT 1 - 99 60
ment paper feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 60
1 2 3 4
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40 10mm
5mm
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
adjust- area adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 De- Standard
adjustment Item/ Adjustment
Content fault adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20 Display range
value value
REAR area adjustment LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50 adjustment image loss  1.0mm
adjust- OC center adjustment adjustment
ment SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 loss  1.0mm
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio adjustment
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
scanning correction value image loss is decreased. When the adjustment value is
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 changed by 1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
T Sub DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
scanning value
U direction DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
print area correction value
correction
value
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.

Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
mode. When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead
edge image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and
200% copy scale. If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.) Repeat the
above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

10-B Document scan position adjustment 10-C Copy mode image loss adjustment
(DSPF/RSPF mode scanner scan position (DSPF/RSPF mode)
adjustment) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. * When U2 trouble occurs.
* When U2 trouble occurs. * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled. * When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the following items must have
This simulation is to adjust the scanner reading position when been properly adjusted.
scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode. If this adjustment is
ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment
made improperly, the scanner stop position is shifted to the speci-
ADJ 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
fied position and a shade of the document table may be reflected
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
on the lead edge section of the scan image in the DSPF/RSPF
ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(front surface) mode.
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
a. Adjustment procedures ADJ 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ 10B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF/RSPF
1) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF (front surface) mode, and
mode scanner scan position adjustment)
check for any shade on the lead edge section of the copy
image. a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
dures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks verti-
Papar lead edge cally and horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. At the
same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, the front
Image area end, and the rear end as well as the identification marks of the
front surface and the back surface.
R Front surface
FACE
Shadow image of DSPF
L T
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge

section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
Put the position
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key. marks.
F
0
　　　S
S P F S CA N NI N G P O SI T IO N AD J US T M EN T
10 K E Y
Draw arrows.
AUTO M A NU A L
E XI T 10
BAKCEKY C LE A R
R Back surface
BACK
1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 1 0K
3EY
1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 1 0K
6EY
L T
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 1 0K
9EY
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 1 0K
#EY
Put the position

1 0 KE Y S T AR T
1/1 marks.
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. F
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the DSPF/RSPF scanning position is increased. Draw arrows.
When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is
changed by 0.1mm.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ
10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF
mode).

2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode. (Lead edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIM50-6) 0 (SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to
　　　S
C L O SE
the following values.
L E AD ED G E A D JU S TM E N T V AL U E( S P F)
A 50
A： 5 0 ： S ID E 1 10 K E Y
(Standard set value)
B： 5 0 ： S I DE 2
［ 1 ～ 99 ］
C： 2 0 ： L E AD _ ED G E (S I DE 1 )
E XI T 10BAKCEKY C L EA R LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1):
D： 2 0 ： F R ON T _R E A R( S ID E 1 ) 20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
E： 4 0 ： T R AI L _E D G E( S ID E 1 ) 1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 1 0K3 E Y
F： 4 0 ： L E AD _ ED G E (S I DE 2 )
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2):
G： 2 0 ： F R ON T _R E A R( S ID E 2 ) 1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 1 0K6 E Y 30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
H： 2 0 ： T R AI L _E D G E( S ID E 2 )
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 1 0K9 E Y

(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
I： 5 0 ： O FF S ET _ S PF 1
J： 5 0 ： O F FS E T_ S P F2
increased.)
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 1 0K# E Y
K： 5 0 ： S C AN _ SP E E D_ S PF 1
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
1 0 K EY S T AR T 2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
OK
to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.0 1.0mm
(DSPF) on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead
edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
Setting Default
range value
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
the image lead edge.
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
(CIS)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss Copy image
amoun amount setting
D t FRONT_REA Front surface side 0 - 99 20
setting R (SIDE1) image loss amount
SIDE1 setting
E TRAIL_EDG Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
Image loss
E (SIDE1) edge image loss 4.0 1.0mm
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 40 If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss procedure.
G t FRONT_REA Back surface side 0 - 99 20
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
setting R (SIDE2) image loss amount press [OK] key.
SIDE2 setting Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
H TRAIL_EDG Back surface rear 0 - 99 20 sumed image lead edge.
E (SIDE2) edge image loss SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
document off- (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
center adjustment tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50 (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
document off-
center adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
obtained.
front surface (Rear edge image loss adjustment)
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
scan) to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed. Paper rear edge
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter-
measures against the case when shades are produced.
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the Copy image
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode.
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following Job
procedure. Adjustment item Sim
No
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) AD Developing ADJ Toner density control reference 25-2
with 10-key, and press [OK] key. J1 unit adjust- 1C value setting
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): ment
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface) ADJ High voltage ADJ Main charger grid voltage 8-2
2 value 2A adjustment
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
adjustment ADJ Developing bias voltage 8-1
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
2B adjustment
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image ADJ Transfer current and voltage 8-6
loss is increased.) 2C adjustment
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) ADJ Transfer separation bias 8-17
2D voltage adjustment
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
obtained.
6
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) ADJ Gray balance/ ADJ Scanner calibration (CCD 63-3
11 density 11A calibration)
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
adjustment
to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and
the rear frame side are 2.0 2.0mm on the front surface and the Note for the gray balance/density check and adjustments
back surface. When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in the
automatic gray balance adjustment procedures, place 5 sheets of
Paper F Image loss
side edge 2.0 2.0mm white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to prevent back
copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far as possible.
Copy image
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the
gray balance/density check and adjustment
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the gray balance/
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and
the servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the gray balance/density adjustment proce-
dures depending on the actual conditions.
Copy image There are following four, major cases.
Paper R Image loss 1) When installing (When a printer option is installed)
side edge 2.0 2.0mm
2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following 3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
procedure. (When a consumable part is replaced.)
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) / 4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key. (Without replacement of a consumable part)
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface) (3) Copy gray balance and density check
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
NOTE: Before checking the copy gray balance and density, be
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
sure to execute the following jobs.
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
loss is increased.)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Method 1
obtained.
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ), and check
that they are proper.
Note for checking the density
ADJ 11 Gray balance/density
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
adjustment and the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
(1) Note before execution of the gray balance/density 0326FC11). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
adjustment Printed Photo mode (Manual).
* Requisite conditions before execution of the gray balance/den- In addition, all the gray balance adjustments in the user adjustment
sity adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
Before execution of the gray balance/density adjustment, check Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
to insure that the adjustments which affect the gray balance/den- In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
sity have been completed properly. the following conditions.
(Though the following items affect the gray balance/density, (Black-and-white copy)
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.) SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
Job
Adjustment item Sim
No
ADJ Developing unit ADJ Developing doctor gap
1 adjustment 1A adjustment Patch 3 is copied.
ADJ Developing roller main pole Patch 1 is not copied.
1B position adjustment

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
Display/Item Adjustment items

1 There are 12 void areas. ADJ3-A to C Sim50-28
2 The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) Check the dirtof the OC glass
can be seen. Clean the OC glass/mirror of
the scanner
ADJ11-D12
3 The color difference in gray bal- Sim61-11
ance between the F and th sides ADJ11-B Sim46-74
is not so great. Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment
4 There are no white and black Clean the mirror of the LSU/
streaks. Main Charger/ the mirror of
the scanner
5 The background density is not so ADJ11-B Sim46-74
light. Copy/Printer gray balance and density adjustment
6 The black low-density gradation is ADJ11-B Sim46-74
copied slightly. Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment

(4) Printer gray balance/density check
11-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
NOTE: Before checking the copy gray balance and the density, be
sure to execute the following procedures in advance.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) * When a U2 trouble is occurred.
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Method 1 * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
11-A (1)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
print test pattern is printed. (Document table mode)
(1) Note before adjustment
? Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
? Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.

2 : ‘16/Jan
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC <Descriptions of keys>
Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
Display Content
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
and low humidity. DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode)
11-A (2)
<Result display>
Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF
mode) Display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion
2 (1) Note before adjustment ERROR Abnormal completion
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan- INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.) 11-A (3)
2) Open the DSPF document scanning section, insert the shad- CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
ing adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ), and close the DSPF
document scanning section.
(DSPF mode)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches. If they are dirty, clean them. If
they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
NOTE:
Since the SIT chart is easily discolored by sunlight (especially
ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag
* When inserting the shading adjustment sheet, insert it along such as a clear file) and store in a dark place of low tempera-
the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of the shading ture and low humidity.
adjustment sheet comes to the root of the actuator.

4) Select [DSPF SHADING].
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The shading adjustment process is
started.)
* The shading adjustment sheet is transported by about
25mm, and shading data are obtained during transport.
* During shading adjustment, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is
displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during shading adjust-
ment, the operation is interrupted.
* When shading adjustment is completed normally, [EXE-
CUTE] key returns to the normal display and "COMPLETE"
is displayed.

(2) Adjustment procedures
0
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) 　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 63 - 0 3 CL O SE
S C AN N ER CO L O R B AL A N CE AU T O A D JU S TM E N T
face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray. S ET TH E CH A RT O N P LA T EN A ND TO U C H [ EX E CU T E ] 10 K EY
EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
1 0K* E Y 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
E X EC U T E 1/ 1
5) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color

auto adjustment is executed.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the 0
CIS gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- 　　　S
T E ST I MU L AT I O N　　N O . 63 - 03 C LO S E
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment S CA N NE R CO L OR B AL A NC E A U T O A DJ U ST M E NT
N OW CH A RT P AT C H R EA D I NG . .. 1 0 KE Y
method using the SIT chart.

EXIT 1B0AKE
CKY CL E AR
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode. 10 1K EY 10 2K EY 1 0 3KE Y
10 4K EY 10 5K EY 1 0 6KE Y
0
　　　S
T E ST I MU L A TI O N　　 NO . 63 - 0 3 C LO S E
10 7K EY 10 8K EY 1 0 9KE Y
S C AN N ER CO L O R B AL A NC E AU T O A DJ U S TM E NT
OC # 1: 1 97 , # 2 :1 8 5, # 3 : 16 5 , # 4: 1 48 , # 5 :1 1 7, # 6 : 11 0 , 1 0 K EY
10 *K EY 10 0K EY 1 0 #KE Y
# 7: 88 , # 8 : 7 5, # 9 : 5 5 , # 1 0: 45 , # 1 1 : 3 8, #1 2 : 2 9 ,
EX I T 1B0AKCKEY CL E A R
# 1 3: 27 , # 1 4 : 2 1, # 15 : 1 8 , # 1 6: 15 , # 1 7 : 1 0, #1 8 : 8,
# 1 9: 5, #20: 4, # 22 : 2 , # 2 4: 2 1 0K E Y S TA R T
10 1K EY 10 2K E Y 1 0 3K EY E XE C UT E 1/1
C # 2 : 18 0 , C # 6 : 14 1 , C # 12 : 8 9 R # 2 : 16 6 , R # 6 : 4 3 , R # 12 : 4
M # 2 : 18 0 , M # 6 : 14 1 , M # 12 : 8 9 G # 2 : 16 6 , G # 6 : 4 3 , G # 12 : 4 10 4K EY 10 5K E Y 1 0 6K EY 6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed

Y # 2 : 18 0 , Y # 6 : 14 1 , Y # 12 : 8 9 B # 2 : 16 6 , B # 6 : 4 3 , B # 12 : 4
10 7K EY 10 8K E Y 1 0 9K EY
in the initial screen.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis-
10 *K EY 10 0K E Y 1 0 #K EY
played. When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated.
1 0K E Y S TA R T When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns
B G R DS P F OC 1/2
to the sub number entry screen.
3) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the 0

　　　S
T E ST I MU L A TI O N　　 NO . 63 - 03 C LO S E
selected color is displayed. S C AN N ER CO L O R B AL A NC E AU T O A DJ U S TM E NT
S CA N NE R MO T OR IS N OT RE A DY 1 0K E Y
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,

E X IT 1B0KACEKY C L EA R
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
of the selected color is displayed. 1 0 1KE Y 1 0 2KE Y 1 0 3KE Y
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but- 1 0 4KE Y 1 0 5KE Y 1 0 6KE Y
ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.

* 1 0 7KE Y 1 0 8KE Y 1 0 9KE Y
0 1 0 *KE Y 1 0 0KE Y 1 0 #KE Y

　　　S
OC # 1: 1 97 , # 2 :1 8 5, # 3 : 16 5 , # 4 : 1 48 , # 5 :1 1 7, # 6 : 11 0 , 1 0K E Y 10 K E Y ST A RT
E XE C UT E 1/1
# 7: 88 , # 8 : 7 5, # 9 : 5 5 , # 10 : 45 , # 1 1 : 3 8, #1 2 : 2 9 ,
# 1 3: 27 , # 1 4 : 2 1, #1 5 : 1 8 , # 16 : 15 , # 1 7 : 1 0, #1 8 : 8,
# 1 9: 5, #20: 4, #2 2 : 2 , # 24 : 2
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error
1 0 KE
1 Y 1 0 KE
2 Y 1 0 KE
3 Y
C # 2 : 18 0 , C # 6 : 14 1 , C # 12 : 8 9 R # 2 : 16 6 , R # 6 : 4 3 , R # 12 : 4
patch numbers are displayed. When [RESULT] button is
M # 2 : 18 0 , M # 6 : 14 1 , M # 12 : 8 9 G # 2 : 16 6 , G # 6 : 4 3 , G # 12 : 4 1 0 KE
4 Y 1 0 KE
5 Y 1 0 KE
6 Y
pressed, the display returns to the initial screen. (The previous
Y # 2 : 18 0 , Y # 6 : 14 1 , Y # 12 : 8 9 B # 2 : 16 6 , B # 6 : 4 3 , B # 12 : 4
1 0 KE
7 Y 1 0 KE
8 Y 1 0 KE
9 Y
value is displayed)
1 0 KE
* Y 1 0 KE
0 Y 1 0 KE
# Y
0
　　　S
10 K E Y ST A RT
B G R DS P F OC 1/2
S AM P LI N G D A TA UN F I T 1 0 K EY
# 1 , # 2 , # 3 , # 4 , # 5 , # 6 , # 7 , # 8 , # 9 , #1 0 , # 11 , #1 2 , # 13 , #1 4 , # 15 ,
4) When [DSPF] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color # 16 , # 1 7 , # 18 , # 1 9 , # 20 , #2 2 , # 24

EX I T 1B0AKCKEY CL E A R
automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed. P LE A SE C HE C K T HE C HA R T A N D P LA T EN G LA S S
10 1K EY 10 2K E Y 1 0 K3 EY
10 4K EY 10 5K E Y 1 0 K6 EY
10 7K EY 10 8K E Y 1 0 K9 EY
10 *K EY 10 0K E Y 1 0 K# EY
1 0K E Y S TA R T
B G R R ES U LT 1/1
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-

played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)

11-B Copy/Printer gray balance and density
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. General
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy gray balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer gray bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy gray balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer gray balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
matic copy gray balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
the automatic printer gray balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer gray balance and the density adjust-
ment individually.
The gray balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the density automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
all the copy/printer modes are revised.

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto
j gray( balance adjustment
j )( by )the serviceman)
(Copy gray balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed
to print the check pattern.)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*3)
(Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed
to print the check pattern.)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*1)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)
Cancel SIM46-74.
Check the copy gray balance and density adjustment result.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text

/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy gray balance and density.
Use SIM46-16 to print the gray balance check pattern, and check the patch gray
balance and density.
Execute ADJ11C(2) (Copy gray balance and

Are the gray balance and density NO
density adjustment) (Manual adjustment).
at the specified level? *1:
(SIM46-16/44-21) (*2)
If the initial setting of the
YES halftone image correction is
not properly adjusted,
satisfactory gray balance and
density cannot be obtained.
Check the printer gray balance and density adjustment result with the self print In this case, check the print
check pattern. engine for any problems.
*2:
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print If satisfactory gray balance and
check pattern, and check the printer density are not obtained with
gray balance and density. ADJ11C(2) (Copy gray balance
and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment)
Execute ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and (SIM46-16/44-21), check the
Are the gray balance and density NO
density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). print engine for any problems.
at the specified level?
(SIM67-25)
*3:
If there is any streak or unclear
YES copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine
End for any problems.

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
The high density process control is performed, and the copy and prints the gray balance check patch image.
gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) tern, check the print engine for any problems.
.QYFGPUKV[ *KIJFGPUKV[
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Უ6JGOCZFGPUKV[UGEVKQPKUPQVDNWTTGF
Უ2CVEJ%QT&KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF
Უȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUKFGPVKECNDGVYGGPRCVEJGUQTPQVTGXGTUGF
ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[
3) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
procedure 2) on the document table. The printer gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the gray patch selected.)
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray patch image
(adjustment pattern).

6) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-
procedure 5) on the document table. played. Press [OK] key.
Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the The initial setting of the halftone image correction is per-
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the gray patch formed.
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, 9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray patch image press it.
The halftone image correction is performed.
10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
adjustment operation is completed.
Cancel SIM46-74.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed.
For example, if the copy gray balance adjustment (auto-
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can-
celed, the adjustment result is invalid.
11) Check the copy gray balance and density.

(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance and density check.)
When the gray balance and the density are unsatisfactory after
the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in pro-
cedure 4), execute the manual gray balance adjustment
(ADJ11C (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
11C (2)).
12) Check the printer gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
If a satisfactory result on the gray balance and the density is
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
When the gray balance is customized with the manual gray ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)).
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
request and the gray balance is registered as the service tar- cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
get with SIM 67-27, if the gray balance is adjusted to that gray obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
balance, select the [SERVICE] target. 11E (2)).
The printer gray balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
performed and the gray balance check patch image is printed after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
out. may be another cause.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat- Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
tern, check the print engine for any problems. repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Უ2CVEJ#QT$KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF

11-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
11-C (1)
Copy gray balance and density adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
a. General
The gray balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density automatically.
all the copy modes are revised.
There are following two modes in the auto gray balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24 is
used.)
2) Auto gray balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The gray balance target is the service target.)
The auto gray balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy gray balance is lost for some reason, the user can
use this gray balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
lem occurs, or the normal gray targets cannot be obtained,
service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Start
Execute ADJ10C(1) Copy gray balance and density adjustment

(automatic adjustment ).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. press

[EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*1)
Cancel SIM46-24
Check the gray balance and density adjustment result.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy gray bal-
ance and density.
Use SIM46-16 to print the gray balance check pattern, and check the
patch gray balance and density in the process gray. (If the gray bal-
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*1)
Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
*1:
Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
gray balance and density cannot be
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) obtained. In this case, check the print engine
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check for any problems.
the gray balance and density. *2:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print
engine for any problems.
NO Are the gray balance and den-
sity at the satisfactory level?
YES
End

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
automatically selected.) to print the gray balance check patch image. Wait until the
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro- 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
cedure 2) on the document table. According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
Place the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on halftone image correction is performed.
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on NOTE:
the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
image (adjustment pattern) paper. correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
6) Check the gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance and density check.)
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
gray balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy gray
balance and density check.)
If the copy gray balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy gray balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
gray balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy gray
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may be
another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

When the gray balance and the density are unsatisfactory after the
automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in procedure 11-C (2)
4), execute the manual adjustment (SIM46-16)(ADJ11C (2)). Copy gray balance and density adjustment
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute (Manual adjustment)
the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, a. General
perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ 11C(2)). The gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density. This is used at the following situation. When the
If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When
may be another cause. there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the gray
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and balance.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning. This manual adjustment is executed only for the gray patch which
could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the gray balance is improper, execute the automatic gray balance
adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
ciency.

Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM46-16)
Start
Execute ADJ11C(2) (Copy gray balance and density adjustment)

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-16 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern.
Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the gray balance and density in the gray balance

check pattern.
Are the gray balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
YE S
Cancel the SIM46-16 mode.
Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Chec k the copy gray balance and density adjustment result with the
test char t. (*1)
Use the test char t (UK OG-0326FCZZ/UK OG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and chec k
the gray balance and density.
Are the gray balance NO

sfactor y level?
YE S
Chec k to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Perform the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26)
Use the test char t (UK OG-0326FCZZ/UK OG-0326FC11)

to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and chec k
the gray balance and density. *1:
If satisf actor y gray balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, chec k the print
engine for any problems .
NO Are the gray balance *2:
and density at the sati- If the initial setting of the halftone image
sfactor y level? correction is not properly adjusted, satisf actor y
gray balance and density cannot be obtained. In
YE S this case , chec k the print engine for any problems .
Set the SERVICE target for the automatic copy gray

balance adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End

1) Enter the SIM46-16 mode. 7) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is (Forcible execution)
automatically selected.) Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment pattern is printed. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the gray It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
balance is satisfactory. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
If not, execute the following procedures. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-

0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
copy gray balance/density check.)
If the copy gray balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level, there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 from the beginning.
NOTE:
If the gray balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
gray balance as the service target.
ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[ If the gray balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized gray balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic gray balance adjustment can be made in
the next gray balance adjustment.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the gray balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
gray balance stated above.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic gray balance and
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 4) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
5) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance/density check.)
6) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
image correction.)
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
NOTE:
This procedure is to save the copy gray balance adjustment
data as the reference data for the halftone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 11C (2) (Gray balance
adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-16, be sure to execute this
procedure.
When ADJ 11C (1) (Gray balance adjustment, Auto) is exe-
cuted with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically exe-
cuted.

11-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments ADJ 11B and ADJ 11C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode)   - - - - - -
(separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No - -   - - - -
need to adjust normally)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) - - - -   - -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-08 Image send mode RGB gray balance adjustment (separately for the low- - -   - - - -
density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-09 DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment        -
46-10 Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment (for each copy mode) (No need to   - - - - - -
adjust normally)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each monochrome   - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density  - - -  -  -
scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-23 Copy high density image density reproduction setting   - - - - - -
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-24 Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)   - - - - - -
46-32 Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the  - - -  -  -
automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the
scanning section)
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction   - -    
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - -  -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - -  -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) - - - - - -  -
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) - - - - - -  -
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) - - - - - -  -
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode) - - - - - -  -
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) - - - - - -  -
46-46 FAX send image density adjustment (RGB_RIP) - - - - - -  -
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send image (JPEG) compression        
ratio setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-48 Copy output resolution setting   - - - - - -
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy mode heavy paper and the image   - - - - - -
process mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode heavy paper and the image   - - - - - -
process mode (dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for each dither (Automatic   - - - - - -
adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting - - - - -  - -
46-60 Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No need to adjust normally) - -  - - - - 
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment (No need to adjust normally)       - -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image process, automatic exposure       - -
mode operation conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode)       - -
46-66 Watermark adjustment   - - - - - -
46-74 Printer/Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)   - - - - - 
(Basic adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process operation setting (Normally - -   - - - -
unnecessary to the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment - -   - - - -

11-D (1) 11-D (2)
Monochrome copy density adjustment Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment
(for each monochrome copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
(separately for the low-density area and the This adjustment is used to execute the gray balance adjustment for
high-density area) each density level.
(No need to adjust normally) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. * When there is necessity to change the gray balance and gamma
by each the copy mode individually.
* When there is request from the user.
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the key.
copy mode individually.
Density level Adjustment
* When there is request from the user. Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode. A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Setting D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Display/Item Content Default
range E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
HIGH 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 sity is decreased.
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 adjusted.
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 printed out.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the gray balance
and the density for each density level (point).
5) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value. Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.

11-D (3) 11-D (4)
Monochrome copy density, gamma Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode document density scanning
mode) (No need to adjust normally) operation (exposure operation) conditions
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each setting (Normally no need to set)
density level in each monochrome copy mode. Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
* When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode. When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
* When there is request from the user. ment, change the setting.
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. This setting is required in the following cases.
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
key. automatic copy mode.
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default * When a document with colored background is copied.
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 "PART", in some cases.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 Display/Item Content Set value Default
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is PART
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased. NOTE:
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively MODE1: Normal gamma
adjusted. MODE2: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point STOP:
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively. Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is decides the output image density according to the density of that
printed out. part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by REALTIME:
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
practical to make a copy and check it. the output image density according to the density of each part of
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the gray balance the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
and the density for each density level (point). whole area.)
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. PRESCAN:
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
put image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
surface.)
copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE

Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light, output 11-D (5)
image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc- Document low density image density
ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased reproduction adjustment in the automatic
by control. monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
Document table/DSPF mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
3 to 7mm
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
AE WIDTH = FULL * When there is request from the user.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
Document table mode adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
3 to 7mm Setting Default

range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
100mm
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
AE WIDTH = PART D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
DSPF mode I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
3 to 7mm
11-D (6)
Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode)
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
Document density detection area * When there is request from the user.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Set
value
A COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
B COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
E COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- Setting Default
ground and the low density image is decreased. range value
A CPY SOFT Sharpness: SOFT 1-3 1 2
PUSH CENTER The CENTER 2 (CEN-
AUTO HIGH sharpness is HIGH 3 TER)
11-D (7) FILTER specified
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color LEVEL when the
document
document reproduction adjustment
mode is
(No need to adjust normally) judged as A5
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow or A6 by the
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow auto mode of
PUSH.
image in monochrome copy mode.
B B/W OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 1(ON)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. COPY mixture,
ON ON 1
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red Register
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in select
monochrome copy mode. pattern,
Monochrome
copy
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode. C COLOR OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 1(ON)
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. PUSH: ON mixture, ON 1
RGB Register
Setting Default select
range value pattern,
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 104 Color push
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 817 D B/W OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 1(ON)
C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299 PUSH ON mixture, ON 1
Register
D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
select
pattern,
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B) (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio) Monochrome
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B) push
(1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP) E B/W OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 0(OFF)
PRINT ON mixture, ON 1
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Register
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, select
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment pattern,
Monochrome
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
print
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
copy density of yellow image is decreased. When the adjust- 3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
ment value is decreased, copy density of yellow image is process mode).
increased. ? Adjustment item A:
4) Press [OK] key. When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
(manual), check the copy. Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37 numeric value to decrease moire.
mode and change the adjustment value. ? Adjustment item B:
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
obtained. moire.
? Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
11-D (8) improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
Monochrome copy/color scan mode 4) Press [OK] key.
sharpness adjustment 5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
(No need to adjust normally) If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in mono- and change the adjustment value.
chrome copy/color scan mode. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
shade part.
* When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode.
(obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
shade part (for decrease of asperity)
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
* To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.

11-D (9) Item Button Display Content
Setting Default
Copy high density image density range value
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
reproduction setting (Normally SIDEA: exposure adjustment
unnecessary to the setting change) LOW (Low density side)
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, SIDEA: exposure adjustment
change the setting. LOW (Low density side)
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are LOW exposure adjustment
case of following, change the setting. (Low density side)
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of SIDEA: exposure adjustment
high density. HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
* When there is request from the user. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
a. Adjustment procedure HIGH (High density side)
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure adjustment
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
(High density)
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
Setting Default
Item Display Content SIDEB: exposure adjustment
range value
LOW (Low density side)
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
(0:ENABLE correction mode: Enable
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
1:DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
correction mode: Disable
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
LOW exposure adjustment
TARGET BLACK max. density
(Low density side)
correction
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better. SIDEB: exposure adjustment
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 HIGH (High density side)
to item A and B. F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
The tone gap may occur in high density part. HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If G BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
these values are changed, density of the high density part SIDEB: R R
is changed. H BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy SIDEB: G G
gray balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment) I BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

11-D (10) In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) numeric value.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following 4) Press [OK] key.
cases, make changes to the setting: 5) Make a copy in the DSPF mode and check the copy.
* When copy in DSPF mode differs from copy in document table If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode
mode. and change the adjustment value.
* When copy density in DSPF mode is low or too high. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
SIDEA:LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part,
select "D (COPY SIDEA:HIGH)".

11-D (11) 11-D (12)
Automatic gray balance adjustment by the Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for
user (Copy gray balance automatic each dither (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment ENABLE setting and a. General
adjustment) This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
a. General mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto gray cali- b. Adjustment procedures
bration (auto adjustment of the copy gray balance and density). 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion with SIM 26-53. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
gray balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged adequate enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
explained to the user.
b. Setting procedure
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto gray calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy gray balance and density) is not dis-
played in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto gray balance adjust-

ment))
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target gray bal-
ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the
above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
cannot be made properly.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
1) Enter the system setting mode. printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
2) Enter the copy setting mode. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
3) Press the auto gray calibration key. (adjustment pattern).
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
5) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in proce-
dure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
shown in the figure.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above gray
patch image (adjustment pattern).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy gray balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
The message, "Will you go on to the printer gray balance
adjustment?" is displayed.
To execute the printer gray balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
The gray balance and the density are automatically adjusted. dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
mality.
5) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item
Content
(Mode/Image)
Heavy Paper *1 Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in the
heavy paper mode
B/W Ed Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in the text
mode, Text/Photograph mode, Light density document
mode and the map mode.
B/W 1200 Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 1
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,

load paper in the tray 3, 4.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
The gray balance and the density are automatically adjusted,
and the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
10) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

11-D (13)
Dropout color adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the range of reproduction of color
document images as monochrome images in the image send mode
(monochrome manual text mode).
In other words, it is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
images which are reproduced as monochrome images.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.
Setting Default
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome

manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.
When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,
Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.
Reproduced
image
SIM value 0 SIM value 6

SIM value 3
(Minimum value) (Maximum value)
(Default)
The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
is outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

11-D (14)
Watermark adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the
2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in
watermark in the copy/printer mode.
the following list according to the situation.
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output).
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print NOTE: Normally there is no need to adjust the PATTERN mode
(secondary output). (items E and F), the COPY MODE, and the POSITION
mode.
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust-
ment.
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
is not obtained from the adjustment in the system setting mode.)
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
is not obtained from the adjustment with the printer driver.)
Setting Default
Category Item Display Content
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23
D CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2
E HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42
F HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42
COPY A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
MODE ON
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
F MAP Map mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
G LIGHT Light density document mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
H AUTO Automatic mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
I DEFAULT MODE Default exposure mode TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO 0-5 0
Used to specify the exposure mode set TEXT
when the watermark is ON. PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box (24P - 36P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box (37P - 48P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box (49P - 64P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box (65P - 80P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (24P - 36P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (37P - 48P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (49P - 64P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (65P - 80P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (24P - 36P) (*3) 0 - 200 60
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (37P - 48P) (*3) 0 - 200 90
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (49P - 64P) (*3) 0 - 200 120
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (65P - 80P) (*3) 0 - 200 150
*1: When the adjustment value is varied by 1, the line space is varied by 0.1mm.
*2: When the adjustment value is varied by 1, the upper and the lower margins are varied by 0.1mm.
*3: When the adjustment value is varied by 1, the left and the right margins are varied by 0.1mm.

Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - C NOTE: Watermarks have the following characteristics:
and trade off Note for * A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text
watermarks documents. If it is used with photos or images, the
Kinds of containing characters may be seen in the watermark
watermarks Adjustment document (primary output) or the containing characters
(Mode Density values of may not appear properly in the watermark copy
Effect
selected in value adjustment (secondary output).
the watermark items A - C * When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or
copy mode) other dark-background documents, the containing
Characters Decrease. The adjustment The watermark images characters may not appear in the watermark copy
appearing. value is become easy to (secondary output).
decreased. disappear. * Containing characters may not appear in the watermark
The containing copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the
characters become copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary
lighter. output) and the copy mode.
Increase. The adjustment The containing * Containing characters may not appear clearly in the
value is characters become watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the
increased. darker. copy mode in which the watermark document (primary
The watermark images output) is made.
become difficult to * When the print engine status changes, the containing
disappear. characters may not be concealed properly in the
Background Decrease. The adjustment The containing watermark document (primary output). In this case,
appearing. value is characters become easy follow the procedures below to conceal the containing
decreased. to disappear. characters.
The watermark images * Use SIM46-24 to execute the gray balance
become easy to adjustment.
disappear. * Use SIM46-54 to execute the gray balance adjustment
Increase. The adjustment The watermark images for each dither.
value is become darker. * Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system
increased. The containing setting.
characters become * The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
difficult to disappear. setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an
actual copy image.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. * When the document control (printer mode) is used
together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing"
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
Descriptions on the watermark together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced.
Containing * In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a
characters watermark cannot be used together.
Copy / Print Copy
Watermark adjustment in the system setting
System setting Security setting Watermark print
COPY INHIBITED Contrast tab
COPY INHIBITED Watermark

kind mode Density Adjustment
COPY INHIBITED selection
Character To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
Document Watermark document Watermark copy appearing text density (Default: 5)
(Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output) To decrease the Increase the contrast value.
Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other text density (Default value: 5)
(This machine) company's machine) Background To increase the Increase the contrast value.
appearing text density (Default value: 5)
Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY To decrease the Decrease the contrast value.
characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters. text density (Default: 5)
Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and
NOTE:
watermarks "Background appearing."
When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54
background disappears and the containing characters When the gray balance automatic adjustment is executed with
appear. SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are
When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied,
reproduced, use SIM46-54 to execute the gray balance auto-
the watermark of the character area disappears and the
matic adjustment for each dither.
containing characters become outline characters.
Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough However, note the following items.
watermarks dots. * When either of item E or F of the PATTERN mode is 42, the
Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
disappearing patterns. WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
Since rough dots remain when copied, they are called
remaining patterns. * When either of item E or F of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are WOVEN3 and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54.
remaining patterns. * WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background as WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
disappearing patterns. If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.

11-E Printer image quality adjustment
(Basic adjustment)
Requisite condition before execution of the printer gray bal-
ance/density adjustment
Before execution of the printer gray balance/density adjustment,
the copy gray balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.

* Basically same as when the copy gray balance/density adjust-
ment is required.
* After the copy gray balance/density adjustment.
11-E (1)
Printer gray balance adjustment
a. General
The gray balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user pro-
gram.
all the print modes are revised.
There are following two modes in the auto gray balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24 is
used.)
2) Auto gray balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The gray balance target is the service target.)
The auto gray balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print gray balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this gray balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto gray balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal gray balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal gray balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Execute ADJ11E(1) (Printer gray balance and density

adjustment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
performed to print the check pattern.)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or

unclear copy. (*3)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*1)
Cancel SIM67-24.
Execute ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and density

Check the self print check pattern to check the printer adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*2)
gray balance and density adjustment.
*1:
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check pattern, If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
and check the printer gray balance and density. properly adjusted, satisfactory gray balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*2:
If satisfactory gray balance and density are not obtained
Are the gray balance and NO with ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and density
density at the satisfactory adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the
level? print engine for any problems.
*3:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
YES pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. 4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is When the gray balance is customized with the manual gray
automatically selected.) balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. request and the gray balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the gray balance is adjusted to that gray
balance, select the service target.
The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
and prints the gray balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
3) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
check.)
If a satisfactory result on the gray balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
11E (2)).
If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

11-E (2)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
Printer gray balance adjustment automatically selected.)
(Manual adjustment) The gray balance adjustment pattern is printed.
a. General 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the gray
The gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust balance is satisfactory.
the printer density. This is used at the following situation. When the If not, execute the following procedures.
result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the
range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When
there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the gray
balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the gray patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the gray balance is improper, execute the automatic gray balance
adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
ciency.
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Start
Უ2CVEJ#QT$KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF
Execute ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and density Უȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUKFGPVKECNDGVYGGPRCVEJGUQTPQVTGXGTUGF
adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1) ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.)

Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern.
Select a target adjustment density level with the

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
scroll key. level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Patch B may not be copied.
Press [EXECUTE] key. Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the gray balance is adjusted according to a
Check the gray balance and density in the gray request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
balance check pattern. gray balance stated above.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
Are the gray balance SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic gray balance and
NO
sfactory level? density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode. Repeat procedures of 2) - 4) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer gray balance and When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
density adjustment.
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
check pattern, and check the printer gray balance and density. Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
NO (Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
Are the gray balance and
density at the satisfactory check.)
level?
NOTE:
If the gray balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
YES
the gray balance as the service target.
If the gray balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
End
If the customized gray balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic gray balance adjustment can be made in
*1: the next gray balance adjustment.
If satisfactory gray balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.

11-F Printer image quality adjustment 11-F (3)
(Individual adjustment) Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
a. General (Automatic adjustment)
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each (No need to adjust normally)
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the a. General
basic adjustments ADJ 11E (1) and ADJ 11E (2) or there is a
This adjustment is used to adjust the gray balance and the density
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
adjustment.
paper mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
11-F (1) b. Adjustment procedures
Printer density adjustment 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
(Low density section density adjustment) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(No need to adjust normally) A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
sity area in the printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density
section, or to reproduce low-density images.
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
11-F (2)
Printer high density image density
reproduction setting (Supporting the high
density section tone gap)
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
density section. printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
cases, a change of setting must be made. (adjustment pattern).
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
* To lower the density in the high density section.
a. Adjustment procedure
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
Setting
range
A K 0 K engine maximum density 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE correction mode Enable
1:DISABLE) 1 K engine maximum density
correction mode Disable
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for BLACK 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B

The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: If the setting values of item B is changed, density of the
high density part is changed.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the
printer gray balance and density adjustment. (Automatic
adjustment)

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed. The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
mality. 10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
5) Press [OK] key. and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
HEAVY PAPER Adjustment for heavy paper and that for gloss paper press [EXECUTE] key.
4BIT_HIGH For adjustments for each screen of 600/4bit HIGH After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
screen Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
4BIT_SHIGH For adjustments for each screen of 600/4bit SHIGH tered.
screen
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
1200DPI_LOW For adjustments for each screen of 1200/1bit LOW
screen (Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
1200DPI_HIGH For adjustments for each screen of 1200/1bit HIGH check.)
screen NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
11-F (4)
Automatic gray balance adjustment by the
user (Printer gray balance automatic
adjustment ENABLE setting and
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto gray cali-
bration (auto adjustment of the printer gray balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the printer
gray balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
explained to the user.
b. Setting procedure
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side. When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image (Yes).
(adjustment pattern). 3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto gray calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer gray balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto gray calibration by the user (Auto gray balance adjust-
ment))
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target gray bal-
ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the
above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
cannot be made properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
2) Enter the printer setting mode.
3) Press the auto gray calibration key.

5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the
4) on the document table. normal copy mode, and make a copy and check the adjust-
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as ment result.
shown in the figure. Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor-
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
image (adjustment pattern). with an actual copy.
Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Thin line
12-B Monochrome image send mode, image
density and gradation adjustment
(by each mode)
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer gray balance adjust- * When there is a defective copy in a scan image.
ment is executed automatically. * When the scan image density is too light.
The message, "Will you go on to the copy gray balance adjust- 1) Enter the Sim. 46-5 mode.
ment?" is displayed.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
To execute the copy gray balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above. Item/ Document Setting Default
Display
Mode mode rage value
A LOW AUTOTEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
ADJ 12 Image send, FAX send mode B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
image quality adjustment PHOTO Photo
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50
12-A Color image send mode, image density and Photograph
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50
gradation adjustment (by each mode)
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. H RIP - 1 - 99 50
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment. A HIGH AUTOTEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
* When there is a defective copy in a scan image. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
* When the scan image density is too light. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo
1) Enter the Sim. 46-4 mode.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. Photograph
Item/ Document Setting Default F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Display
Mode mode rage value
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
A LOW AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/ Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
PRINTEDPHOTO Photo
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
Photograph
image density is decreased.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 4) Scan a monochrome document in the color scan mode (Scan
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 to PC or Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 image.
A HIGH AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 procedure.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 4) Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the
PHOTO Photo normal copy mode, and make a copy and check the adjust-
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50 ment result.
Photograph
Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
with an actual copy.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
4) Scan the color document in the color scan mode (Scan to PC
or Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received
image.
Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following
procedure. The scanned image, however, is in monochrome.

Setting
12-C Image send mode, image gray balance Display/Item Content Default
range
adjustment H 600 X 600 [DPI] OFF 600 X 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- Half-tone OFF mode
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. I 600 X 600 [DPI] ON 600 X 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
* When the scan image gray balance is defective. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
1) Enter the Sim. 46-8 mode. To increase the sharpness, increase the adjustment value. To
2) Select a color to be adjusted with [R], [G], [B] buttons. decrease the sharpness, decrease the adjustment value.
3) Select a mode (low density section or high density section) to 4) Send a FAX message.
be adjusted with the scroll button. 5) Check the sharpness of the received FAX image.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
Setting
Display/Item Content Default obtained.
range
A LOW DENSITY Low density section 1 - 99 50
POINT gray balance
adjustment value ADJ 13 FAX send mode image quality
B HIGH DENSITY High density section 1 - 99 50
POINT gray balance
adjustment
adjustment value Normally this adjustment is not required. However, perform this
adjustment in the following cases:
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the user request for performing this adjustment.
To increase the density of the target color, increase the adjust-
ment value. To decrease the density of the target color, * When the FAX send image density is low or high.
decrease the adjustment value. NOTE:
5) Scan a color document in the color scan mode (Scan to PC or Normally, the adjustment value may be set to the default value and
Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received image. there is no need to make this adjustment. When, however, the
Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following image density on the receiving FAX side is unsatisfactory, perform
procedure. The scanned image, however, is in monochrome. this adjustment.
5) Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the Before execution of this adjustment, however, be sure to confirm
normal copy mode, and make a copy and check the adjust- that the receiving FAX operates normally.
ment result.
Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor- 13-A Image density and gradation adjustment in
mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result the FAX send mode (Collective adjustment
with an actual copy. of all the FAX modes)
Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is 1) Enter the Sim. 46-40 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.
obtained. 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
12-D FAX send mode, image sharpness
3) Check the print density in the adjustment pattern.
adjustment If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- perform the following procedure.
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
* When the sharpness in the FAX send mode is too low. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
Note: image density is decreased.
Normally this adjustment value may be set to the default and there Repeat the procedures 2 thru 4 until a satisfactory result is
is no need to perform the adjustment. When, however, the sharp- obtained.
ness of a printed image on the receiving FAX side to too low, per-
form this adjustment.
When performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the receiv-
ing side FAX is normal.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
Setting
range
A 200 X 100 [DPI] OFF 200 X 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
B 200 X 200 [DPI] OFF 200 X 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
C 200 X 200 [DPI] ON 200 X 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
D 200 X 400 [DPI] OFF 200 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
E 200 X 400 [DPI] ON 200 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
F 400 X 400 [DPI] OFF 400 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
G 400 X 400 [DPI] ON 400 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode

13-B Image density and gradation adjustment in 13-C Image density and gradation adjustment in
the FAX send mode (Normal mode) the FAX send mode (Fine mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-41 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX. 1) Enter the Sim. 46-42 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
Setting Setting
Display/Item Content Default Display/Item Content Default
range range
A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50 A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
send image density send image density
(Normal mode) (Fine mode)
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
image density image density (Fine mode)
(Normal mode) C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 image density (Fine mode)
image density D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) image density (Fine mode)
D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
image density image density (Fine mode)
(Normal mode) F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 image density (Fine mode)
image density G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) H_TONE send image density
F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
image density H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) H_TONE image density
G EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
EXP2 3 H_TONE image density
EXP3 4 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
EXP4 5 J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
EXP5 6 H_TONE image density
(Half-tone/Fine mode)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button. K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
The adjustment pattern is printed. H_TONE image density
(Half-tone/Fine mode)
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, H_TONE image density
perform the following procedure. (Half-tone/Fine mode)
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO)
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the EXP2 3
image density is decreased. EXP3 4
EXP4 5
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
EXP5 6
obtained.
AUTO H_TONE 7
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
EXP1 H_TONE 8
mode, select item G and enter the set value corresponding to
EXP2 H_TONE 9
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.
EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP4 H_TONE 11
EXP5 H_TONE 12
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.

4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
obtained.
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button

13-D Image density and gradation adjustment in 13-E Image density and gradation adjustment in
the FAX send mode (Super fine mode) the FAX send mode (Ultra fine mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-43 mode. 1) Enter the Sim. 46-44 mode.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
Setting Setting
Display/Item Content Default Display/Item Content Default
range range
A AUTO FAX auto mode send image 1 - 99 50 A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
density (Super fine mode) send image density
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE send image density G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE send image density
H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1
EXP2 3 MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO
EXP3 4 EXP2 3 )
EXP4 5 EXP3 4
EXP5 6 EXP4 5
AUTO H_TONE 7 EXP5 6
EXP1 H_TONE 8 AUTO H_TONE 7
EXP2 H_TONE 9 EXP1 H_TONE 8
EXP5 H_TONE 12
The adjustment pattern is printed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern. The adjustment pattern is printed.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, 4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
perform the following procedure. If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. perform the following procedure.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
image density is decreased. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
obtained. Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button. mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE]
button.

13-F Image density and gradation adjustment in ADJ 14 Setting of the auto exposure
the IFAX send mode (600dpi mode)
mode operating conditions in
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. copy, scan, and FAX
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
Setting
Display/Item Content Default * When the U2 trouble occurs.
range
A AUTO IFAX 600dpi mode/ 1 - 99 50 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
Auto exposure mode send * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
image density
* When the SCANNER CONTROL PWB is replaced.
B EXPOSURE1 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50
level 1 send image density * When the EEPROM on the SCANNER CONTROL PWB is
C EXPOSURE2 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 replaced.
level 2 send image density 1) Enter the Sim. 46-19 mode.
D EXPOSURE3 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 2) Select the auto mode exposure operating condition of each
level 3 send image density
mode with the mode button.
E EXPOSURE4 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50
level 4 send image density Item/ Set Defau NOTE
F EXPOSURE5 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 Content
Display value lt
level 5 send image density AE_MO Auto MODE1 MOD MODE1: High gamma
G AUTO IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 DE exposure , E1 MODE2: Nomal gamma
H_TONE Auto exposure mode send mode MODE2
image density gamma
H EXPOSURE1 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 select
H_TONE Exposure level 1 send image (for copy)
density AE_ST Auto ON/ ON ON : The document lead
I EXPOSURE2 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 OP_CO exposure OFF edge section density
H_TONE Exposure level 2 send image PY mode OFF is
density document detected and
J EXPOSURE3 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 density exposure is adjusted.
H_TONE Exposure level 3 send image detecting : Real time exposure
density condition adjustment
K EXPOSURE4 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 setting (for
H_TONE Exposure level 4 send image copy)
density AE_ST Auto ON/ ON ON : The document lead
L EXPOSURE5 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 OP_FA exposure OFF edge section density
H_TONE Exposure level 5 send image X mode OFF is
density document detected and
M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 density exposure is adjusted.
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) detecting : Real time exposure
condition adjustment
EXP2 3
setting (for
EXP3 4
FAX)
EXP4 5
AE_ST Auto ON/ ON ON : The document lead
EXP5 6 OP_SC exposure OFF edge section density
AUTO H_TONE 7 AN mode OFF is
EXP1 H_TONE 8 document detected and
EXP2 H_TONE 9 density exposure is adjusted.
EXP3 H_TONE 10 detecting : Real time exposure
EXP4 H_TONE 11 condition adjustment
EXP5 H_TONE 12 setting (for
scanner)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button. AE_FIL Auto SOFT NOR
TER exposure NORMA MAL
mode L
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern. sharpness SHARP
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, setting (for
perform the following procedure. copy)
AE_WI Auto FULL/ FULL FULL : Document density
DTH exposure PART PART detection in A4 (11
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is mode X 8.5) width
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the document : Document density
image density is decreased. density detection in 10mm
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is detecting width on
width the rear frame side
obtained.
setting (Document table
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send mode) /
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to Document density
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button. detection in 10mm
width on
the center section
(SPDF mode)

8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
ADJ 15 Paper size detection tion.
adjustment
15-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
0 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 40 - 0 2 CL O SE
B Y PA S S T RA Y AD J US T M EN T
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
10 K EY
M AX P OS I T IO N A D J US T ME N T.
display. The minimum width position detection level of the
P RE S S [ E XE C UT E ] T O S T AR T
EX I T B10AKCEYK C LE A R manual paper feed guide is recognized. If the above operation
is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When the
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
operation is completed normally, the above data are saved to
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
15-B DSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
adjustment
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
E X EC U T E
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width * The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
position. * When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
0
　　　S
S P F T RA Y A D J US T ME N T
T RA Y VO L M AX TR A Y A D JU S TM E NT . 1 0K E Y
P RE S S [ E XE C UT E ] T O S T AR T
E XI T 1BA
0KCEKY C L EA R
1 0K
1EY 1 0 KE
2 Y 1 0K3 E Y
1 0K
4EY 1 0 KE
5 Y 1 0K6 E Y
1 0K
7EY 1 0 KE
8 Y 1 0K9 E Y
1 0K
*EY 1 0 KE
0 Y 1 0K# E Y
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal 1 0 K EY S T A RT
E XE C UT E
display. The maximum width position detection level of the
manual paper feed guide is recognized. 2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size. tion.
display. The A4 size width position detection level of the man-
ual paper feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
display. Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the
A4R size.

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.

6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
16-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion. 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key. With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
* When each of the above operations has been completed,
[EXECUTE] key.
the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the oper-
ations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears. If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed.
ADJ 16 Document size detection ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting

adjustment
(Document table mode)
* The operation panel has been replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred. 1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
16-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
0
　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 4 1- 0 1 CL O SE
P D S E NS O R C H EC K
OC S W PD 1 PD2 P D3 10 K E Y
PD 4 PD 5 PD6 P D7
EX I T 10BAKCEKY C LE A R 2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 E Y
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 E Y pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. In
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 E Y
case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen again.
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# E Y
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
1/ 1 pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
as a needle or a pin).
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 32 0.5mm by slowly tilting the doc-
ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)
32+
-0.5mm

5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
ADJ 18 Image lead edge position, tion)
image off-center, image NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
magnification ratio adjustment
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM 50-28. It takes less time to use this adjustment than to use the
following manual adjustments.
* ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction)
* ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment
* ADJ 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 10 Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjust-
ment (Manual adjustment)
(Menu in SIM 50-28 mode)
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image 0
　　　S
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
A U TO IM A GE P OS I TI O N A D JU S TM E N T: S ER V IC E
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio N OW EX E C UT I NG . . . 10 K EY
adjustment EX I T B10AKCEY
K C LE A R
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image

magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) 1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each

1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
ADJ paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display 1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
18-A Print image main scanning direction image 1 0 KE Y S T AR T

E X EC U TE
magnification ratio automatic adjustment

(Document table mode) The following item is automatically adjustment.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. * Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio
0 7) Press [OK] key.
　　　S
The adjustment result becomes valid.
OC A DJ B K- M AG A DJ 10 K E Y
0
S PF AD J SE T UP / P RI N T A D J
E XI T 10BAKCEKY C LE A R 　　　S
RE S U LT D AT A
B K- M AG : * * (* * ) 10 K EY
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 1 0K3 E Y
EX I T B10AKCEY
K C LE A R
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 1 0K6 E Y
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 1 0K9 E Y
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 1 0K# E Y
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
1/1
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button. 1 0 KE Y S T AR T

RE P RI N T RE S CA N RE T RY DA T A OK
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
0
　　　S
10 K EY
M FT C S1
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
E X E CU T E 1/1

The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
18-B Image off-center automatic adjustment tion)
(Each paper feed tray)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. guide.
0
　　　S
E XI T 10BAKCEKY C LE A R
RE S U LT D AT A
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 1 0K3 E Y
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 1 0K6 E Y
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 1 0K9 E Y
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 1 0K# E Y
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
1/1
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.

3) Select [ALL] with the key button.
0
　　　S
T E ST I MU L A TI O N　　 NO . 50 - 2 8 C LO S E 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A U TO IM A GE P OS I TI O N A D JU S TM E NT : S ER V IC E
LEAD O F FS E T 1 0 K EY The following item is automatically adjustment.
ALL
EX I T 1B0AKCK
EY CL E A R * Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
10 K1 EY 10 2K E Y 1 0 K3 EY
8) Press [OK] key.
10 K4 EY 10 5K E Y 1 0 K6 EY
The adjustment result becomes valid.
10 K7 EY 10 8K E Y 1 0 K9 EY Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
10 K* EY 10 0K E Y 1 0 K# EY
18-C Copy lead edge image reference position

1/1
1 0K E Y S TA R T adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio
(Note) automatic adjustment
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items (Document table mode)
can be executed individually.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
0
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are 　　　S
executed simultaneously. OC A DJ B K- M AG A DJ 10 K E Y
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted. S PF AD J SE T UP / P RI N T A D J

RE S U LT D AT A
0 1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 1 0K3 E Y
　　　S
A U TO IM A GE P OS I TI O N A D JU S TM E NT : S ER V IC E 1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 1 0K6 E Y
C S1 CS2 AD U 1 0 K EY
M FT
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 1 0K9 E Y

C S3 C S4 LCC EX I T 1B0AKCK
EY CL E A R
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 1 0K# E Y
10 K1 EY 10 2K E Y 1 0 K3 EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
10 K4 EY 10 5K E Y 1 0 K6 EY 1/1
10 K7 EY 10 8K E Y 1 0 K9 EY 2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.

10 K* EY 10 0K E Y 1 0 K# EY
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
1 0K E Y S TA R T
E X EC U TE 1 /1
0
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 　　　S
A U TO IM A GE P OS I TI O N A D JU S TM E NT : S ER V IC E
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. M FT C S1 1 0K E Y
1 0 KE
1 Y 1 0 KE
2 Y 1 0 KE
3 Y
1 0 KE
4 Y 1 0 KE
5 Y 1 0 KE
6 Y
1 0 KE
7 Y 1 0 KE
8 Y 1 0 KE
9 Y
1 0 KE
* Y 1 0 KE
0 Y 1 0 KE
# Y
10 K E Y ST A RT
E X EC U TE 1 /1

18-D Copy image off-center, image lead edge
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
position, sub scanning direction image
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
(Any direction) magnification ratio automatic adjustment
(DSPF mode)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide. 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
0
　　　S
RE S U LT D AT A
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 1 0K3 E Y
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 1 0K6 E Y
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 1 0K9 E Y
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 1 0K# E Y
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
1/1
2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button.

0
　　　S
0 A U TO IM A GE P OS I TI O N A D JU S TM E NT : S ER V IC E
SI D E1 S ID E 2 1 0 K EY
　　　S
A U TO IM A GE P OS I TI O N A D JU S TM E N T: S ER V IC E ALL
10 K EY EX I T 1B0AKCK
EY CL E A R
P LE A SE W AI T
N OW EX E C UT I NG . . . 10 K1 EY 10 K2 E Y 1 0 K3 EY
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY 10 K4 EY 10 K5 E Y 1 0 K6 EY
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY 10 K7 EY 10 K8 E Y 1 0 K9 EY
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY 10 K* EY 10 K0 E Y 1 0 K# EY
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
1 0K E Y S TA R T
1/1
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
RE P RI N T E X EC U TE
3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette
The following item is automatically adjustment. used to print DSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
sponding button. Select [ALL] with the key button.
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio SIDE1: DSPF adjustment for the front side
automatic adjustment SIDE2: DSPF adjustment for the back side
7) Press [OK] key. ALL: DSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
The adjustment result becomes valid. 4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print DSPF
adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
0 5) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print
　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 50 - 2 8 C L OS E of DSPF adjustment patterns.
S IM U LA T I ON CO M P LE T E 10 K EY * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
P LE A SE P US H E X I T K EY
self-printing DSPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
can start DSPF adjustments.
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY 6) DSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF.
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
1/1
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the

cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
DSPF adjustment patterns again.

7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is adjustment
reading and calculating DSPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side). The machine starts calculating the adjustment Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
amount (for the front side) after it has read the patterns for ing cases, perform this adjustment.
the front side. After the machine has finished calculating the * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
adjustment amount for the front side, the next screen * When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
appears where you can have the machine start reading
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
paper rear edge section.
<Adjustment item list>
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two
* DSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) position in the front/rear frame direction.
* DSPF original off-center adjustment (front side) 2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
* DSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (front side) shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
8) DSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF.

DSPF adjustment patterns again.
The standard fixing position is one scale lower than the center
9) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading of the marking scale. Change the actual fixing position accord-
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). ing to the condition.
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is * When wrinkles are generated on paper, change the position
reading DSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). The in the arrow direction B.
machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for the
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in
back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
the paper rear edge section, change the position in the
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
arrow direction A.
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
<Adjustment item list>
* DSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
* DSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
* DSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
DSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the DSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.

MX-M503N
[5] SIMULATION Service Manual series
MX-M365N/M465N/M565N
Entering the simulation mode
1) Double-click the [HOME] key. (Total use quantity/Toner
1. General (Including basic operations) remaining quantity display mode screen)
The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments
speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles VER display sectio
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
Touch the VER display section. Touch the [BACK] key.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine. (10-key mode input mode screen)
A. Basic operation [BACK] key

MX-M364N/M464N/M564N series
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON -> Program key ON -> Asterisk (*) key ON
-> CLEAR key ON -> Asterisk (*) key ON -> Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key -> START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel. 2) Touch the VER display section. (10-key mode input mode
screen)
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key -> START key ON.
3) Touch the (#) key -> Asterisk (*) key -> Clear key ->
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
Asterisk (*) key -> Ready for input of main code of simulation.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
4) Enter a main SIM code with the 10-key pad then touch the
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
START key or select a main code from the SIM key list on the
lation operation.
touch panel.
When canceling the current simulation mode to change the
5) Enter a sub code with the 10-key pad, then touch the START
main code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
key or select a sub code from the code list on the touch panel.
6) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
7) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
1) Press [CA] key. item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
(Note for the simulation mode) To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the code and the sub code, press [BACK] key.
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted. * Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
1) Press [EXIT] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the simulation
mode. If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation
mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON
the main power source.
MX-M565N SIMULATION 5 – 1
START (Copy mode)
Double-click the HOME key.
Touch the VER display section.
Press the sharp (#) key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby f or entry of Press the BACK key

SIM code.
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SI M

is displayed.
NO
Press the
COLOR/MONO key. YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby f or entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is t here a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the BACK key displayed by the
NO before entering into SYSTEM
Enter SI M sub code with this mode for self SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. YES
printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
Press the NO
item with the scroll key to perform another
COLOR/MONO key. and the item key. simulation ? The simulat ion mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE key
Operation check ?
and OK key.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the EXIT key.
to the select ed mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Operating conditions
check ? and OK key.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Data clear ?
and OK key.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the select ed mode and the it em.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the select ed mode and the it em.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE key

adjustment values. and OK key.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner
5 Check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Check the operation of the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
2 Check the operation of sensors and detectors in the SPF unit section and the control circuits. Automatic document feeder
3 Check the operation of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
3 2 Check the operation of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and their control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 Check the operation of the paper transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 1 Check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation unit (Operation/Display PWB)
2 Check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Check the operation of discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Check the operation of load in paper transport system (clutches, solenoids) and control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
2 Check the operations of each fan and its control circuit. Others
90 Reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Set the operating conditions of aging.
6 Set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Display the warm-up time. Fusing
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Automatic document feeder
8 1 Check/Adjust the operation of the developing voltage in each print mode and control circuit. Toner supply, developing
2 Check/Adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and control circuit. Photo-conductor
6 Check/Adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Transfer
17 Check/Adjust the operation of the separation bias voltage and the control circuit.
9 2 Check the operation of sensors and detectors in the duplex section and its control circuit. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Check the operation of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Check the operation of the toner supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the related circuit. Toner supply, developing
13 - Cancel the self diag "U1" trouble. MFP (ICU) PWB
14 - Cancel the self diag "H3, H4, H5" trouble. Fusing
15 - Cancel the self diag "U6-09" trouble. LCC
16 - Cancel the self diag "U2" trouble.
21 1 Set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Check the print count value in each operation mode.
2 Check the total number of mis-feed and the troubles.(when the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair)
3 Check the mis-feed position and the mis-feed count of each position.
4 Check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Check the ROM version of each unit (section).
6 Print settings, adjustments data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counters), firmware version, and
counter list.
8 Check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the SPF, and scanning (reading).
9 Check the umber of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
10 Check the system configuration (options and internal hardware).
11 Check the use frequency of send/receive of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed.) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
12 Check the DSPF mis-feed position and the number of mis-feed at the position.(when the number of Automatic document feeder
mis-feed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair)
13 Check the use quantity of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge).and fusing. Process
14 Display the use status of the toner cartridge Process
18 Display the user data delete history
19 Check various counter values related to scan - image send.
40 Display the error code list and the contents
42 Check the JAM/trouble data
43 Display JAM data details
90 Output the various set data lists.
23 2 Output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed.
80 Output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/transport section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
81 Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory
24 1 Clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
2 Clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Clear the finisher, SPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit and the fusing unit.
5 Clear the developer counter. Toner supply, developing
6 Clear the copy counter.
9 Clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
12 Clear the document filing counter
24 15 Clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Clear the toner cartridge use status data
25 1 Check the operations of the developing section. Toner supply, developing
2 Make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process
4 Display the operation data of the toner supply quantity Process
26 1 Set the paper exit operation from the right side. Paper exit section
2 Set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC) . Paper feed
3 Set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
5 Set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter (A3/11" x 17" size).
6 Set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio) of the destination.
7 Set the machine ID
8 Counter mode setting for long scale paper size
10 Set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
32 Set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation Fusing
35 Set the trouble history display mode.
38 Set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the consumable part
life is over.
41 Set Enable/Disable of magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in center binding mode.
49 Set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Set the operation specifications and functions.
51 Set the specifications of the serial port operation PCI
52 Set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 Set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation, density adjustment).
65 Set the limit of the staple process.
69 Set the operating conditions for toner near end.
71 Set the trial mode of the web browsing function
73 Adjust the image loss (shade removal amount) in the poster, the continuous enlargement copy, the
card scan, and the A3 wide copy mode.
74 Set the OSA trial mode.
78 Set the password of the remote operation panel mode.
79 Set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result
27 1 Set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Set the machine tag No. (FSS function)
6 Set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Check the high-density and the half-tone process control error history. (FSS Function)
13 Check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Display the FSS connection status
16 Set the FSS alert send
17 Set the FSS paper order alert
18 Clear the FSS paper feed retry counter
30 1 Check the operation of sensors and detectors in other than paper feed section and control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
2 Check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
7 Set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
41 1 Check the operation of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Adjust the document size sensor detection level. Others
3 Check the operation of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
43 1 Set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. Fusing
2 Set the fusing temperature and pre-heat each operation mode. Fusing
20 Set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing Fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
21 Set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing Fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
24 Set the fusing operation mode. Fusing
31 Check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. Fusing
32 Set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
34 Check the fusing lower web cleaning motor operation. Fusing
35 Check fusing nip operation. Fusing
44 1 Set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process
2 Adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor. (registration sensor) Process
4 Set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
44 6 Execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process
12 Display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density Image process
sensor.(registration sensor)
14 Display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process
15 Set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution
21 Set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Process
25 Set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Execute the half tone process control compulsory. Process
27 Clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
34 Set the process control execution conditions. Process
37 Set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation. Toner supply, developing
43 Display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing
62 Set the process control execution conditions Process
46 2 Adjust the copy density in each copy mode.
4 Adjust the density in the image send mode (color mode)
5 Adjust the density in the image send mode (monochrome mode).
8 Adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Adjust scan image density (copy, image send mode)
10 Adjust the copy density (in each copy mode).
16 Adjust the copy density and gamma.
19 Set the operating conditions of document density scanning (copy, image send mode). Scanner
23 Set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy half tone adjustment (Auto adjustment)
32 Adjust the document background density reproductivity in the auto copy mode.
37 Adjust the reproduction capability of the scan image color document (copy, image send mode).
39 Adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
46 Adjust the FAX send image density (RGB RIP)
47 Set the JPEG compression rate in copy and scan images.
48 Set the output resolution in each copy mode.
51 Adjust the gamma for copy, heavy paper mode and image process mode (manual adjustment).
52 Set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode. (After
execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51 the adjustment value is reset to the initial value)
54 Perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither)
55 Adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode)
58 Set the copy mode pseudo resolution (smoothing process)
59 Perform the copy mode pseudo resolution image process adjustment
60 Adjust the sharpness in the color auto mode
61 Adjust the area separation recognition level in image send mode (color, gray, auto exposure mode).
62 Set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Adjust the density in the copy low density section.
66 Adjust the reproduction capability of watermark in the copy/printer mode.
74 Adjust copy gray balance (Auto adjustment) / printer gray balance (Auto adjustment)
90 Set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Adjust the scan image magnification ratio (main scanning direction and sub scanning direction). Scanner
5 Correction the scan image magnification ratio (sub scanning direction). Scanner
6 Adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Perform the firmware update.
3 Update the operation manual data stored in the HDD.
5 Update the watermark data stored in the HDD.
10 Perform the ACU firmware update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Adjust the copy image position and the image loss (SPF mode).
7 Adjust DSPF document lead edge (simple method) and copy image position on print paper and the
void area (image loss) in the copy mode.
10 Adjust the image off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
50 12 Perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Adjust the image loss of a scan image in the FAX/scanner mode.
28 Perform the OC adjustment, main scan magnification ration correction, the SPF adjustment and the
print position adjustment.
51 1 Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer voltage
2 Adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the SPF resist roller. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the SPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the SPF document size width sensor. Automatic document feeder
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the SPF mode document scan position. Automatic document feeder
9 SPF dirt detection setting.
10 SPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address
data) to the USB memory.
3 Backup the document filing data to the USB memory. HDD
4 Backup the JOB log data to the USB memory. HDD
5 Import the SIM22-6 data to the USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Import the SIM23-2 data to the USB memory in the TEXT format.
7 Import SYSLOG data into the USB memory.
60 1 Check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory. MFP (ICU) PWB
61 1 Check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Set the laser power LSU
4 Print the print image skew adjustment pattern
11 Correct the laser power automatically
12 Laser power manual correction LSU.
13 Clear the laser power correction value.
62 1 Format HDD/SD card (HDD: excluding the operation manual and the watermark data) (SD card HDD
user data).
2 Check read/write of the hard disk (partial). HDD
3 Check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). HDD
6 Perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. HDD
7 Print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. HDD
8 Format the HDD/SD card (HDD: excluding the operation manual , watermark data and the system HDD
area) (SD card: user data)
10 Clear the job completion list . HDD
11 Clear the document filing data. HDD
12 Set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. HDD
13 Format the hard disk. (operation manual and watermark area only) HDD
14 Delete the document filing management data.
20 Check the operation of the mirroring HDD. Mirroring HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading. Scanner
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Scanner
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting. Scanner
11 Set the target color balance of the copy mode.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer function.
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit
2 Display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit
5 Check the operation panel key input. Operation unit
67 17 Printer controller reset
24 Printer density adjustment (auto adjustment)
25 Printer density adjustment (Manual adjustment)
26 Set the target the halftone of the printer mode
31 Clear the printer calibration value (Half-tone process control data).
33 Set the gamma of the each printer screen.
34 Set the density correction in the printer high density section.
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Adjust the density in the low density section.
45 Adjust the printer image filter.
52 Set the default of the gamma of the printer screen.
54 Printer engine halftone auto adjustment.
3. Details of simulation The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation
1 is terminated.
DSPF
1-1
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Purpose Operation test/check (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the scanner (read- 400DPI 400DPI (279mm/s) (372mm/s)
ing) unit and the control circuit. 600DPI 600DPI (186mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI
Section Scanner (reading)
400DPI 400DPI (279mm/s) (372mm/s)
Operation/Procedure
600DPI 600DPI (186mm/s)
1) Select the operation resolution (scan speed) with the touch
panel key. RSPF
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (279mm/s) 300DPI
scan resolution (operation speed). 400DPI 400DPI (279mm/s) (279mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (186mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (279mm/s) 300DPI
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (279mm/s) (279mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (279mm/s) (372mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (186mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (186mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (93mm/s)
2-2
1-2 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the sensors and
the detectors in the document feed unit
Function (Purpose) Check the sensors in the scanner (reading)
section and the control circuits.
section and the related circuits.
Section Automatic document feeder
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. When "MHPS" is
played. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which
highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home position.
are active are highlighted.
1-5 SSET SPF installation detector

Purpose Operation test/check SOCD SPF open/close detector
SCOV SPF upper door open/close detector
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the scanner (read-
SLCOV SPF lower door open/close sensor
ing) unit and the control circuit.
SPED1 SPF document upper limit detector
Section Scanner (reading) SPED2 SPF document empty detector
Operation/Procedure SPPD1 SPF document pass detector 1
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. (Paper entry detection)
SPPD2 SPF document pass detector 2
(Resist roller front document transport detection)
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SPPD3 SPF document pass detector 3
resolution (operation speed). When [EXECUTE] key is (Document scanning front document transport detection)
pressed, the operation is terminated. SPPD4 SPF document pass detector 4
SPPD5 SPF document pass detector 5
Item/Display Operation mode Default value (Document transport detection)
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI SPOD SPF document exit detector
400DPI 400DPI (279mm/s) (372mm/s) SPRDMD SPF document random detector
600DPI 600DPI (186mm/s) SPLS1 SPF document length detection short detector
1200DPI 1200DPI (93mm/s) SPLS2 SPF document length detection long detector
STLD SPF document feed tray lower limit detector
STUD SPF document feed tray upper limit detector
2 STMPU SPF stamp unit installation detector
SWD_LEN SPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
2-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the automatic doc-
ument feed unit and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
key.
2-3 FPES7 Punch paper edge sensor 7
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
Purpose Operation test/check FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the loads in the FPMS Punch mode sensor
automatic document feed unit and the con- FPTS Punch timing sensor
trol circuit.
<1K Saddle stitch finisher / Punch module>
PDPPD1 FJPID Paper pass paper transport detector 1
Operation/Procedure
PDPPD2 FJPOD Paper pass paper transport detector 2
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel PDCS FJPDD Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor
key. FPPD1 FED Paper delivery detector 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FPAPHS_F FFJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor F
The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] FPAPHS_R FRJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor R
key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FATPD FAD Paper alignment tray paper detector
FGHPS FGHPD Gripper home position sensor
SPUM SPF document feed motor FDTPD EMPS Delivery tray paper detector
SPFM SPF transport motor FPLD FSLD Paper surface detector
SPOM SPF document exit motor FPPD2 FFPD Paper transport detector 2
SLUM SPF lift up motor FSPHS FFHPD Saddle plate home position sensor
SPFFAN SPF cooling fan motor FSTPD FFED Saddle exit tray paper detector
SPFC SPF document feed clutch FSMRS FFE Saddle motor rotation sensor
SRRC SPF No2 registration roller clutch FTULD FULD Tray upper limit detector
STRRC SPF No1 registration roller clutch FTLLD FLLD Tray lower limit detector
STRC SPF transport roller clutch FTLMRS FLE Tray lift motor rotation sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid FSHS FSHPD Staple home position sensor
(Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.) FSSHPS FSTHPD Stapler shift home position sensor
FSED FSD Staple empty detector
FSLS FSPD Staple lead edge sensor
3 FTPS FMLD Tray position sensor
FCD1 FFDD Cover detector 1
FCD2 FCD Cover detector 2
3-2
FSSW1 FFDDW Safety switch 1
Purpose Operation test/check FCD FJSW Finisher connection detector
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the sensors and FSSSW1 FSSSW Staple safety switch
the detectors in the finisher and the control FFL FFANLK Fan lock signal
circuit. FDRHS FNHPD Delivery roller home position sensor
FPPD3 FSPOD Paper transport detector 3
Section Finisher
FSATPD FSDTPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
Operation/Procedure
FSSSW2 FSJPD Stapler safety switch 2
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FPHHD FPHHPD Paper hold home position sensor
played. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which FSAPHS FSJHPD Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
are active are highlighted. FSPGHS FAHPD Saddle paper guide home position sensor
<Inner finisher / Punch module> FSRHS FSR3HPD Saddle roller home position sensor
FPDD FGED Delivery detector
FABHS Paper alignment belt HP sensor
FSSHS FSSHPD Saddle staple home position sensor
FAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
FSSES FSSD Saddle staple sensor
FAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
FSSCS FSSDSW Saddle staple cover sensor
FDRPS Paper exit roller position sensor
FSSSHS FSSTHPD Finisher saddle stapler shift home position
FDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensor sensor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector FPMRS FPMCK Punch motor rotation sensor
FDTULS Paper exit tray upper limit sensor FPD FPUC Punch unit detection (connector)
FFL Fan lock signal FPCHPS FPHPD Punch home position sensor
FPLD1 Paper height sensor 1 FPDFS FPDD Punch dust sensor
FPLD2 Paper height sensor 2 FPHPS FPSHPD Punch unit home position sensor
FPPD1 Paper entry sensor FPTS FPTD Punch timing sensor
FSED Staple empty sensor FPES1 FPSD1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
FSHPS Staple HP sensor FPES2 FPSD2 Punch paper edge sensor 2
FSLD Staple lead edge sensor FPES3 FPSD3 Punch paper edge sensor 3
FSSHPS Staple shift home position sensor FPES4 FPSD4 Punch paper edge sensor 4
FSSS Staple safety sensor FPPS FPPD Punch paper position sensor
FSSW Safety switch
FSTPD Staple tray paper sensor <4K Finisher>
FTPS Tray position sensor
FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
FPCHPS Punch home position sensor
FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FPD Punch unit sensor (connector)
FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
FPDFS Punch dust sensor
FED Entry port paper detection
FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection FSSD2 Saddle needle presence detection 2
FCCD Tray approach detection FSSHP1 Switch operation home position detection 1
FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection FSSHP2 Switch operation home position detection 2
FPDD1 Discharged paper detection FSSHPC Stitcher home position sensor connection detection
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection FSSHPD Stitcher home position detection
FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection FSSUC Saddle staple unit detection
FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection FSVPPD Vertical path paper detection
FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection 3-3
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FSD Staple empty detection Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the load in the fin-
FSTD Needle lead edge position detection isher and the control circuit.
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection Section Finisher
FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection Operation/Procedure
FSAD Staple safety SW
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
FSHTD Shutter open detection
key.
FCD Upper door open detection
FFDD Front cover open detection
FFDSW Front cover close detection The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE]
F24V 24V output interruption detection key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection <Inner finisher / Punch module>
FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection FCF Cooling fan
FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 FDRLM Paper exit roller lift motor
FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2 FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection FPAS Paper alignment solenoid
FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection FPDM Paper exit motor
FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection FPGS Paper gate solenoid
FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection FPLDS Paper height detector solenoid
FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FPS Paddle solenoid
FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection FPTM Paper transport motor
FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection FSM Staple motor
FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection FSSM Staple shift motor
FPE Punch motor lock detection FTLM Tray lift motor
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FPM Punch motor
FPHPD Punch HP detection FPSM Punch shift motor
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
<1K Saddle stitch finisher / Punch module>
FPFDD Punch front door open detection
FPDD Punch dust detection PDPGS FINRPS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW PDPTM FJPM Paper pass paper transport motor
PDCF FJFM Paper pass cooling fan
<4K Finisher saddle unit> FPTM1 FFM Paper transport motor 1
FS1PD Saddle paper detection 1 FDRLM FNM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
FS2PD Saddle paper detection 2 FGM FGM Gripper motor
FS3PD Saddle paper detection 3 FPAM-F FFJM Paper alignment motor F
FSAHPD Alignment plate home position detection FPAM-R FRJM Paper alignment motor R
FSBHPC Paper pushing plate home position sensor connector FSSM FSM Stapler shift motor
connection detection FSM FFSM Staple motor
FSCRPD Semi-circular roller phase detection FPTM2 FLM Paper transport motor 2
FSDTPD Saddle tray paper detection FSDM FFM2 Saddle motor
FSFOE Paper folding motor lock detection FSPTM FTM Saddle paper transport motor
FSFOHPC Paper folding home position sensor connector connection FSPAM FSR3M Saddle paper alignment motor
detection FSPM FSJM Saddle positioning motor
FSFOHPD Paper folding home position detection FSDSM FPPM Saddle staple motor
FSGHPC Paper folding guide home position sensor connection FPHS1 FSSM Paper holding solenoid 1
detection FPHS2 FPHS Paper holding solenoid 2
FSGHPD Guide home position detection FTLM FPS Tray lift motor
FSINDD Inlet port cover open detection FPM FPNM Punch motor
FSINDSW Saddle inlet port door detection FPSM FPSM Punch shift motor
FSLGE Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
FSLGHPD Paper pushing plate home position detection <4K Finisher / Punch module>
FSLGTC Paper pushing plate lead edge position sensor connector
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
connection detection
FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
FSLGTD Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection
FASM Rear edge assist motor
FSPDD Saddle paper exit detection
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSPIND Saddle entry port paper detection
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FSPPHPD Paper positioning plate home position detection
FFDRRS Delivery roller separation solenoid
FSPPPD Paper positioning plate paper detection
FFJM Alignment motor front
FSPSW1 S-PUSHSW detection
FFM Entry port transport motor
FSSD1 Saddle needle presence detection 1
FFSM Staple motor
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid Setting Default
FRJM Alignment motor rear range value
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
FSM Staple shift motor adjustment (one position at
FSWM Oscillation motor the rear) (When the paper
width is greater than
FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
232mm)
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 45 - 75 50
PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
R adjustment (one position at
PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid the rear) (When the paper
PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor width is 232mm or less)
FPNM Punch motor G STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor FRONT adjustment (one position in
front) (When the paper
<4K Finisher saddle unit> width is greater than
FPPM Saddle paper positioning motor 232mm)
FS1DFS Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid H STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 55 50
FS2DFS Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid FRONT R adjustment (one position in
front) (When the paper
FSFCS Transport plate contact solenoid
width is 232mm or less)
FSFM Saddle transport motor
I STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 45 - 55 50
FSFOM Paper folding motor
adjustment (two positions
FSFS Saddle flapper solenoid at the center)
FSFSTM Stitch motor front J STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 35 - 62 50
FSGM Guide motor adjustment (two positions
FSIFM Saddle entry port transport motor in pitch)
FSJM Saddle alignment motor K PUNCH Punch center adjustment 35 - 65 50
FSLGM Paper holding motor CENTER
FSRSTM Stitch motor rear L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 30 - 60 50
adjustment
M SADDLE_ADJU Saddle alignment position 35 - 65 50
3-10
ST_POS adjustment
Purpose Adjustment N GRIPPER_POS Gripper exit position 35 - 65 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the finisher. adjustment
Section Finisher NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust-
Operation/Procedure ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi-
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. tion adjustment"
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle
folding position adjustment can be executed in the system
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set-
<Inner finisher> ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.
If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set
Setting Default
Item/Display Content to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
ADJUST adjustment (front) setting 5.0mm)
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 - 18 10 In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad-
adjustment (rear) dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu-
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 lation, the above trouble will not occur.
adjustment
(one position at the rear) <4K Finisher>
D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 Default
FRONT adjustment Item Display Item Set range
value
(one position in front) A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 - 20 10
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 adjustment (front)
adjustment (center position B STAPLE REAR Staple binding 94 - 106 100
of two positions binding) position adjustment
F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 (one position at the
adjustment (staple pitch of rear)
two positions binding) C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding 94 - 106 100
G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 - 63 50 position adjustment
CENTER sensor (one position in front)
H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 - 58 50 D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50
(paper transport direction) CENTER adjustment
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
<1K Saddle stitch finisher> adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content <4K Saddle finisher>
range value
A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 - 75 50 Default
POSITION adjustment Item Display Item Set range
value
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 25 - 75 50 A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 197 - 203 200
POSITION adjustment POSITION adjustment
C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 B FOLDING Saddle folding 192 - 208 200
ADJUST adjustment (Front) POSITION position adjustment
D REAR ADJUST Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 C FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 - 20 10
adjustment (Rear) adjustment (front)
Default 4-3
Item Display Item Set range
value
D STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 106 100 Purpose Operation test/check
adjustment (Rear, one Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section
position) (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits.
E STAPLE FRONT Stapling position 94 - 106 100
adjustment (one
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
position in front) Operation/Procedure
F PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
CENTER adjustment touch panel key.
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
adjustment
The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
4 <Desk>
D1LM Tray 1 lift up motor
4-2 D1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Purpose Operation test/check D2LM Tray 2 lift up motor
D2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) DPFM Desk transport motor
sensors and detectors and their control cir- DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
cuits.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport <Tandem LCC>
Operation/Procedure D1LM Tray 1 lift up motor
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- D1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
played. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which D2LM Tray 2 lift up motor
are active are highlighted. D2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
D2PUS Tray 2 paper feed solenoid
<Desk>
DPFM Desk transport motor
D1MDC Tray 1 installation detection connector DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D1PED Tray 1 paper empty detector
D1PPD Tray 1 paper transport detector <A4 LCC>
D1PQD Tray 1 remaining paper quantity detector LPFM LCC transport motor
D1PRED1 Tray 1 paper rear edge detector 1 LLM LCC lift motor
D1PRED2 Tray 1 paper rear edge detector 2 LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
D1PRED3 Tray 1 paper rear edge detector 3 LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
D1PRED4 Tray 1 paper rear edge detector 4 LTRC LCC transport clutch
D1ULD Tray 1 upper limit detector
D2MDC Tray 2 installation detection connector
D2PED Tray 2 paper empty detector
4-5
D2PPD Tray 2 paper transport detector Purpose Operation test/check
D2PQD Tray 2 remaining paper quantity detector Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the paper transport
D2PRED1 Tray 2 paper rear edge detector 1 clutch for the paper feed tray unit.
D2PRED2 Tray 2 paper rear edge detector 2
D2PRED3 Tray 2 paper rear edge detector 3
D2PRED4 Tray 2 paper rear edge detector 4 Operation/Procedure
D2ULD Tray 2 upper limit detector [Check the ON operation]
Press the clutch button of the target of the ON operation check.
<Tandem LCC> Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
DCDT Tandem tray insertion detection the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
DPFD1 Tray 1 paper transport detector highlighted.
D1LUD Tray 1 paper empty detector [Check the OFF operation]
D1PED Tray 1 paper empty detector Press the highlighted button which is ON. When the operation is
D1PQD Tray 1 remaining paper quantity detector normal, the highlighted button on the display returns to the normal
D1PPD1 Tray 1 paper transport detector 1 display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted display is maintained.
D1PPD2 Tray 1 paper transport detector 2
D2LUD Tray 2 upper limit detector button Content
D2PED Tray 2 paper empty detector DTRC Desk transport clutch
D2PQD Tray 2 remaining paper quantity detector LTRC LCC transport clutch
<A4 LCC>
LPFD LCC transport sensor
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
L24VM LCC24V power monitor
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LCCD LCC main unit connection detection
5 6
5-1 6-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the display, LCD in Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the load in the
the operation panel, and control circuit. paper transport system (clutches and sole-
Section Operation unit noids) and the control circuits.
(Operation/Display Control PWB) Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX key.
MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE]
checked. key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Load operation check method:
5-2 The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
Purpose Operation test/check there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit. Section Item/Display Content
Section Fusing Transport/ CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1
process CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
Operation/Procedure
CPFM Paper feed motor
FRS Fusing lower pawl separation
key.
solenoid
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FUM Fusing motor
The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF operations 10 HPFC Transport roller clutch
times at the interval of 500ms. When [EXECUTE] key is OSM Offset motor
pressed, the operation is terminated. PFM Transport motor
Heater lamp operation check method: POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between PSPS Separation solenoid
the frames. RRM Registration motor
Paper feed CLUM1 Paper tray lift motor (Tray 1)
HL_UM Main heater lamp (HL MAIN) CLUM2 Paper tray lift motor (Tray 2)
HL_US Sub heater lamp (HL SUB) CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Tray 1)
HL_UW Warm-up heater lamp (HL UW) (except 36 cpm) CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Tray 2)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual tray)
5-3
Purpose Operation test/check 6-2
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the scanner lamp Purpose Operation test/check
and the control circuit.
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of each fan and its
Section Scanner (reading) control circuit.
Operation/Procedure Section Others
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Operation/Procedure
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec. When [EXECUTE] key 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
is pressed, the operation is terminated.
The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Press [ALL] key to
Display Content
select all the fans collectively.
OC COPY LAMP OC scanner lamp
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF scanner lamp Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
5-4
sound.
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the discharge lamp Item/Display Content
and the control circuit. LSUFM LSU cooling fan
OZFM Ozone fan motor
Section Process
POFM Power exit cooling fan 1,2,3
Operation/Procedure PROFM1 Process fan 1
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel PSFM Power cooling fan1,2
key.
The discharge lamp lights up for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
6-90 7-12
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Reset the machine to the factory setting. Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
(The scanner is set to the lock enable posi- setting (for aging operation)
tion). Section Automatic document feeder
Section Scanner Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Setting range: 0 - 255)
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped. 2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
7
7-1 8
Purpose Setting
8-1
Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions of aging.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operations of the
developing voltage in each print mode and
1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key.
the control circuit.
Section Toner supply, developing
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
AGING Aging operation setup The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
INTERVAL Intermittent setup saved. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup operation is terminated.
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup Setting Default
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup range value
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup MIDDLE A Developing bias set value 0-700 475
CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment LOW A Developing bias set value 0-700 475
7-6 8-2
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Set the operating intermittent aging cycle. Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the main
Section charger grid voltage in each printer mode
and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Photo-conductor
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
saved. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. operation is terminated.
Item/Display Content Setting Default value

7-8 range 36 46/56
Purpose Information display/print cpm cpm
MIDDLE A Main charger grid 150 - 645 650
Function (Purpose) Display the warm-up time.
LOW A voltage 850 645
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
8-6 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A PLV MID (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 180
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the (Front surface)
transport voltage and the control circuit. B PLV MID (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 180
Section Transfer (Back surface)
Operation/Procedure C PLV LOW (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 150
(Front surface)
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll key. D PLV LOW (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 150
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (Back surface)
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the 9
set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated. 9-2
Setting Default value Purpose Operation test/check
range 36/46/56 Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the sensors and
A TC PLAIN Transfe Front sur- 0 - 255 90/107/111 detectors in the switchback section (duplex
BW SPX r current face section) and the control circuit.
B TC PLAIN Back 0 - 255 82/94/99
BW DPX surface
C TC HEAVY1 Front 0 - 255 82/82/82 Operation/Procedure
BW SPX surface The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
D TC HEAVY1 Back 0 - 255 82/82/82 played. The code names of the sensors and the detectors which
BW DPX surface are active are highlighted.
E TC HEAVY2 Heavy 0 - 255 82/82/82
BW SPX paper2 DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
F TC HEAVY3 Heavy 0 - 255 82/82/82 APPD1 ADU transport detection 1
BW SPX paper3 APPD2 ADU transport detection 2
G TC OHP BW OHP 0 - 255 82/82/82
H TC Envelope 0 - 255 82/82/82
9-3
ENVELOPE
BW Purpose Operation test/check
I TC THIN RW Thin paper 0 - 255 82/82/82 Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the load in the
J TC GROSSY Gross 0 - 255 82/94/99 paper reverse section (duplex section) and
BW paper its control circuit.
K TC Transfer current 0 - 255 82/94/99
ADSORPTIO between paper Section Duplex
N Operation/Procedure
L TC Interval bias 0 - 255 55/55/55 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
INTERVAL key.
BIAS MID
M TC 0 - 255 55/55/55
INTERVAL The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE]
BIAS LOW key is pressed during operation, the operation is terminated.
N TC Transfer rear bias 0 - 255 73/77/82
BACKEND ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
O TC Transfe Cleaning in 0 - 255 160/160/160 ADUM ADU motor
CLEANING r the normal
cleanin operation
P TC
g bias
voltage
mode
Cleaning in 0 - 255 160/160/160
10
CLEANING the process
PROCON control 10-1
mode
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the toner supply
8-17
mechanism (toner clutch) and the related
Purpose Adjustment circuit.
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the sepa- Section Toner supply, developing
ration bias voltage and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec. When
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll key. [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the operation is
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. terminated.
Enter the default value specified on the following list. NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. toner cartridges.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
Default
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing Item/Display Content Setting range
value
unit, resulting in over toner. If this simulation is erroneously
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 250K
executed with the toner cartridge installed, the over toner
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
state may be canceled by making several background cop- (TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free
ies.
22
13
22-1
13--
Purpose Information display
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Display the print count value of each opera-
Function (Purpose) Cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. tion mode.
Section MFP (ICU) PWB Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
Target counter Display Content
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Total output quantity TOTAL OUT (BW) Total output quantity of black
Total use quantity TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity of black
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity of color
14 Copy COPY (BW) Copy counter
Print PRINT (BW) Print counter
14-- Document filing DOC FIL (BW) Document filing print counter
Other OTHER (BW) Black other counter
Purpose Cancel
PCI PCI OPE-TIME PCI accumulated operation
Function (Purpose) Cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5" trouble. time (H)
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure 22-2
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Information display
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Function (Purpose) Display the number of total mis-feed and
the number of troubles.
Section
15 Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
15--
Purpose Cancel
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
Function (Purpose) Cancel the self-diag "U6-01/02/09" trouble. RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter
Section LCC TROUBLE Trouble counter
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 22-3
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Display the mis-feed position and the num-
ber of mis-feed at the position.
16 Section
Operation/Procedure
16-- The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one
Purpose Cancel up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
Function (Purpose) Cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.

22-4
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Display the trouble (self diag) history.
Section
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
21 (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
21-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the maintenance cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved)
22-5 22-8
Purpose Information display Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Display the ROM version of each unit (sec- Function (Purpose) Display the number of operations (the
tion). counter value) of the finisher, the SPF, and
Section scanning (reading).
Operation/Procedure Section
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. Operation/Procedure
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to The counter values of the finisher, the SPF, and the scanner related
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. counters are displayed.
Item/Display Content SPF Document feed quantity

S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December SCAN Number of times of scan
are "X" and "Y" respectively.) STAPLER Staple counter
ICUM (MAIN) ICUM (Main) PUNCHER Puncher counter
ICUM (BIOS) ICUM (Bios) STAMP Stamp counter
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section) SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section) SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub) COVER Cover open/close counter
LANGUAGE Language support data version HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
UICONTENTS Contents data for LCD OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section
PCU PCU (* hour * minutes)
SCU SCU DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section
SPF DSPF/RSPF (* hour * minutes) (DSPF-installed model only)
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
DESK Desk unit 22-9
LCC Side LCC
FINISHER Finisher
SADDLE Saddle unit Function (Purpose) Display the print quantity of each paper
PUNCH Punch unit feed section.
NIC NIC Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
POWER-CON Power controller Operation/Procedure
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
ESCP ESCP font ROM TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section) TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section) TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
PCI PCI TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
EOSA embedded OSA MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
22-6 MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Purpose Information print MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
Function (Purpose) Print information on various settings,
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
adjustments, counters, controls, and ver-
sions.
22-10
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Display the system configuration (options
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
and internal hardware).
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) Section
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
The system configuration is displayed.
Item Display Print content
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
DATA NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
played.)
PATTERN NO.3 Data related to the process control
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED Simplex surface print (Default) Device Model name Content
2-SIDED Duplex surface print MACHINE MX-M365/M364 N Main unit
MX-M465/M464 N
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
MX-M565/M564 N
1).
SPF STANDARD Auto document feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DE12 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE13 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE14 Stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE20 Stand/500&2000 sheet paper
drawer
LCC MX-LC11 A4 Large capacity tray (LCC)
Device Model name Content 22-12
PUNCHER MX-PN11A Punch module
MX-PN11B
MX-PN11C Function (Purpose) Display the mis-feed position of the SPF
MX-PN11D and the number of mis-feed at the position.
MX-PNX5A Section Automatic document feeder
MX-PNX5B
Operation/Procedure
MX-PNX5C
MX-PNX5D
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one
MX-PNX6A
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-PNX6B * For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "Paper JAM code list" in
MX-PNX6C [6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE.
MX-PNX6D
FINISHER MX-FN17 Inner finisher 22-13
MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K) Purpose Information display
MX-FN11 Finisher (4K)
MX-FN18 Saddle stitch finisher (4K)
Function (Purpose) Display the use quantity of the process sec-
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
tion (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge).
PS STANDARD/ PS expansion Section Process
MX-PK11 Operation/Procedure
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
SECURITY MX-FR44U Data security kit
displayed.
(commercial version)
MX-FR44 Data security kit
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
(Authentication version)
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SEPARATION PAWL Fusing separation pawl
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
FUSING WEB UNIT Fusing web unit
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter
SD *****MB SD card capacity
TC ROLLER Transfer roller
NIC STANDARD NIC
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner
BARCODE MX-PF10 Bar code font
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
DEVE CTRG DV unit
ACM (*) MX-AMX2 / Application communication
DRUM OPC drum
STANDARD module
MAIN CHARGER Main charger
EAM (*) MX-AMX3 / External account module
DRUM BLADE OPC drum cleaning blade
STANDARD
WEB MX-AM10 / Wen browsing kit is enabled TONER CTRG Toner cartridge
BROWSING STANDARD
ACRE MX-EB11 Enhanced compression kit 22-14
(ACRE)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MIRRORING MX-EB12 N Mirroring kit
PCI CONNECT Plasmacluster ion generator Function (Purpose) Display the use status of the toner car-
mounting kit tridge.
CF *****MB Compact flash capacity Section Process
Operation/Procedure
22-11 The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Display Content Accumulat Accumulat Accumulat Remaining
Function (Purpose) Display the use frequency of send/receive
item ed No. of ed No. of ed No. of quantity
of FAX. installed near near end (Unit) (Unit: %)
(Only when FAX is installed.) cartridges end (Unit)
Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB) (Unit)
Operation/Procedure INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONE Toner 0- -255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-25%
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter R cartridg 25-50%
are displayed. e use 50-75%
counter 75-100%
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
22-18
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
SEND TIME FAX send time Function (Purpose) Display the use data delete history.
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
Display item Content

Item Date
STAR Year/month/ Delete history (Date and time of operation
T day start)
END /hour/min Delete history (Date and time of operation
end)
22-19 22-90
Purpose Information display Purpose Information print
Function (Purpose) Display various counter values related to Function (Purpose) Output the various set data lists.
scan - image send. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Change the display with scroll key.
Display the counter value related to the network scanner 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W scan job)
All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
counter (Color scan job)
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
OUTPUT
PS FONT LIST
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page
OUTPUT PS KANJI FONT LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
RECEIVE NIC PAGE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send list (*) GROUP LIST
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send PROGRAM LIST
SMB SEND Number of SMB send MEMORY BOX LIST
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
(N model only) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
22-40
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
Function (Purpose) Display the error code list and the contents. Receive YES/NO ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
number table
Section
Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
Operation/Procedure allow address
1) Select the error code. domain table
To network INBOUND ROUTING LIST
22-42 Transfer table list
To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Transfer list
Function (Purpose) Check the JAM/trouble data. Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Section Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
Operation/Procedure * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. model, this setting is invalid.
Display item Counter Content

JAM/Trouble code Total count
PAPER JAM Paper JAM counter JAM code Total output
23
SPF JAM SPF JAM counter JAM code (SPF) quantity
TROUBLE Trouble counter Trouble code 23-2
Purpose Information print
22-43 Function (Purpose) Output the trouble history list of paper jam
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check and mis-feed.
Function (Purpose) Display the JAM data. Section
Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel. The trouble history of paper jams and mis-feed is printed.
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
Item Content
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with
SIM22-9 display content)
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar
with SIM27-18 display content)
23-80 TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
Purpose Information print TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
Function (Purpose) Output the operation data of paper feed MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
and paper transport in the paper feed/trans- MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
port section. MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
Operation/Procedure
ADU ADU paper feed counter
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted. Used to print the operations timing list
24-3
of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and transport sec-
tion. The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of Purpose Data clear/Reset
the latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. Since the Function (Purpose) Clear the finisher, SPF and the scan (read-
paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending on the used ing) unit counter.
paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sensor and the Section
detectors and the operation timing also differ.
Operation/Procedure
JAM CODE JAM code 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
DATE / TIME JAM occurrence date/time 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MODE Printing mode when JAM occurs
3) Press [YES] key.
SIZE Paper size
The target counter is cleared.
TYPE Paper type
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
SPF DSPF/RSPF document feed counter
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray
SCAN Scan counter
INF1 (ILLEGAL) Illegal detection information
STAPLER Staple counter
INF2(SENSOR) Sensor information
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
23-81 SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
Purpose Data backup SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
COVER Cover open/close counter
Function (Purpose) Backup the paper feed time data to the
HP_ON HP detection count
USB memory.
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
Section DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
Operation/Procedure (DSPF-installed model only)
Insert the USB memory into the main unit, and press [OK] key and
[EXECUTE] key. 24-4
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Clear the maintenance counter, the printer
24 counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
unit.
24-1 Section
Purpose Data clear/Reset Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Clear the jam counter, and the trouble 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
counter. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section 3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure The target counter is cleared.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Item / Display Content
Maintenance MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
3) Press [YES] key. Maintenance counter (Total)
The target counter is cleared. (Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING ROLLER Counter
MACHINE Machine JAM counter Number of use days
SPF DSPF/RSPF JAM counter Accumulated number of rotation
TROUBLE Trouble counter PRESS ROLLER Counter
Number of use days
24-2 Accumulated number of rotation
SEPARATION PAWL Counter
Number of use days
Function (Purpose) Clear the number of use (the number of Accumulated number of rotation
prints) of each paper feed section. FUSING WEB Print counter
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport Number of use days
Operation/Procedure Web cleaning send counter
Transfer TC ROLLER Counter
Number of use days
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Accumulated number of rotation
3) Press [YES] key. Drum DRUM Counter
The target counter is cleared. Number of use days
Accumulated number of rotation
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
Main charger MAIN CHARGER Counter
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)
Number of use days
FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
Number of use days
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Other PS PAPER Counter
Number of use days
OZONE FILTER Counter
24-12
Number of use days Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Clear the document filing counter.
24-5
Section
Purpose Data clear/Reset Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Clear the developer counter. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Section Toner supply, developing 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [YES] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. The target counter is cleared.
DOC FIL Document filing print counter
3) Press [YES] key.
24-15
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically. Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Clear the counters related to the scan
Developer cartridge print counter mode and the image send.
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
Section
Number of day that used developer (Day)
Operation/Procedure
24-6
3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Clear the copy counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. counter (COLOR scan job)
3) Press [YES] key. INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output
The target counter is cleared. INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
SEND OUTPUT
COPY BW Copy counter INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
24-9 INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
Purpose Data clear/Reset FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Function (Purpose) Clear the printer mode print counter and the SMB SEND Number of SMB send
self print mode print counter. USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
Section TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
Operation/Procedure
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Clear the toner cartridge use status data.
PRINT BW Print counter Section
OTHER BW Other counter Operation/Procedure
24-10
2) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Data clear/Reset The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
Function (Purpose) Clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
Error display Content Details of content
25 EE-EC EC abnormality The sampling level in the automatic
toner density adjustment is outside of
1283.
25-1
Purpose Operation test/check 25-4
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the developing Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
section, and to display the toner density
Function (Purpose) Display the operation data of the toner sup-
detection level.
ply quantity (Not used in the market).
Section Toner supply, developing
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed..
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 2
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- DV CTRG Developer cartridge print counter
played. DV RANGE Developer cartridge accumulated traveling
distance
TCS_K Toner sensor output value HUMIDITY AREA Current humidity area
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level ALL VREF All correction value for the toner density
reference value
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
DELTA VREF Transition target correction amount
simulation. If this simulation is executed with the toner car-
TONER DEN LT Toner density output level
tridge installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the devel-
TONER DEN ST Toner density standard level
oping unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble.
AUTO DEVE VO Toner density sensor control voltage
ALL V0 All correction values for the control voltage
25-2 value
Purpose Setting HUM V0 Humidity correction amount
LIFE V0 Life correction amount
Function (Purpose) Make the initial setting of toner density
PROCON V0 Process control feedback correction amount
when replacing developer. (Automatic
AREA V0 Area correction amount
adjustment)
PRINT RATE V0 Print ratio correction amount
Section Toner supply, developing ENV V0 Environment multiple correction amount
Operation/Procedure AUTO DEVE AREA Humidity area
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. PRINT RATE V0 Print rate correction amount
The developing motor rotates for 2 minutes, and the toner density
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
displayed. 26
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con- 26-1
trol level.
Purpose Setting
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the Function (Purpose) Set the paper exit operation from the right
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
side.
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally. Section Paper exit section
Do not execute this simulation unless new Developer material has Operation/Procedure
been installed. If it is executed in other cases, under toner or over- 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
tone may occur, causing a trouble. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Adjustment result data display This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K Toner density control adjustment value in the low A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
speed process mode.
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Toner density control adjustment value in the
middle speed process mode
AT DEVE VO_L_K Toner density sensor control voltage level in the 26-2
low speed process node Purpose Setting
AT DEVE VO_M_K Toner density sensor control voltage level in the
Function (Purpose) Set the paper type and the weight type.
middle speed process mode
Data display during execution Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
TCS_K Toner sensor output level
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level TRAY3 0 8.5 x 11
(TANDEM) 1 A4
Display in case of an error 2 B5
Error display Content Details of content LCC 0 8.5 x 11
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 77, or 1 A4
sensor control voltage level over 207 2 B5
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 177, or sensor G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
control voltage level less than 52 1 LBS
(*2) Details of the vendor mode
26-3
Completion of Insufficient Completion of
Purpose Setting
the specified money during the specified
Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the auditor VENDER quantity. copy job quantity.
Section Auditor MODE (Money No money (No money
remaining) remaining remaining)
Operation/Procedure
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 1
Default
Item/Display Content MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 3
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 Operation 1:
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
which can be changed in the system setting.
AUDITOR vendor is used.
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode Operation 2:
(Only the copy mode can be Auto clear is not made.
controlled.) Operation 3:
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode The display is shifted to the initial screen.
communicating with the
parallel I/F (for DocuLyzer)
26-5
(Japan only)
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which Purpose Setting
signals for the intercard Function (Purpose) Set the count mode in A3 (11" x 17") print.
connected to the PCU are
used for communication in Section
parallel I/F. Operation/Procedure
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC 1) Select an item to be set with scroll key.
(*1)
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
P OTHER NOT USED 3) Press [OK] key.
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode The set value in step 2) is saved.
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print Item/Display Content Default value
OFF No support for the auditor in A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter 2
document filing print B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter 2
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF C DEV (B/W) Developer counter
performed in the duplex print
mode.
If the remaining money
26-6
expires during continuous Purpose Setting
printing, the sheets in the
Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the destination.
machine are discharged
without being printed on the Section
back surfaces. Operation/Procedure
OFF Continuous printing is not
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
performed in the duplex print
mode. (The remaining 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
amount is checked for The selected set content is saved.
printing every surface in all
the printing process.) U.S.A. United States of America
If the remaining money CANADA Canada
expires during printing, the
INCH Inch series, other destinations
sheet is discharged without
JAPAN Japan
printing on the back surface.
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE (*2) 3 EUROPE Europe
MODE2 Vendor mode 2
U.K. United Kingdom
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
AUS. Australia
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
sensor. CHINA China
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear 26-7
sensor.
Purpose Setting
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the paper exit sensor Function (Purpose) Set the machine ID.
in the main unit, the right tray, Section
and the after process unit.
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF
Operation/Procedure
CONTROL the image send mode. 1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.
OFF There is no restriction in the Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
image send mode. inputted. To select a desired character, press the 10-key
repeatedly. Refer to the following list and enter characters.
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
Touch the “CONFIRM” section every time a character is
inputted. To modify an inputted character, delete it with
“CLEAR” key and enter the correction character.
2 : ‘16/Jan
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
26-18
Purpose Setting
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode Function (Purpose) Set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode
function. Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web operation.
Page function. In this mode, this function is made available in the (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
simulation mode. Section
Operation/Procedure
Number of times of key input
10-key 1) Select an item to be set with [UP] [DOWN] keys.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2 A B C a b c 2 - - - 3) Press [OK] key.
3 D E F d e f 3 - - - The set value in step 2) is saved.
4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
5 J K L j k l 5 - - - Default
6 M N O m n o 6 - - - value
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 - A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
8 T U V t u v 8 - - - 1 Copy toner save mode 1
0
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 - 2 Copy toner save mode 2
0 0 - - - - - - - - - 3 Copy toner save mode 3
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
26-8 1 Printer toner save mode 1
0
2 Printer toner save mode 2
Purpose Setting
3 Printer toner save mode 3
Function (Purpose) Set the count mode (Long scale). C COPY TS 0 Toner save setting is displayed Refer
Section DISPLAY 1 Toner save setting is not displayed to the
D PRINTER 0 Toner save setting is displayed destinat
Operation/Procedure ion list
TS 1 Toner save setting is not displayed
1) Select an item to be set with scroll key. DISPLAY below
2) Enter the set value with 10-key
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2 Destination Default value C Default value D
3) Press [OK] key. U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
The set value in step 2) is saved. CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Default JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Setting Defaul
Item/Display Content value AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
range t value
(Taiwan) EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 U.K. 1 (Not Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
LONG Total counter
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SIZE(S)
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
B MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
C DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 26-30
LONG Developer counter Purpose Setting
SIZE(S) (B/W)
D TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 Function (Purpose) Set the operation mode corresponding to
LONG Total counter (B/W) the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
SIZE(L) Section
E MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Operation/Procedure
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(L) counter (B/W) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter 0 Control allowed
SIZE(L) (B/W) 1 Control inhibited
Long Scale (Small) : 631 - 1050mm 2) Press [OK] key.

2 Long Scale (Large) : 1051 - 1200mm The set value in step 1) is saved.
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
26-10 to the power frequency, etc.
Purpose Setting
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
Function (Purpose) Set the trial mode of the network scanner. CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
Section INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
Operation/Procedure JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting

(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
26-32 1 AMS Enable
Purpose Setting 2) Press [OK] key.

Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the fusing cleaning The set value in step 1) is saved.
operation. <Default value of each destination>
Section Fusing U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
Operation/Procedure CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
2) Press [OK] key. JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
Default
value
26-49
A CLEANING 0 User fusing cleaning function is
PRINT SET Enabled Purpose Setting
1
1 User fusing cleaning function is Function (Purpose) Set the print speed of postcards mode.
Disabled
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-35
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
Purpose Setting
When the setting is changed, the paper feed interval in print or
Function (Purpose) Set the display mode of SIM22-4 trouble copy in the postcard mode is changed and the job speed is
history when a same trouble occurred changed accordingly.
repeatedly. There are two display modes:
LOW: The paper feed interval is long. (Normal mode)
display as one trouble or display as several
series of troubles. HIGH: The paper feed interval is short. (when a paper jam occurs,
the number of sheets of jam paper is greater than that in the LOW
Section mode.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-50
Purpose Setting
0 Only once display.
1 Any time display. Function (Purpose) Set the operation specifications and func-
tions.
2) Press [OK] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
26-38
panel.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
maintenance timing is reached or the con-
sumable part life is over. Default
Section value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
Operation/Procedure
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
2) Press [OK] key. FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
The set value in step 1) is saved. limited. to *2
1 Finisher special paper
Default The number of paper exit is
Item/Display Content not limited.
value
A MAINTENANCE 0 When the maintenance life is 0 C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
LIFE OVER over (Print Continue) COLOR ON during paper feed
1 When the maintenance life is 1 Paper feed tray color display
over (Print Stop) OFF during paper feed
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0 D LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Disable 0
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end 1 Enable
1: STOP) (Print Continue) E WIRELESS SET 0 Disable 0
1 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 Enable
when the fusing web is end
(Print Stop) (*1) Default values for each destination of item A
Destination Item A
26-41 USA 1
Purpose Setting CANADA 1
INCH 1
Function (Purpose) Set Enable/Disable of the magnification
JAPAN 1
ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the
AB_B 1
center binding mode.
EUROPE 1
Section UK 0
Operation/Procedure AUS 1
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. AB_A 1
CHINA 1
0 AMS Disable
(*2)
Default
Target Target paper setting value
paper 0 1 A PCI SETTING 0 Serial port PCI mode OFF. (For 0
1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation connecting the serial port vendor)
saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are is stopped 1 Serial port PCI mode ON. (JOB
stitch discharged continuously. When, when the status LED MODE1)
finisher however, different kinds of paper exit tray 2 Serial port PCI mode ON. (JOB
sheets are mixed and full, 500 status LED MODE2)
discharged and less than 30 sheets, or
sheets of a kind are 94mm height MODE1: Red LED is light/blink/OFF, MODE2: Red LED always
continuously discharged, the of paper exit is OFF
operation is performed similarly detected.
When PCI SETTING is changed from “0” to “1” or “2” . if SIM26-3
to that of setting value "1".
“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is set to “S_VENDOR”. “AUDITOR” is
Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are changed to “NONE”.
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When,
however, different kinds of 26-52
sheets are mixed and
Purpose Setting
discharged and less than 100
sheets of a kind are Function (Purpose) Set whether non-printed paper (insertion
continuously discharged, the paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
operation is performed similarly
Section
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation Operation/Procedure
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are is stopped 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
discharged continuously. When, when the
however, different kinds of paper exit tray 0 Count up
sheets are mixed and full, 250 1 No count up
sheets of a kind are 33.5mm 2) Press [OK] key.
continuously discharged, the height of The set value in step 1) is saved.
operation is performed similarly paper exit is
to that of setting value "1". detected.
Destination Default
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are
CANADA 0 (Counted)
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When,
however, different kinds of INCH 0 (Counted)
sheets are mixed and JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
discharged and less than 100 AB_B 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are EUROPE 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the U.K. 0 (Counted)
operation is performed similarly AUS. 1 (Not counted)
to that of setting value "1". AB_A 0 (Counted)
4K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation CHINA 0 (Counted)
finisher envelope 100 sheets of a same kind are is stopped
discharged continuously. When, when the
however, different kinds of paper exit tray 26-53
sheets are mixed and full, 650 Purpose Setting
sheets of a kind are 94mm height Function (Purpose) Set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration
continuously discharged, the of paper exit is (gradation, density adjustment) in the copy
operation is performed similarly detected. mode.
to that of setting value "1". Section
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are
Operation/Procedure
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When, 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and Default
discharged and less than 100 value
sheets of a kind are A COPY 0 Inhibit 1
continuously discharged, the 1 Allow
operation is performed similarly B PRINTER 0 Inhibit 1
1 Allow
26-51 2) Press [OK] key.

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the serial port
operation. (For PCI)
Section
Operation/Procedure
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2.
2) Press [OK] key.
26-65 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Setting
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1 0
Function (Purpose) Set the finisher alarm mode. PREPARATION message is
Section displayed.
Operation/Procedure 1 The toner preparation
message is not
Use the touch key to set. displayed.
B REMAINING 0 Remaining toner 0-9 1
Set Setting Default NOTE TONER LEVEL level of 5%
Item Content
value range value
1 Remaining toner
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets 30 or 50 50 A4,A4R,B5, level of 10%
SHEE of stapling: Max. 30 8.5x11,
2 Remaining toner
TS 50 Number of sheets 8.5x11R,
level of 15%
of stapling: Max. 50 16K,16KR
3 Remaining toner
For saddle
level of 20%
finisher
4 Remaining toner
LIMIT ON Inner finisher: ON or ON
level of 25%
COPIE 30 sheets for all OFF
S sizes 5 Remaining toner
1K saddle finisher: level of 30%
50 sheets for all 6 Remaining toner
sizes level of 35%
4K finisher: 7 Remaining toner
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, level of 40%
16K  100 sheets 8 Remaining toner
Other than the level of 45%
above 9 Remaining toner
 50 sheets level of 50%
OFF Number of sets of C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1 0
stapling: Not END message is displayed
Limited 1 The toner near end
LIMIT 25 Number of sheets 25 or 30 25 A3,B4, message is not
SHEE of stapling: Max. 25 11x17, displayed
TS(L) 30 Number of sheets 8.5x14 D TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 0-1 2
of stapling: Max. 30 ,8.5x13.5, TONER END
8.5x13.4,
2 Operation STOP in
8.5x13,
TONER END
8K
For saddle 3 Operation STOP in
stitch TONER END
finisher E TONER END 0 Setting of the number 1-5 3
COUNT of print outputs
SADD ON Number of sets ON or ON Enable after TONER
LE loaded in the OFF For saddle NEAR END
COPIE saddle staple: stitch F TONER E- 0 Low status send of E- 0-1 1
S Limited (*1) finisher MAIL ALERT mail alert toner near
OFF Number of sets near end
loaded in the 1 Low status send of E-
saddle staple: Not mail alert toner near
Limited end
* LIMIT SHEETS: The 4K finisher is fixed to 50 sheets. (Contents of set items)

* LIMIT SHEETS(L): Valid only for the 1K saddle finisher. A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
The 4K finisher is fixed to 30 sheets. when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
*1: 1-5sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets) / B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
10-15 sheets (10 sets) when the toner near end status is reached.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
26-69 end status is reached.
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
Purpose Setting
the setting value.
Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions for toner near
D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-
end.
ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
Section played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)
Operation/Procedure The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
1) Select an item to be set with scroll key. assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed
1: Print Disable after toner near end
2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
26-74
NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
Purpose Setting
printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be Function (Purpose) Set the OSA trial mode.
resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D Section
is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this Operation/Procedure
case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
tus, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting range value
A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
Function (Purpose) Set the trial mode of the web browsing
MODE OSA trial mode.
function.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 OSA trial mode is
Section canceled.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-78
2) Press [OK] key. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the password of the remote operation
Setting Default
Item/Display Content panel mode.
range value
A WEB 0 Web browsing trial 0-1 1 Section
BROWSING mode setting Operation/Procedure
TRIAL MODE 1 Web browsing trial
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
mode canceling
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
26-73 In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
Purpose Setting
2) Press [SET] key.
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
26-79
tity) adjustment.
Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Set YES/NO of the popup display of user
Operation/Procedure
data delete result.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(shade delete quantity) is increased. 2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Setting Default

Item/Display Content Default value Item/Display Content
range range value
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0 A DISP SET 0 User data delete 0-1 0
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment result popup display
(M) (shade delete amount: OFF
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step) 1 User data delete
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0 result popup display
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment ON
(S) delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step)
27
27-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set non-detection of communication error
(U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Not detection
1 Detection
2) Press [OK] key.

27-2 Content Default
Item/Display
value
Purpose Setting J TONER ORDER 0 Toner order alert send at 0
Function (Purpose) Set the sender's registration number and TIMING CONTROL the fixed toner remaining
the HOST server telephone number. (FSS quantity
function) 1 Toner under alert send
when presuming the
Section toner consumption
Operation/Procedure K TONER ORDER 0 Toner order delivery 0
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel. DELIVERY setting OFF
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO] SETTING 1 Toner order delivery
setting ON
L TONER ORDER 1 - 15 Toner order delivery 3
3) Press [SET] key. DELIVERY setting delivery threshold
The set value in step 2) is saved. INTERVAL setting (DATE)
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

27-5
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
If the connection process is not completed normally Purpose Setting
when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may Function (Purpose) Set the machine tag No.
be continuously made every time when the power is
(FSS function)
turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the Section
HOST. Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
27-4 The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. In
Purpose Setting order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key to
Function (Purpose) Set the initial call and toner order auto delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
send. (FSS function) 2) Press [SET] key.
Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Purpose Setting

2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Set of the manual service call. (FSS func-
3) Press [OK] key. tion)
The set value in step 2) is saved. Section

Operation/Procedure
Content Default 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Item/Display
value
A FSS MODE 0 Exclusive for send in 1 0 Allow (Default)
NE-B mode 1 Inhibit
1 Send/Receive in NE-B
mode 2) Press [OK] key.
2 Exclusive for send in The set value in step 1) is saved.
NE-F mode
3 Send/Receive in NE-F
mode
27-7
B RETRY_BUSY 0 - 15 Resend number setting 2 Purpose Setting
when busy Function (Purpose) Set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS func-
C TIMER (MINUTE) 1 - 15 Resend timer setting 3 tion)
_BUSY (minute) when busy
D RETRY_ERROR 0 - 15 Resend number setting 1 Section
when error Operation/Procedure
E TIMER (MINUTE) 1 - 15 Resend timer setting 1 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
_ERROR (minute) when error
F FAX RETRY 0 - 15 Toner order auto send 2
timing setting (K) 3) Press [OK] key.
G TONER ORDER 0 Empty 11 The set value in step 2) is saved.
TIMING 1 Near end
2 5% A FSS 0 FSS function enable
FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
3 10%
4 15% B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default)
5 20% 1 Alert call disable
6 25% C CONNECTION 0 FAX connection enable
7 30% 1 E-MAIL connection enable
8 35% *1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
9 40%
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
10 45%
*2 Alert send timing
11 50%
H TEMP HISTORY 1- Frequency of acquiring 60
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
CYCLE 1440 the temperature and
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
humidity history (Minute)
Service call When pressing Service call.
I LOG OUTPUT 0 - 50 Log output capacity (KB) 30
CAPACITY
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is Operation/Procedure
reached. The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
a new product)
Alert resend Display Item
Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
27-9 (Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
Purpose Setting communication retry
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
Function (Purpose) Set the paper transport time recording DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history
YES/NO threshold value and shading gain DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
adjustment retry number. * For DSPF1/
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
(FSS function) DSPF2, only the
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF model is
Section FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits displayed.
Operation/Procedure FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
3) Press [OK] key. SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
The set value in step 2) is saved. SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
transport time between sensors DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
(Main unit) (50: Default) DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits (Only the DSPF
B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper model is displayed.)
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
transport time between sensors DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
(DSPF/RSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 0 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
RETRY adjustment retry number 27-12
(11: Default) Purpose Information display
D JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value for
Function (Purpose) Check the high-density and the half-tone
occurrence of continuous jams
Alert judgment threshold value for process control error history. (FSS Func-
occurrence of continuous jams tion)
(Setting of the number of times of Section
continuous jams as the alert for
Operation/Procedure
continuous jams) (Default: 10
times) The high density and the half-tone process control error history are
E JAM ALERT 0 - 99 Continuous JAM alert period displayed.
PERIOD setting (Default: 30days)
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper; HV_ERR2 High density error history 2
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. HV_ERR3 High density error history 3
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of HV_ERR4 High density error history 4
retry is actually not registered. HV_ERR5 High density error history 5
H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
27-10 H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2
Function (Purpose) Clear the trouble prediction history informa- H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5
tion. (FSS function)
Section 27-13
Operation/Procedure Purpose Information display
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Check the history of paper transport time
2) Press [YES] key. between sensors. (FSS function)
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared. Section
Operation/Procedure
Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history Change the display with scroll key.
Half tone process control error history
Code Refer
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
Item/Display betwe Passi ence
DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only) Occurre
Content en ng passi
Paper transport time between sensors nce date
senso time ng
rs time
27-11 Main FEED History of 99/99/99 5 5 5
unit TIME1 - paper 99:99:99 digits digits digits
10 transport time (ms) (ms)
Function (Purpose) Check the serial communication retry num- between
ber and the scanner gain adjustment retry sensors 1 - 10
number history. (FSS function) SPF FEED History of 99/99/99 5 5 5
TIME1 - paper 99:99:99 digits digits digits
Section
10 transport time (ms) (ms)
between SPF
sensors 1 - 10
27-14 Item/ Content Setting Defaul
range NOTE
Purpose Setting Display t value
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard
Function (Purpose) Set the FSS function connection test mode.
TYPE for paper order alert paper and
Section SET recycled paper
Operation/Procedure 1: Standard
paper only
2: Recycled
paper only
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
A3 Paper order num- 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
A4 ber setting [Num- 5000 2500 sheets for a
2) Press [OK] key. B4 ber of sheets] box
The set value in step 1) is saved. B5

A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of
FIRST number setting 10000 alert sheets for
27-15
A4: (Number of used the first time
Purpose Operation test/check FIRST sheets)
Function (Purpose) Display the FSS connection status. B4:
FIRST
Section
B5:
Operation/Procedure FIRST
The FSS operating status is displayed.
27-18
FSS Display the FSS 0 Not operated (Default)
CONNECTION connection status 1 Operated Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
27-16 Section
Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Set the FSS alert send. 1) Select an item to be cleared.
Section 2) Press [EXECUTE] key..
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [YES] key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key Item/Display Content
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set. TRAY1 Tray1 paper feed retry counter
2) Press [OK] key. TRAY2 Tray2 paper feed retry counter
TRAY3 Tray3 paper feed retry counter
Content Default
Item/Display TRAY4 Tray4 paper feed retry counter
value
A MAINTENACE 0 Alert send Enable 0 MFT Manual paper feed retry counter
ALERT 1 Alert send Disable
B TONER OEDER 0 Alert send Enable 0
ALERT 1 Alert send Disable 30
C TONER CTRG 0 Alert send Enable 0
ALERT 1 Alert send Disable
30-1
D JAM ALERT 0 Alert send Enable 0
1 Alert send Disable Purpose Operation test/check
E TROUBLE ALERT 0 Alert send Enable 0 Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the sensors and
1 Alert send Disable the detectors in other than the paper feed
F PAPER ORDER 0 Alert send Enable 0 section and the control circuits.
ALERT 1 Alert send Disable Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure
27-17
Purpose Setting played. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are
Function (Purpose) Set the FSS paper order alert. highlighted.
Section
PPD1 Paper transport detector 1
Operation/Procedure PPD2 Paper transport detector 2
1) Select an item to be set. POD1 Paper exit detector 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. POD2 Paper exit detector 2
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification POD3 Paper exit detector 3
is set. TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector (Face down tray)
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray)
3) Press [SET] key.
SHPOS Shifter home position sensor
DSW_R ADU open/close detector
DSW_C Transport cover open/close detector
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
TNFD Waste toner full detector
TNBOX Waste toner near end detection
FPFD Fusing upper paper entry detector
DSW_C2 Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 2)
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray)
WEBEND Web end detector 40-7
Purpose Setting
30-2
Function (Purpose) Set the adjustment value of the manual
paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the sensors and
the detectors in the paper feed section and
the control circuits. Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
played. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are The set value in step 2) is saved.
highlighted.
Default
CPFD1 Tray 1 paper transport detector value
CLUD1 Tray 1 paper feed tray upper limit detector A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detector B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231
(A4)
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector
C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
CSS11 Tray 1 paper feed tray size detector
(A4R)
CSS12
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
CSS13
CSS14
CPFD2 Tray 2 paper transport detector
CLUD2 Tray 2 paper feed tray upper limit detector 41
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detector
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detector 41-1
CSS21 Tray 2 paper feed tray paper size detector
CSS22
CSS23 Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the document size
CSS24 sensor and the control circuit.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Section Others
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Operation/Procedure
played. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are
40 highlighted.
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display

40-2
Close: Highlighted
Purpose Adjustment PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor sensor status Document present: Highlighted
adjustment.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport 41-2
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. detection level.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Section Others
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). Operation/Procedure
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. place a document on the document table.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). The sensor level without document is recognized.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
41-3
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Check the operations of the document size
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width sensor and the control circuit.
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) Section Others
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Operation/Procedure
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. The light receiving
range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display Content Detection level range

OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
PD1 - PD7 Document detection 0 - 255
Operation/Procedure
43 1) Select the SW-A or SW-B .
43-1
Default Default
Purpose Setting value value
Function (Purpose) Set the fusing temperature in each mode. Sett (SW-A) (SW-B)
It
ing 36/ 36/
Section Fusing e Display Content
ran 46/ 46/
m
Operation/Procedure ge 56 cpm 56 cpm
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. Gr. Gr. Gr. Gr.
B C B C
A WARMU Fusing motor 30 - 165/ 165/ 100/ 165/
P previous rotation 200 150/ 150/ 150/ 150/
Setting Default
Display Content FUMON start TH_UM set 100 100 100 100
range value
HL UM T value
PLAIN Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0
B WARMU Fusing motor 0- 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
PAP&WUP of plain paper, WUP and Ready series -5
P previous rotation 255 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
&RDY GR 0 FUMOF complete time 10 10 10 10
+5 F
+10 C WARMU Warm up 1- 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
HEAVY Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0 P END complete time 255 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
PAPER of heavy paper series -5 TIME 10 10 10 10
GR 0 D HI WU FM preliminary 30 - 165/ 165/ 100/ 170/
+5 FM ON rotation start 200 160/ 160/ 165/ 165/
+10 TMP TH_UM when 100 100 100 100
THIN Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0 warming up at
PAPER of thin paper series -5 alpha degree C or
GR 0 above
+5 E HI WU Warm up 0- 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
+10 END completion time 255 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
TIME when warm up at 10 10 10 10
RECYLED Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0
alpha degree C or
PAPER of recycled paper series -5
above
GR 0
F LO Setting value 0- 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
+5 WARMU applying time in 255 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
+10 P TIME warm up of 120 10 10 10 10
GLOSS Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0 degree C or below
PAPER of gloss paper series -5 (Time from ready
GR 0 completion)
+5 G HI Setting value 0- 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
+10 WARMU applying time in 255 10/ 10/ 10/ 10/
ENV Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0 P TIME warm up of 120 10 10 10 10
PAPER of envelope series degree C or
-5
GR above (Timer from
0
ready completion)
+5
H HI Threshold value 1- 70/ 70/ 70/ 70/
+10 WARMU alpha to apply the 119 70/ 70/ 70/ 70/
PAP CURL Change the fusing temperature setting -10 0 P setting value in 70 70 70 70
IMPROVE of paper curl improvement -5 BORDE warm up of alpha
MENT 0 R degree C or
+5 above
+10 I JOBEND After-rotation time 0- 5/ 5/ 5/ 5/
FUMON after completion of 255 5/ 5/ 5/ 5/
<List of destination groups> TIME a job 5 5 5 5
J HL UM TH_UM set value 30 - 95/ 95/ 95/ 95/
Group Destination
E-STAR when preheating 200 130/ 130/ 130/ 130/
Group A Japan China AB_B
135 135 135 135
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
K HL US TH_US set value 30 - 95/ 95/ 95/ 95/
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe E-STAR when preheating 200 130/ 130/ 130/ 130/
135 135 135 135
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/ L HL UM Resetting from 30 - 180/ 180/ 185/ 185/
device setting/fusing control setting. PRE- preheating 200 170/ 170/ 175/ 175/
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/ JOB TH_UM set value 180 180 185 185
device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on <Code descriptions>
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/ TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main
device setting/fusing control setting.
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed. HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
<List of destination groups>

43-2
Group Destination
Purpose Setting
Group A Japan
Function (Purpose) Set the fusing temperature and pre-heating. Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
Section Fusing
Group Destination Ite Setting Defaul
Display Content
Group C AB_A Europe U.K m range t value
AUS AB_A CHINA J HL UM E- Correction value for preheating 1 - 99 55
STAR LL TH_UM set value under LL
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/ environment
device setting/fusing control setting. K HL US E- Correction value for preheating 1 - 99 55
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/ STAR LL TH_US set value under LL
device setting/fusing control setting. environment
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on L HL UM Correction value for set value of 1 - 99 55
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/ PRE-JOB TH_UM when restoring from
device setting/fusing control setting. LL preheating under LL environment
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/
<Code descriptions>
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed. TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub
43-20 HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
Purpose Setting HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
Function (Purpose) Set the environmental correction under low

temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the 43-21
fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-2) in Purpose Setting
each paper mode.
Function (Purpose) Set the environment correction under high
Section Fusing temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the
Operation/Procedure fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-2) in
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. each paper mode.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Fusing
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2) is saved. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
vidual arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, 3) Press [OK] key.
the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a trou- The set value in step 2 is saved.
ble may occur.
NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi-
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1 C change/1sec change vidual arrangement. Except for the above cases, however,
the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a trou-
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
ble may occur.
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1 C change/1sec change
Ite Setting Defaul Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Display Content
m range t value Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
A WARMUP Correction value for fusing motor 1 - 99 40
FUMON pre-rotation start TH_UM set
HL UM value under LL environment Setting Default
TLL range value
B WARMUP Fusing motor prior rotation 1 - 99 50 A WARMUP Fusing motor previous 1 - 99 50
FUMOFF completion time under LL FUMON rotation start TH_UM set
LL environment HL_UM T HH value
C WARMUP Correction value for warm up 1 - 99 80 B WARMUP Fusing motor previous 1 - 99 50
END completion time under LL FUMOFF HH rotation completion time
TIME LL environment C WARMUP Warm up completion time 1 - 99 50
D HI WU FM Correction value for FM prior 1 - 99 40 END TIME
ON TMP rotation start TH_UM in warm up HH
LL at alpha degree C or above D HI WU FM FM preliminary rotation start 1 - 99 50
under LL environment ON TMP HH TH_UM when warming up at
E HI WU Correction value for warm up 1 - 99 50 alpha degree C or above
END completion time in warm up at E HI WU END Warm up completion time 1 - 99 50
TIME LL alpha degree C or above under TIME HH when warm up at alpha
LL environment degree C or above
F LO Correction value of the setting 1 - 99 50 F LO WARMUP Correction value for AF-AH 1 - 99 50
WARMUP value applying time in warm up of TIME HH application time (Time from
TIME LL 120 degree C or below under LL ready complete)
environment G HI WARMUP Correction value for AJ-AL 1 - 99 50
G HI Correction value of the setting 1 - 99 50 TIME HH application time (time from
WARMUP value applying time in warm up of ready complete)
TIME LL 120 degree C or above under LL H HL WARMUP Threshold value alpha to 1 - 99 50
environment BORDER HH which AN-AP is applied
H HI Correction value of threshold 1 - 99 50 I JOBEND_FU After-rotation time after 1 - 99 50
WARMUP value alpha to apply the setting MON TIME completion of a job
BORDER value in warm up of alpha degree HH
LL C or above under LL J HL UM E- TH_UM set value when 1 - 99 50
environment STAR HH preheating
I JOBEND Correction value for after rotation 1 - 99 50 K HL US E- TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50
FUMON time when completing a job STAR HH environment
TIME LL under LL environment L HL UM PRE- Resetting from preheating 1 - 99 50
JOB HH TH_UM set value
<Code descriptions>
Fusing web unit
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main installation detection Operation Remark
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub state
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Fusing web unit mot Not operate * During this operation,
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub installed the fusing web cleaning
Fusing web unit 10sec continuous feed counter is not
installed rotation counted up.
43-24
Purpose Setting
43-32
Function (Purpose) Set the fusing operation.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Fusing Function (Purpose) Set various items related to the forcible
Operation/Procedure operation of web cleaning when job end.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Section Fusing
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
The set value in step 2 is saved. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi- 3) Press [OK] key.
vidual arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, The set value in step 2 is saved.
ble may occur. NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi-
vidual arrangement. Except for the above cases, however,
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1 C change
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49 ble may occur.
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Setting Default
Item Display Item
range value
Item Display Content Setting Default A JOB END Fusing web Enable 0-1 0 1
range value COMP ACT motor forcible Disable 1
Gr. Gr. CHECK operation
B C condition when
A COOL DOWN Cool down time 1 - 60 5 5 job end
HEAVY (Heavy paper) B JOB END Interval of the print quantity 1 - 200 100
B COOL DOWN Cool down time 1 - 60 10 10 COMP ACT of compulsory action of the
OHP (OHP) INTERVAL fusing web motor at job end
C COOL DOWN Cool down time 1 - 60 15 15 C JOB END Number of forcible 1-5 1
ENVELOPE (Envelope) COMP ACT operations of the fusing
D FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor 3 - 200 100 100 CNT web motor when job end
operating interval
E POWER SET Power voltage setting 1-3 2 3 43-34
1:100V, 2:110-230V,
3:220-240V
Function (Purpose) Check the fusing lower web cleaning motor
<Code descriptions> operation.
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main Section Fusing
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub Operation/Procedure
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive.
<List of destination groups> 2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed,
Group Destination "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Group A Japan NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Group C AB_A Europe U.K ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
AUS AB_A CHINA trouble may be occur.
Fusing web unit

43-31
installation detection Operation Remarks
Purpose Adjustment/Setup state
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the fusing web Fusing lower web unit Not operate * During this operation,
cleaning motor. not installed the fusing web cleaning
Fusing lower web unit 10sec continuous feed counter is counted
Section Fusing installed rotation up.
Operation/Procedure
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive. Purpose Setting
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed, Function (Purpose) Check fusing nip operation.
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Section Fusing
NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi-
Operation/Procedure
the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a trou- 1) Prepare a black background image and put it on the cassette
ble may occur. with the black background facing upward.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Setting Default
3) Press [EXECUTE] key range value
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started. when TC Transfer output Enable
correction Enable/
printing is executed a jam is always generated. (As shown in
Disable setting
the photo below).
MD VG Membrane decrease grid Enable
4) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam voltage correction
paper. Enable/Disable setting
5) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam MD EV Membrane decrease Enable
paper and check to confirm that it is in the range of about 4mm environment grid voltage
- 5mm for 36 cpm machine and 6mm - 7.5mm for 46/56 cpm correction Enable/
Disable setting
machine.
MD LD Membrane laser power Enable
Item/Display Content Default voltage correction
value Enable/Disable setting
A PAPER 1 MFT 2 MD LD EV Environment laser power Enable
correction for the OPC
2 CS1
drum membrane
3 CS2
decrease correction
4 CS3 Enable/Disable setting
5 CS4 MD LD HV The process control laser Enable
power correction Enable/
Disable setting
Black background MD DL Membrane decrease Disable
Paper feed direction
discharge light quantity
correction Enable/
Disable setting
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Enable
environment discharge
light quantity correction
Enable/Disable setting
PRT HT Half tone process control Enable
Gloss change printer correction
section
feedback Enable/Disable
setting
AT DL Discharge correction Enable
Nip width Enable/Disable setting
TN HUM Toner density humidity Enable
correction Enable/
Disable setting
TN AREA Toner density area Enable
correction Enable/
Disable setting
TN LIFE Toner density life Enable
correction Enable/
Disable setting
TN COV Toner density print ration Enable
correction Enable/
Disable setting
TN PROCON Toner density process Enable
44 control correction
TN ENV Toner density Enable
44-1 environment correction
Purpose Setting Enable/Disable setting
TN DRIP Toner density correction Enable
Function (Purpose) Set each correction operation function in
unconditional supply
the image forming (process) section. Enable/Disable setting
Section Process TN SPEND Toner compulsory Disable
Operation/Procedure consumption mode
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
TN INT Toner compulsory supply Enable
(The selected item is highlighted.) correction for the
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) development traveling
distance Enable/Disable
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
setting
cially required.
TN ABS Toner unconditional Enable
supply Enable/Disable
Setting Default
Item/Display Content setting
range value
TN P RET Toner difference return Enable
HV Normal operation high Normal Enable
correction Enable/
density process control (Disable )
Disable setting
Enable/Disable setting Reverse
(Enable) TN VREF V re correction Enable/ Enable
Disable setting
HT Normal operation Enable
halftone process control TN DIS Toner density low print Enable
Enable/Disable setting area correction Enable/
Disable setting
range value
Purpose Adjustment D DRUM GROUND The difference between 0 - 255 1
Function (Purpose) Adjust the sensitivity of the image density DIF the max. value and the
sensor. min. value of the OPC
drum surface detection
Section Process level is in the allowable
Operation/Procedure range in detection of one
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- circle of the OPC drum
surface.
matically. After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result
E BIAS_BK Developing bias 0 - 255 0
is displayed. If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR"
STANDARD DIF reference value in the
is displayed. high density process
control
Setting Default
Item/Display Content F BIAS PATCH Patch-forming developing 1 - 255 45
range value
INTERVAL bias voltage interval
A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor 1 - 255 21 (voltage difference) in the
sensitivity (light quantity) high density process
adjustment value control
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor dark 0 - 255 0 G K_PAT TARGET Toner patch density 1 - 255 50
voltage ID target value (black) in the
C PCS_K GRND Belt surface detection level 0 - 255 0 high density process
when the adjustment of control
item A is completed H HV BK_GROUND Error judgment criterion 1 - 255 29
D PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0 LIMIT for the difference between
MAX detection level Max. value the max. level and the
E PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0 min. level of the OPC
MIN detection level Min. value drum surface detection
F PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
DIF detection level differential
44-6
(Item D - Item E)
Error name Error content Function (Purpose) Execute the high density process control
Sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error forcibly.
abnormality The adjustment target level is not reached by Section Process
three times of retry operations.
Operation/Procedure
Surface scanning PCS_K GRND error
abnormality The difference between the max. value and Press [EXECUTE] key. In case of a normal completion, the result is
the min. value of the OPC drum surface saved. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
detection level is out of the specified range in (Refer to the table below.) In case of an ERROR, the previous cor-
detection of one circle of the OPC drum rection data are saved.
surface.
Result display Content description
44-4 COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR Abnormal end
Purpose Setting
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
Function (Purpose) Set the conditions of the high density pro-
cess control operation.
Details of error display Content description
Section Process BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
Operation/Procedure error
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. K_HV_ERR Density process control operation error
TIMEOUT_ERR Density process control operation time-out
3) Press [OK] key.
44-9
NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi- Purpose Information display
the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a trou- Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
ble may occur. density process control operation.
Section Process
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Operation/Procedure
range value
A PCS_K TARGET Image density sensor 1 - 255 210 Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
sensitivity adjustment
target value
B LED_K OUTPUT Initial current level black 1 - 255 21
sensor LED light emitting
quantity set value in the
image density sensor
adjustment
C PCS ADJSTMENT Adjustment error 1 - 255 10
LIMIT allowance level in the
sensor sensitivity
adjustment
Item/Display Display Default
Mo Display Item/Display Content
(*: Correction Content range value
de range
value) ADK_SL (K) Development characteristics -9.99 - 0
CPY BLACK : High density process control GB gradient coefficient (High density 9.99
/ GB ***/*** mode 150-850 process control operation)
PR DV ***/*** GB/DV data (K) (Actual output DV: ADK_INT(K) Development characteristics -999.9 - 0
N voltage level / Base voltage level) 0-700 intercept level (High density process 999.9
BLACK : Actual operation mode GB: control operation 0V)
GB ***/*** GB/DV data (K) (Actual output 150-850 TARGET (K) High density process control target 0.00 - 0
DV ***/*** voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: density level (K) 255.00
0-700 n-1 High density process control nth 0 - 255 0
BLACK : Actual operation mode GB: time patch density level 1 (n=1-5)
GB ***/*** GB/DV data (K) (Actual output 150-850 n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
DV ***/*** voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: n-3 Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
0-700
n-4 Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
OT TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity 1-14
HE area
R TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity 0-1023
AD value
TC TMP AREA Transfer voltage correction 1-11
temperature area
TC TMP DATA Transfer voltage correction 0-1023 44-14
temperature AD value
TC HUD AREA Transfer voltage correction 1-10
humidity area Function (Purpose) Display the output level of the temperature
TC HUD DATA Transfer voltage correction 0-1023 and humidity sensor.
humidity AD value Section
MD HUD AREA OPC drum membrane decrease 1-9 Operation/Procedure
correction humidity area
MD HUD DATA OPC drum membrane decrease 0-1023
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
correction humidity AD value temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
MD K STEP OPC drum membrane decrease 0-4
correction STEP number display Item/Display Content Display range
(K) TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor Temperature: 0 - 255C
MD K DRUM OPC drum membrane decrease 0-30 main A/D value, temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
COUNTER correction counter (rotation TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main Temperature: 0 - 255C
distance) thermistor temperature.and AD value: 0 - 1023
MD K REVISE MC grid correction voltage level -255-255 AD value
(LIFE) TH_UM_D Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
MD K REVISE MC grid voltage correction level -255-255 thermistor AD value
(EV) TH_LM Fusing lower main Temperature: 0 - 255C
MD K REVISE MC grid voltage correction level -255-255 thermistor temperature and AD value: 0 - 1023
(ALL) AD value
MD K REVISE Drum membrane decrease laser -255-255 TH_US Fusing sub thermistor A/D Temperature: 0 - 255C
(LD LIFE) power voltage correction value AD value: 0 - 1023
MD K REVISE Drum environment laser power -255-255 TH_M External air temperature Temperature:-40-150C
(LD EV) voltage correction sensor temperature and AD AD value: 0 - 1023
value
MD K REVISE Laser power voltage correction -255-255
(LD HV) HUD_M External air humidity sensor Temperature:0 - 100%
and AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
MD K Display of laser power total -255-
REVISE(LD correction amount TH1_LSU LSU thermistor detection Temperature: 0 - 255C
255
ALL) level AD value: 0 - 1023
MD K REVISE Drum membrane decrease -255-255
(DL) discharge light quantity correction 44-15
MD K REVISE Drum membrane decrease -255-255 Purpose Setting
(DL EV) environment discharge light
quantity correction Function (Purpose) Set the OPC drum idle rotation.
DESTINATION CRUM destination data stored in - Section Process
the PCU PWB of the machine
Operation/Procedure
MODEL TYPE Model type of the machine 0-1
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
CRUM DEST_K Crum destination data -
PROCON High density process control 0-
COUNT HV execution number 99999999 3) Press [OK] key.
PROCON Half-tone process control 0- NOTE: The initial value must be set unless any special change is
COUNT HT execution umber 99999999
required.

range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time 0 - 255 6
Function (Purpose) Display the operation data of the high den- interval between the
sity process control and the image density previous OPC drum idle
sensor. rotation and the next one)
setting
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Category Item/Display Content
range value
Coefficient EX-LOW Coefficient value of the
B AREA1 Environment area 0-5 2
approximate formula of the
difference judgment
minimum density
threshold value setting
LOW Coefficient of the approximation
(different between the
formula of the low density
previous OPC drum idle
rotation and the current CONNECT1 Coefficient of the approximation
one) formula of when connecting the
low density and the medium
C AREA2 Environment area 1 - 15 1
density
conditions (condition of
the previous OPC drum MID Coefficient of the approximation
idle rotation and the formula of when connecting the
current one) low density and the medium
density
D CYCLE Previous rotation time 0 - 255 0
setting in the process CONNECT2 Coefficient of the approximation
control when recovered formula of when connection the
from power ON medium density and high
density
HIGH Coefficient of the approximation
44-17 formula of the high density
Purpose Information display CONNECT POINT Each density section connection
Function (Purpose) Execution process refresh. output ratio
Reference SENSOR_TARGET Half tone process control
Section Process value reference value
Operation/Procedure Correction S_VALUE Half tone process control
1) Select a refresh item with touch panel key. value correction value
For printer PRINTER_S_VALU Printer half tone process control
2) Press [EXECUTE]
E correction value
PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process control
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh
DITHER_VALUE reference dither value
PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
44-21 HT_VALUE correction value
Purpose Registration Previous BEFORE S_VALUE Previous half tone process
correction value control value
Function (Purpose) Set the half tone process control target.
Section Process
44-25
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the calculating conditions of the correc-
The half tone process control target is set and the operation data
tion value for the half tone process control.
are displayed.
Section Process
Display Content Operation/Procedure
COMPLETE Normal complete 1) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
ADJUSTMENT error
[K] High density process control error 3) Press [OK] key.
OTHER Other errors NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi-
44-22 the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a trou-
Purpose Information display ble may occur.
Function (Purpose) Display the toner patch density level in the Setting Default
half tone process control operation. range value
Section Process A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression
Operation/Procedure data lower limit value
1) The toner patch density level made in the half tone process B LOW FIELD UPPER Low density 0 - 255 60
control operation is displayed. LIMIT approximate expression
data upper limit value
Item/Display Content C MID FIELD LOWER Medium density 0 - 255 80
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START) LIMIT approximate expression
ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 6, 19 - 24) data lower limit value
D MID FIELD IPPER Medium density 0 - 255 7
LIMIT approximate expression
44-24
data lower limit value
Purpose Information display E HILIGHT POINT Reference point of the 1-8 7
Function (Purpose) Display the correction target and the cor- highlight correction
rection level in the half tone process control amount
operation. F HILIGHT VALUE Highlight correction 0 - 128 20
LIMIT amount limit value
Section Process G MAX VALUE LIMIT Maximum density value 0 - 128 0
Operation/Procedure correction limit value
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key. H HIGH FIELD High density 0 - 255 15
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value
Setting Default Item/ Default
Item/Display Content Content
range value Display value
I HIGH FIELD High density 0 - 255 1 C TIME After passing the Process 1 3
UPPER LIMIT approximate expression specified time from control
data lower limit value leaving READY Disable
continuously (Time can BK process 2
44-26 be changed by control
INTERVAL TIME) Enable
Purpose Operation test/check Pixel count 3
Function (Purpose) Execute the half tone process control com- judgment
pulsory. (Judgement
is based on
Section Process the setting
Operation/Procedure value of item
Press [EXECUTE] key. I.)
D HUM_LI HUM judgment is made Process 1 2
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data
MIT when turning ON the control
are displayed. power and after passing Disable
TIME. BK process 2
COMPLETE Normal complete
control
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment Enable
ADJUSTMENT error
E HUM The temperature and Process 1 2
[K] High density process control error humidity in side the control
OTHER Other errors machine are monitored Disable
only during a job for BK process 2
44-27 every 2hours (set by control
item M). When the Enable
Purpose Data clear/Reset changes in the
Function (Purpose) Clear the correction data of the half tone temperature and the
process control. humidity are greater
than the specified level
Section Process (the set value of item N)
Operation/Procedure in comparison with the
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. previous process
control.
2) Press [YES] key. F REV1 When the accumulated Enable 0 0
The correction data of the half tone process control are rotation time of the OPC Inhibit 1
cleared. drum unit reaches a
certain level after supply
the power.
44-28
G REV2_ When the accumulated Enable 0 0
Purpose Setting BK rotation time of the BK Inhibit 1
Function (Purpose) Set the process control execution condi- position OPC drum unit
tions. reaches a certain level
after execution of the
Section Process previous density
Operation/Procedure correction.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key. H REFRE YES/NO setting of the Key operation 0 1
SH display of the manual display YES
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MODE process control key by Key operation 1
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) key operations display NO
NOTE: The set value may changed for a design change or an indi- I DAY When the next warm-up 0: Disable of 0 1
if there is no job after a the specified
job after passing the days
the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a trou- specified days from judgment
ble may occur. execution of the 1 - 999: 1 - 1-
previous process control 999 days 999
Item/ Default
Content passing
Display value
A INITIAL When warm-up after Enable 0 0
clearing the counter of Disable 1
the OPC drum and the
developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the Process 1 2
power control
(when canceling shut- Disable
off.) BK process 2
control
Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
(Judgement
is based on
the setting
value of item
K, L.)
Item/ Default Item/ Default
Content Content
Display value Display value
J HI-COV Setting of the execution The process 0 0 W DRUM Drum reverse rotation Enable 0 1
conditions of the process control is REVER control setting Disable 1
control for the print ration performed by SE
considering
the average 44-29
print ration of
every 10 Purpose Setting
pages as the Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions of the process
judgment control during a job.
criteria
Print ration 1 Section Process
judgment Operation/Procedure
inhibit (The
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key.
process
control for the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
target of print 3) Press [OK] key.
ration is not
performed) Default
The process 2 value
control is A COPY During copy job 0: No execution 2
performed by B PRINTER During print job 1: HV only 2
considering C FAX During FAX print job 2: HV->HT 2
the average
D SELF During self print 2
print ration of
PRINT
30 pages as
E CPY TO Half tone process 0: Gray balance 0
the judgment
PRT control copier printer calculation value
criteria in a
TABLE conversion table 1: Fixed
continuous
select
print job of 30
or more HV: High density process control
pages
K LO- Setting of the execution Enable 0 0
HT: Half tone process control
COV judgment of the process Inhibit 1
control in continuous 44-37
printing of low print ratio
Purpose Setting
images
L TonerC Setting of the process Enable 0 1 Function (Purpose) Set the development bias correction level in
A-END control interval reduction Inhibit 1 the continuous printing operation.
when the toner cartridge Section Toner supply, developing
remaining quantity is
25% or less Operation/Procedure
M JOB Execution setting of item Allow 0 0 1) Select a target item with scroll key
STOP G,J,K judgment during a Inhibit 1 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
job
3) Press [OK] key
N AVERA Setting of the number of 1:10 pages, 1- 5
GE- average print ratio 5:50 pages 5
Setting Default
PAGE 1 step Item/Display Content
range value
corresponds
to 10 pages A DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_1 DV bias 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_K_L_- correction data
O LIMIT Setting of the number of 1:10 pages 1- 10
DATA_2 1-3 in printing
PAGE connected jobs of the 10:100 pages 10
(low speed)
process control and of 1 step C DV_ADJ_K_L_-
the limit number of the corresponds DATA_3
process control 10 pages D DV_ADJ_K_M_- DV bias 0-5 0
P PIX_RA Magnification ratio setting (%) of the 1- 10 DATA_1 correction data
TIO_BK toner count specified value entry of 100 999 1-3 in printing
E DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_2
corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print. (middle speed)
F DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_3
Q INTERV Setting of the leaving time when turning 1- 2
AL ON the power (h:hour) 255 G DV_ADJ_START_K_L_1 DV bias 1 - 12 4
TIME H DV_ADJ_START_K_L_2 correction 3
I DV_ADJ_START_K_L_3 starting 1
R HUM Interval setting of the temperature and 1- 2
J DV_ADJ_START_K_L_4 position data 1- 1
HOUR humidity monitoring time of "HUM" (h: 24
4 in printing
hour)
(low speed)
S HUM_D The specified value of the area difference 1- 2
K DV_ADJ_START_K_M_1 DV bias 1 - 12 4
IF in humidity between the level at 9
L DV_ADJ_START_K_M_2 correction 3
execution of the previous control and the
M DV_ADJ_START_K_M_3 starting 1
current humidity
N DV_ADJ_START_K_M_4 position data 1- 1
T BK_RA Magnification ratio setting (%) of the 1- 30
4 in printing
TIO specified value of the BK position OPC 999
(middle speed)
drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK”
U REV1_ OPC drum traveling distance value 1- 100
RATIO magnification ratio setting 255
V HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment 1- 60
developing bias variation value 255
Operation/Procedure
44-43
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key.
Purpose Data display
Function (Purpose) Display the identification information of the
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
developing unit.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Section Developing 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Operation/Procedure To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the
The identification number and the identification signal level of the "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy
developing unit are displayed. density in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data change the adjustment value. When the adjustment value is
are displayed. increased, the copy density is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
A DVCH KIND K Developing unit identification number Setting Default
range value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
44-62
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Purpose Setup/Adjustment B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Set the process control execution condi- HIGH 1 - 99 50
tions. C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
Section Process HIGH 1 - 99
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.A suitable one is selected among a number Photograph HIGH 1 - 99
of options depending on the condition. F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99
Select an item to be set. G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
- To change the image density in the high density area, select HIGH 1 - 99
PROCON TARGET. H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
- To change the frequency of the process control operations select HIGH 1 - 99
PROCON MODE. I AUTO1 Auto 1 (copy LOW 1 - 99 50
to copy) HIGH 1 - 99
Display/Item Content J AUTO2 Auto 2 (copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON ID DOWN(-2) The registered value of the process to copy) HIGH 1 - 99
TARGET ID DOWN(-1) control reference value are K TEXT Text (copy to LOW 1 - 99 50
ID UP(+1) collectively changed copy) HIGH 1 - 99
ID UP(+2) L TEXT/PRINTED Text printed LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL(0) The registered values of the process PHOTO photo (copy to HIGH 1 - 99
control reference values are copy)
collectively changed to the default M PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo LOW 1 - 99 50
value (copy to copy) HIGH 1 - 99
CUSTOM The value set by SIM44-4 is restored N LIGHT Light LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH QUALITY(+2) The values of the density correction HIGH 1 - 99
MODE HIGH QUALITY(+1) execution timing mode are
PRINT collectively changed
46-4
PERFORMANCE(-1)
PRINT Purpose Adjustment
PERFORMANCE(-2) Function (Purpose) Adjust the density in the image send mode
NORMAL(0) The value of the density correction (color mode)
execution timing mode are
collectively changed to the default Section
value Operation/Procedure
CUSTOM The value set by SIM44-28 is stored 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key.
When PROCON TARGET is selected. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Select the density level. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
When PROCON MODE is selected.
1) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
increased, and vice versa.
3) Press [YES] key.
46
46-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy density in each copy mode.
Section
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
Mo Setting Default
Item/Display Content area and the high density area.
de range value
LO A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
W B TEXT Text 1 - 99 target color is increased, and vice versa.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99
Default
PHOTO Photo Item/Display Content
value
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
Photograph
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99
G MAP Map 1 - 99 46-9
H RIP - 1 - 99 Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode)
HI A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the SPF mode scan image density
GH B TEXT Text 1 - 99
(copy, image send mode)
PHOTO photo Section
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 - 99 Operation/Procedure
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [DSPF] keys
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 on the touch panel.
G MAP Map 1 - 99
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
H RIP - 1 - 99
panel.
46-5
Purpose Adjustment item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the density in the image send mode. 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Section This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
Operation/Procedure mode, and the fax mode. When the adjustment value is increased,
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. the image density is increased, and vice versa.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. [DSPF]
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each Button Setting Default
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Item Display Content
range value
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) OC A COPY OC copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
increased, and vice versa.
B SCAN OC scanner mode 1 - 99 47
Mo Setting Default
Item/Display Content LOW (Low density side)
de range value
C FAX OC FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LO A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
W B TEXT Text 1 - 99
D COPY OC copy mode 1 - 99 52
PHOTO Photo
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 HIGH (High density side)
Photograph
E SCAN OC scanner mode 1 - 99 52
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 SIDEA: exposure adjustment
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 HIGH (High density side)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 F FAX OC FAX mode 1 - 99 52
H RIP - 1 - 99 SIDEA: exposure adjustment
HI A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 HIGH (High density)
GH B TEXT Text 1 - 99 DSPF A COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
PHOTO photo LOW (Low density side)
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 - 99 B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 LOW (Low density side)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 C FAX DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
H RIP - 1 - 99
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
46-8 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
Purpose Adjustment HIGH (High density side)
Function (Purpose) Adjust the image send mode color balance SIDEB: exposure adjustment
RGB. HIGH (High density side)
Section F FAX DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density)
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
panel. SIDEB: R R
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. SIDEB: G G
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B
[RSPF]
46-19
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Purpose Setting
range value
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions of document
adjustment (Low density side) density scanning (copy, image send mode).
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48 Section Scanner
adjustment (Low density side)
Operation/Procedure
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side) Select an item to be set with touch panel. When an item is selected,
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53 it is highlighted and the setting change is saved.
adjustment (High density side)
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53 Item/Display Content Set value Default value
adjustment (Low density side) AE MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 MODE2
adjustment (high density) AE STOP COPY Auto exposure Stop REALTIME/ STOP
(for copy) STOP/
PRESCAN
46-10 AE STOP FAX Auto exposure Stop ON/OFF ON
Purpose Adjustment (for FAX)
AE STOP SCAN Auto exposure Stop REALTIME/ STOP
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy density (in each copy
(for scanner) STOP/
mode).
PRESCAN
Section AE FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT/ NORMAL
Operation/Procedure setting NORMAL/
SHARP
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
AE WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
2) Select 600dpi or 1200dpi with the resolution select button.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. NOTE:
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
MODE 2 Normal gamma
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is scanned, and the output image density is determined
increased, and vice versa. A4 (11" x 8.5") paper is selected by pri- according to the scanned density. (The output image density
ority. If there is no A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is is even for all the surface.)
selected. REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
Item Content according to the density in each area of document. (The
output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
AUTO Auto 1/Auto 2
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
TEXT Text
FULL mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo PART mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm width.
PHOTO Photograph This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
MAP Map
LIGHT Light
46-23
COPY ORG Copy document
Purpose Setting
Item/Display Density level Setting range Default value Function (Purpose) Set the density correction of copy high den-
A - Q POINT1 - 17 Point 1 - 17 1 - 999 500 sity section (High density tone gap sup-
ported).
46-16 Section
Purpose Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy density manually. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section 0 Enable
Operation/Procedure 1 Inhibit
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each Setting Default
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. range value
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
correction mode: Enable
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 1 K engine highest density
increased, and vice versa. A4 (11" x 8.5") paper is selected by pri- correction mode: Disable
ority. If there is no A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
selected. TARGET maximum density correction
C RATIO LOW High density correction ration 0 - 100 50
Item/Display Density level Setting range Default value (LOW)
A - Q POINT1 - 17 Point 1 - 17 1 - 999 500 D RATIO HIGH High density correction ration 0 - 100 5
(HIGH)
E DITHER Dither threshold 0 - 255 250
THRESHOLD
Setting Default 46-37
range value
F SLOPE Slope threshold 100 - 400 Purpose Adjustment
THRESHOLD 500 Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproducibility of the scan image
color document (copy, image send mode).
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set item A
to "0". The density of high density part decreases. However, the Section
tone gap is better. Operation/Procedure
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set item 1) Select a target item with scroll key.
A to "1". The tone gap may occur in high density part. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
46-24
4) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Adjustment
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel-
Function (Purpose) Adjust copy and printer density low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images
(Auto adjustment) in the monochrome mode.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content
range value
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 104
The adjustment pattern is printed out. B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 819
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
then press [EXECUTE] key. The automatic adjustment of copy D G-Ration RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
and printer density is executed, and then the adjustment result * B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
pattern of the copy mode as well as that of the printer mode is
the formula below.
printed.
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
3) Press [OK] key.
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
The half tone correction target registration is processed.
values (default). When the adjustment values of items A and B are
4) The half-tone correction execution menu is displayed. Press decreased, the copy density of yellow images is increased. When
[EXECUTE] key. Half-tone correction is executed. When the adjustment values are increased, the density is decreased.
[RESULT] button is pressed after completion of correction, the When the adjustment value of item A is decreased and the adjust-
data of the half-tone correction can be checked. ment value of item B is increased, the copy density of red images is
increased. When the adjustment value of item A is increased and
46-32 the adjustment value of item B is decreased, the copy density is
Purpose Adjustment decreased.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproducibility of the document
46-39
background density in the automatic copy
mode. Purpose Adjustment
Section Function (Purpose) Adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Select a target item with scroll key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
background and the low density image is increased. When the Input large numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input small
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background numeric value to decrease moire.
and the low density image is decreased.
Setting Default
[DSPF-installed model] Item/Display Content
range value
Setting Default A 200 x 100 [DPI] 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
range value OFF half tone OFF
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 B 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196 OFF half tone OFF
(SIDE1) surface) C 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196 ON half tone ON
(SIDE2) back surface) D 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 OFF half tone OFF
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196 E 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
(SIDE1) front surface) ON half tone ON
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196 F 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(SIDE2) back surface) OFF half tone OFF
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 G 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 ON half tone ON
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface) H 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 OFF half tone OFF
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) I 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON
46-40 Item/Display
Content Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density. (Col- G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
lective adjustment of all the modes) Half tone
Section H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure 1/Half tone

I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
1) Set the original on the original table. Half tone
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3/Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
and the scanned document image is outputted. Half tone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
Setting Default 5/Half tone
range value M EXECUTE AUTO Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX 1 - 99 50 MODE EXP1 Fine/Exposure 1 12 2 (AUTO)
LEVEL(ALL) send image density. EXP2 Fine/Exposure 2 3
(Collective adjustment of all EXP3 Fine/Exposure 3 4
the modes)
EXP4 Fine/Exposure 4 5
46-41 AUTO Fine/Automatic/ 7
Purpose Adjustment H_TONE halftone
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density H_TONE /Half tone
Section EXP2 Fine/Exposure 2 9
Operation/Procedure H_TONE /Half tone
1) Set the original on the original table.
H_TONE /Half tone
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. EXP4 Fine/Exposure 4 11
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key H_ONE /Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set EXP5 Fine/Exposure 5 12
and the scanned document image is outputted. H_TONE /Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

Setting Default
Item/Display Content ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
range value
and press [EXECUTE] key.
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 46-43
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density. (Super
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 Fine)
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
MODE mode Exposure 1 (AUTO) Section
EXP1 2
EXP2 Exposure 2 3 Operation/Procedure
EXP3 Exposure 3 4 1) Set the original on the original table.
EXP4 Exposure 4 5 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display
range value
46-42
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine) C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Section D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
1) Set the original on the original table. G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. /Auto/Half tone
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
H_TONE /Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
and the scanned document image is outputted. H_TONE /Half tone
J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Item/Display
H_TONE /Half tone
range value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Expo- 1 - 99 50
H_TONE sure 4
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
/Half tone
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Item/Display
Item/Display
range value range value
L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Expo- 1 - 99 50 M EXECUTE AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
H_TONE sure 5 MODE EXP1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 12 2 (AUTO)
/Half tone EXP2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 3
M EXECUTE AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 EXP3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 4
MODE EXP1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 12 2 (AUTO EXP4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 5
EXP2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 3 ) EXP5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 6
EXP3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 4 AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 7
EXP4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 5 H_TOE tone
EXP5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 6 EXP1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 8
AUTO Super Fine/Auto 7 H_TOE 1/Half tone
H_TOE /Half tone EXP2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 9
EXP1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 8 H_TOE /Half tone
H_TOE /Half tone
EXP5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 12
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
H_TOE /Half tone
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, 46-45
and press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density.
46-44
(600dpi).
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra
Operation/Procedure
fine)
Section
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. and the scanned document image is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Item/Display
range value
and the scanned document image is outputted.
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
Content Setting Default B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Item/Display C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
range value
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 /Half tone 1
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50 H_TONE /Half tone
tone I EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 H_TONE /Half tone
H_TONE 1/Half tone J EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
H_TONE /Half tone
I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Expo- 1 - 99 50
H_TONE sure 2/Half tone K EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 H_TONE /Half tone
H_TONE 3/Half tone L EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 H_TONE /Half tone
H_TONE 4/Half tone
L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
H_TONE 5/Half tone
Item/Display
Operation Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
mode range value
M EXECUTE AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1
FILING A FILIN LOW Low com- 0 0
MODE EXP1 600dpi/Exposure 1 12 2 (AUTO)
(COLOR G (C) pression (Color) (LOW)
EXP2 600dpi/Exposure 2 3 mode) MIDD Meddle com- 1
EXP3 600dpi/Exposure 3 4 LE pression (Color)
EXP4 600dpi/Exposure 4 5 HIGH High com- 2
EXP5 600dpi/Exposure 5 6 pression (Color)
AUTO 600dpi/Auto/Half tone 7 FILING B FILIN LOW Low com- 0 0
H_TONE (GRAY) G (G) pression (Gray) (LOW)
EXP1 600dpi/Exposure 1 8 (Monochro MIDD Meddle com- 1
H_TONE /Half tone me half LE pression (Gray)
EXP2 600dpi/Exposure 2 9 tone HIGH High com- 2
H_TONE /Half tone mode) pression (Gray)
EXP3 600dpi/Exposure 3 10 PRINT C PRIN LOW Low com- 0 0
H_TONE /Half tone HOLD T (C) pression (Color) (LOW)
EXP4 600dpi/Exposure 4 11 (COLOR MIDD Meddle com- 1
H_TONE /Half tone mode) LE pression (Color)
EXP5 600dpi/Exposure 5 12 HIGH Highcom- 2
H_TONE /Half tone pression (Color)
PRINT D PRIN LOW Low com- 0 0
HOLD T (G) pression (Gray) (LOW)
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, (GRAY) MIDD Meddle com- 1
and press [EXECUTE] key. (Monochro LE pression (Gray)
me half HIGH High com- 2
46-46 tone pression (Gray)
mode)
Purpose Adjustment
PUSH E SCA MIDD Middle 0 1
Function (Purpose) Adjust the FAX send image density. (RGB SCAN N (C) LE 1 compression (MIDDL
RIP). (COLOR mode 1 Low E2)
mode) compression
Section
MIDD Middle 1
Operation/Procedure LE 2 compression
1) Select a target mode for adjustment and place the document mode 3 Medium
on the document table compression
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MIDD Middle 2
LE 3 compression
3) Press [OK] key mode 3 High
When the set value is in crease , the density becomes higher. compression
when the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower. PUSH F SCA MIDD Middle 0 1
SCAN N (G) LE 1 compression (MIDDL
Setting Default (GRAY) mode 1 Low E2)
range value (Monochro compression
A STANDARD RIP 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 me half MIDD Middle 1
B FINE RIP 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 tone LE 2 compression
mode) mode 2 Medium
C FINE RIP H TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
compression
D SUPER FINE RIP 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
MIDD Middle 2
E SUPER FINE RIP H 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
LE 3 compression 3
TONE
High
F ULTRA FINE RIP 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
compression
G ULTRA FINE RIP H 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50
TONE /Half tone 1 *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com-
H 600DPI RIP 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
/Half tone
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
I 600DPI RIP H 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how-
TONE /Half tone
ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
reduced.
46-47
Purpose Setting 46-48
Function (Purpose) Set the compression rate of copy and scan Purpose Setting
images (JPEG).
Function (Purpose) Set the output resolution in each copy
Section mode.
1) Select a target item with scroll keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Select the output resolution of each copy mode with the key.
3) Press [OK] key. In order to change the reproducibility of line images, change
this setting.
600dpi mode: Line images becomes thicker. The reproducibility of
line images is increased. 1200dpi mode: Line images are repro-
duced finer than 600dpi mode.
The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
Button Default
Item Content self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
display value
feed tray is used.)
AUTO 600DPI ED Automatic 600DPI ED
600DPI DT 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
1200DPI DT [EXECUTE] key.
TEXT/PRT 600DPI ED Text Printed 600DPI ED Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.After scanning the
PHOTO 600DPI DT photo 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is automatically
1200DPI DT printed.
TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text photograph 600DPI DT 3) Press [OK] key.
1200DPI DT After completion of the correction amount registration, the
PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
1200DPI DT
PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
1200DPI DT The 48 patch self print is printed.
5) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
* ED: Error diffusion DT: Dither . [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started. After scanning the
46-51 patch, the screen automatically shifts to the dither selection
Purpose Adjustment menu.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy 6) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
paper mode and the image process mode items (dither), press [OK] key.
(manual adjustment).
Section 46-55
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key Function (Purpose) Adjust the drop out color in the image send
[PAPER/DITHER]. mode (monochrome manual text mode).
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key. Section
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
putted. A4 (11" x 8.5") paper is selected by priority. If there is is adjusted.
no A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. 1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
the image density. adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.
HEAVY Heavy paper Setting Default
DITH1 600dpi Dither For PRINTED PHOTO/ range value
PHOTO / TEXT PHOTO MODE A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
DITH2 1200dpi For TEXT PRINTED PHOTO /
dither TEXT PHOTO / PRINTED PHOTO / 2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
PHOTO MODE manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.
Item/Display Setting range Default value 46-58

A-Q POINT1 - 17 1 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Set the copy mode pseudo resolution
46-52 (Smoothing process).
Purpose Data clear/Reset Section
Function (Purpose) Set the gamma default for the copy mode Operation/Procedure
heavy paper and the image process mode. 1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll
Section key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key. 3) Press [OK] key.
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL]. 1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi
3) Press [YES] key. The setting is reflected only the image edge area.

46-54 Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
Purpose Adjustment A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Function (Purpose) Perform the engine halftone automatic den- ON 1
sity adjustment (dither). B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
Section
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Operation/Procedure ON 1
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. D PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
Content Setting Default Operation/Procedure
Item/Display
(copy mode) range value 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF) 2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
ON 1 process mode).
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
3) Press [OK] key.
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON) This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
ON 1 and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Default NOTE
ON 1 Item/Display button Content
value
I CPY TO CPY/AUTO Auto (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
A CPY Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2
document) ON 1 PUSH adjustment for the CENTE 2
J CPY TO CPY/TXTE Text (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF) AUTO automatic push scan R
document) ON 1 FILTER mode (Text, Printed HIGH 3
K CPY TO CPY/TXT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF) LEVEL Photo / Printed Photo
PRT ON 1 images)
L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF) B B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
PHOTO document) ON 1 COPY setting in monochrome ON 1
copy mode
46-59 C COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1

PUSH setting to image in push ON 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup RGB scan color mode
Function (Purpose) Perform the copy mode pseudo resolution D B/W PUSH Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
image process adjustment. setting to image in push ON 1
scan monochrome
Section mode
Operation/Procedure E B/W Setting of ON/OFF of OFF 0 0
PRINT soft filter application to ON 1
1) Select the MAIN (main scanning direction) or the SUB (sub
monochrome print
scanning direction) button.
images
2) Press the button of the adjustment value of the target copy
mode.
46-61
This adjustment is valid when SIM46-58 Pseudo resolution Function (Purpose) Adjust the area separation recognition
setting is set to ON. The thickness of images in the section level.
processed by smoothing is changed. Section
Positive: The image in the section processed by smoothing Operation/Procedure
becomes thicker. 1) Select an adjustment mode.
Negative: The image in the section processed by smoothing 2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
becomes thinner. panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Item Default NOTE
Mode button Content 4) Press [OK] key.
value
MAIN MONO (-)2 Monochr 0 Main scanning
COPY (-)1 ome direction smoothing
0 copy fine adjustment
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
(+)1 Negative (-) direction:
The smoothing required. When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
(+)2 ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur for
section becomes
MONO (-)2 Monochr 0 some documents.
thinner.
PRINT (-)1 ome
Positive (+) direction:
0 print Item/Display Content
The smoothing
(+)1 section becomes COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
(+)2 thicker. TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
SUB MONO (-)2 Monochr 0 Sub scanning COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print)
COPY (-)1 ome direction smoothing MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
0 copy fine adjustment TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
(+)1 Negative (-) direction:
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text
The smoothing
(+)2 print)
section becomes
MONO (-)2 Monochr 0
thinner.
PRINT (-)1 ome
Positive (+) direction: Setting Default
0 print Item/Display Content
The smoothing range value
(+)1 section becomes A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
(+)2 thicker. [TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
46-60 [LINE SCR] line screen
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup [SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
Function (Purpose) Adjust the sharpness in the color auto D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
mode. [HIGH LPI] High line number
judgment select
Section
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference area 0-1 1
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send
select
SEND] dots
B TEXT_IMAG Text/Image judgment priority 0-6 3
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
E level adjustment
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
C TEXT_BLAN Text/Blank judgment priority 0-6 4
1
K level adjustment
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
D HT_LV Dot area judgment threshold 0-6 1
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text
value adjustment
1
E AE_AREA_L Color AE judgment target area 0-6 3
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
V adjustment
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text
2, Color text 2 F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4
division result adjustment:
I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
dots division result adjustment:
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on division result adjustment:
dots For color scan
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection division result adjustment:
area of text on dots For monochrome scan
L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 J AE_JUDGE Color AE background density 0-4 0
[HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line _LV_L_U threshold value adjustment
number judgment (lower limit)
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 K AE_JUDGE Color AE background density 0 - 10 0
[BK] adjustment: No LV_L_O threshold value adjustment
chrome judgment (upper limit)
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
[CL] adjustment: Chrome LV_C detection level adjustment
judgment (chroma)
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 M AE_ONOFF_ AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0 (ON)
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on CC switch: OFF 1
background N AE_ONOFF_ AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0 (ON)
P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 MC switch: OFF 1
[SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High O AE_ONOFF_ AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0 (ON)
density dots CS switch : For color scan OFF 1
Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 P AE AE mode ON/OFF ON 0 0 (ON)
[SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium _ONOFF_MS switch : OFF 1
density dots For monochrome scan
R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 Q BLANK_JUD Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
[SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low GE_LV_L adjustment (value)
density dots R BLANK_JUD Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 GE_LV_C adjustment (chroma)
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2 S MODE0_UN Mode 0 developing paper 0-6 0
T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 DER mode select
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3 T MODE1_UN Mode 1 developing paper 0-6 0
U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 DER mode select
[LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line U MODE5_UN Mode 5 developing paper 0-6 0
screen DER mode select
V MODE6_UN Mode 6 developing paper 0-6 0
46-62 DER mode select
W SW_CHANG Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
E_MODE0 select
Function (Purpose) Set the operating conditions of the ACS, X SW_CHANG Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
the area separation, the background image E_MODE1 select
process and the auto exposure mode. Y SW_CHANG Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
Section E_MODE2 select
Z SW_CHANG Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
Operation/Procedure
E_MODE3 select
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch AA SW_CHANG Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
panel. E_MODE4 select
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. AB SW_CHANG Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
3) Press [OK] key. E_MODE5 select
AC SW_CHANG Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
E_MODE6 select
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially 46-63
required. When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur for Purpose Adjustment
some documents. Function (Purpose) Aadjust the density in the low density area
of a scan image.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Sett Def
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch Cat
Item/ ing ault
panel. eg Content NOTE
Display ran valu
ory
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. ge e
3) Press [OK] key. PA A WOV Watermark 0- 15 The adjustment
TT EN density level 255 value is changed to
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the ER DEN (LOW) increase or
background and the low density image is increased. When the N BK decrease the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background LOW density of the
and the low density image is decreased. B WOV Watermark 0- 19 watermark of
EN density level 255 background
Setting Default DEN (MIDDLE) documents.
range value BK To increase the
A COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3 MIDD watermark density,
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) LE increase the
B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (Color PUSH) 1-9 3 C WOV Watermark 0- 23 adjustment value.
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5 EN density level 255 NOTE: When the
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) DEN (HIGH) adjustment value is
BK increased, the
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
HIGH watermark area
PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH)
which is originally
E COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text photograph 1-9 3
not reproduced
PHOTO (Color PUSH)
becomes difficult to
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (Color PUSH) 1-9 5 hide. When the
adjustment value is
46-66 decreased, the
watermark area
Purpose Adjustment which is originally
Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproduction capability of water reproduced
marks in the copy/printer mode. becomes easy to
hide.
Section
D CONT Contrast 0- 2 This is used to
Operation/Procedure RAST adjustment 255 adjust the variation
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the in the watermark
copy/printer mode. density when the
adjustment value of
1) Select the adjustment mode. the watermark print/
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity. contrast adjustment
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. in the system
setting is changed
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result. by 1. When this
value is increased,
the variation is also
increased. When
the adjustment
value is 0, the result
of the contrast
adjustment is not
reflected. (* The
adjustment value
must be set to 1 or
greater.)
E HT For halftone 42 - 42 To reproduce the
TYPE index watermark 43 containing
(POSI type positive characters of
) watermark copy
F HT For halftone 42 - 42 more clearly, set to
TYPE index watermark 43 43. In that case,
(NEG type negative however, the
A) containing
characters of the
watermark
document can be
easily reproduced.
Sett Def Sett Def
Cat Cat
Item/ ing ault Item/ ing ault
eg Content NOTE eg Content NOTE
Display ran valu Display ran valu
ory ory
ge e ge e
CO A TEXT/ Text/ OFF 0 1 Normally set to the PO A LINE Line space in 0- 20
PY PRIN Printed ON 1 default. SIT SPAC the watermark 200
MO TED Photo No need to change IO E1 print box
DE PHOT mode in the market. N (24P - 36P)
O B LINE Line space in 0- 20
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 SPAC the watermark 200
mode ON 1 E2 print box
C PRIN Printed OFF 0 1 (37P - 48P)
TED Photo ON 1 C LINE Line space in 0- 20
PHOT mode SPAC the watermark 200
O E3 print box
D PHOT Photogr OFF 0 1 (49P - 64P)
OGR aph ON 1 D LINE Line space in 0- 20
APH mode SPAC the watermark 200
E TEXT/ Text/ OFF 0 1 E4 print box
PHOT Photogr (65P - 80P)
ON 1
O aph E BLAN Upper margin/ 0- 10
mode K H/B Lower margin in 200
F MAP Map OFF 0 1 1 the watermark
mode print box (24P -
ON 1
36P)
G LIGH Light OFF 0 1
F BLAN Upper margin/ 0- 10
T density ON 1 K H/B Lower margin in 200
docume
2 the watermark
nt mode
print box (37P -
H TEXT/ Copy OFF 0 1
48P)
PRIN docume ON 1 G BLAN Upper margin/ 0- 10
TED nt:
K H/B Lower margin in 200
PHOT selectio
3 the watermark
O n of the
print box (49P -
(CPY text
64P)
TO print
CPY) mode H BLAN Upper margin/ 0- 10
K H/B Lower margin in 200
I TEXT Copy OFF 0 1
4 the watermark
(CPY docume ON 1 print box (65P -
TO nt:
80P)
CPY) selectio
n of the I BLAN Left margin/ 0- 60
text K L/R Right margin in 200
mode 1 the watermark
print box (24P -
J PRIN Copy OFF 0 1
36P)
TED docume ON 1
PHOT nt: J BLAN Left margin/ 0- 90
O selectio K L/R Right margin in 200
(CPY n of the 2 the watermark
TO printed print box (37P -
CPY) photo 48P)
mode K BLAN Left margin/ 0- 120
K AUTO Automa OFF 0 1 K L/R Right margin in 200
tic 3 the watermark
ON 1
mode print box (49P -
64P)
L DEFA When TEX 0 0
ULT the T/ L BLAN Left margin/ 0- 150
MOD default PRIN K L/R Right margin in 200
E exposur TED 4 the watermark
e mode PHO print box (65P -
backgro TO 80P)
und is TEX 1
ON, the T 46-74
exposur PRIN 2 Purpose Adjustment
e mode TED
to be PHO Function (Purpose) Copy balance adjustment (Auto adjust-
set is TO ment)/Printer balance adjustment (Auto
specifie adjustment).
PHO 3
d. TOG Section
RAP
H
Operation/Procedure
TEX 4 This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin-
T/ uously.
PHO To perform both the copy balance adjustment (Automatic adjust-
TO ment) and the printer balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment),
MAP 5 use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is
46-91
performed. Then, the copy balance adjustment pattern is
printed. Purpose Adjustment
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table. Function (Purpose) Adjust the reproduction capability of black
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy balance adjustment is text
performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. Section
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer balance adjustment Operation/Procedure
pattern is printed. 1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer balance adjustment 3) Press [OK] key. The adjustment value is set.
(automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment result
pattern is printed. Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered. range value
A SEGMEN Area 0: Other than 0-1 0
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
T PARAM separation image send
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust- setting select mode black
ment is completed. text emphasis
1: Image
send mode
black text
The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment emphasis
procedure for both copy and print mode have completed success- B BG: JPEG JPEG The JPEG 0-2 1
fully. For example, when the copy balance adjustment (automatic QUALITY recompression compression
adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the LV [COL: level ratio of the
adjustment result is not effective. COMPACT adjustment background
] layer is
C BG: JPEG JPEG selected. 0-2 1
46-90
QUALITY recompression 0: Low
Purpose Adjustment LV [COL: level 1: Middle
Function (Purpose) Set the process operation of high-compres- ULTRA adjustment 2: High
sion PDF images. FINE]
D BG: JPEG JPEG 0-2 1
Section QUALITY recompression
Operation/Procedure LV [GRY: level
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [TEXT], [COLOR] and COMPACT adjustment
]
[BG LAYER] keys.
E BG: JPEG JPEG 0-2 1
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key. QUALITY recompression
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. LV [GRY: level
4) Press [OK] key. ULTRA adjustment
FINE]
The set value is saved.
F FG: Front ground 0: type0 0-2 0
TARGET extraction area 1: type1
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content AREA select 2: type2
range value
A TEXT GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0 G FG: TEXT Front ground The black 0 - 10 5
SENSITIVITY selection DENSITY black text text density in
[COL] density the front
B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
adjustment ground layer
FINDLINES selection
H FG: TEXT Front ground is changed. 0 - 10 5
C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
DENSITY black text 0: Dark - 5:
FINDLINES SW SW (H)
[GRY] density Default - 10:
D VERT Line detection 0-2 0 Light
adjustment
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
I ULTRA High 0: High 0-1 0
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
FINE compression/ compression
INDEXING SEL number
MODE Ultra Fine mode
adjustment SW
mode select 1: Ultra fine
F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2 mode
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
A COLOR LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2 NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
ADJUSTMENT adjustment cially required. When the adjustment value is changed
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1 greatly from the initial value an image quality trouble may
INTENT selection occur.
C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
D R-RATIO Gray scale 0- 299
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R) 1000 48
E G-RATIO Gray scale 0- 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) 1000
48-1
A BG BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
LAYER INTENT 1 setting Purpose Adjustment
B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1 Function (Purpose) Adjust the scan image magnification ratio
INTENT 2 priority setting (in the main scanning direction and the sub
scanning direction).
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
panel. fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment. When there is an error in the image magnification
ratio in reduction, change the adjustment value in the high speed
3) Press [OK] key. mode. When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in
The set value is saved. enlargement, change the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ratio is increased. Setting Default
range value
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C or E corre-
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
B MR(MID) Scanner motor 1 - 99 50
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds (Reference speed)
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio. C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
[DSPF] D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
Setting Default E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
range value (Reference speed)
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio Scan speed
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 Reference speed
Unit
magnification ratio HI MID LO
adjustment (CCD) OC 372mm/s 186mm/s 93mm/s
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50 DSPF 372mm/s 186mm/s –
48-6
surface magnification ratio Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio Section
adjustment (Main scan) Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
[RSPF]
panel.
Setting Default 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key.
magnification ratio adjustment The set value is saved.
(CCD) When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
magnification ratio adjustment to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
(CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
magnification ratio adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
(Main scan)
A RRM Resist motor correction value 1 - 99 50
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
B DVM_K Developing K motor correction 1 - 99 50
value
(Sub scan)
C FSM Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 50
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
D PFM Paper transport motor correction 1 - 99 50
value
(Main scan)
E POM Paper exit motor correction value 1 - 99 50
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment F FUSER Fusing speed select timing 1 - 99 50
(Sub scan) SETTING
G RRM RRM speed increasing start 0 - 255 50
START timing
48-5 H RRM END RRM speed increasing end timing 0 - 255 50
Purpose Adjustment
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
Function (Purpose) Correction the scan image magnification cially required. When the adjustment value is set to a value
ratio (in the sub scanning direction). greatly different from the default value, a jam, paper wrin-
Section Scanner kle, or image quality trouble may occur.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel. 49
3) Press [OK] key. 49-1
The set value is saved. Purpose Version upgrade
Function (Purpose) Perform the firmware update.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
49-5
operation panel section.)
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. Purpose Install
4) Select a target firmware. Function (Purpose) Install and update the watermark data
stored in the HDD.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
6) Press [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
The selected firmware is updated. When the operation is nor- 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
mally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated 2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark
abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. update.
3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
ICUM(MAIN) ICUM Main section
ICUM(BOOT) ICUM boot section
5) Press [YES] key.
ICUM(BIOS) ICUM BIOS The selected watermark is updated.
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main 49-10
ICU (SUB) ICU sub section Purpose Install
LANGUAGE Language support data program (General term)
Function (Purpose) Perform the ACU firmware update.
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section Section
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section Operation/Procedure
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section
2) Press [YES] key.
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section 50
SADDLE (BOOT) Saddle finisher boot section
SADDLE (MAIN) Saddle finisher main section 50-1
1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section
Purpose Adjustment
1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section
4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section ment
1KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher Section
1KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher Operation/Procedure
4KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
4KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
panel.
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section default.
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
ACREM (MAIN) ACRE Main section
ACRE_DATA ACRE table 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default
49-3 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Install A Lead edge RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
adjust- edge reference
Function (Purpose) Install and update the Operation Manual
ment value position (OC)
data stored in the HDD.
B RRCB-CS1 Resist Standar 1 - 99 44
Section motor d Tray
Operation/Procedure C RRCB-DSK ON Desk 1 - 99 44
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 44
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. adjust- Manual
E RRCB-MFT 1 - 99 44
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- ment paper
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is feed
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 44
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- G Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) The cur- area loss area setting
rent version and the update version are displayed. H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes adjust- area adjustment
active from gray out. J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is area adjustment
updated. When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- REAR void area
played. adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/ Content Setting Default
range value NOTE
Display range value
L Off-center OFFSET OC document off- 1 - 99 50
A DEN- Used to adjust 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value
adjust- _OC center adjustment
C the print lead too align the print
ment
edge image lead edge for the
M Magnifi- SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50 position. printer. When the
cation ratio _SPEED scanning adjustment value of
correction _OC magnification ratio this item is
adjustment (CCD) decreased by 1, the
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 printer print start
scanning correction value position in the paper
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 transport direction is
print area value shifted to the lead
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 edge by 0.1mm.
value value B DEN- Rear edge void 1 - 99 30 Void amount
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 B area generated at the
value adjustment paper rear edge.
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 When the
value adjustment value of
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50 item B (DEN-B) is
value decreased by 1, the
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50 print area
value adjustment value in
the sub scanning
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
direction for the
correction value
paper transport
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying direction is
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) decreased by
0.1mm.
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
C FRO FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the
the value is increased, the timing is delayed. void area void amount
NT/
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image posi- REA adjustment generated on the left
tion on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) R and right edges of
paper. When the
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
adjustment value is
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
increased, the void
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ amount is increased.
step) D DENB Manual feed 1 - 99 50
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. -MFT rear edge void
area
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
adjustment
* When the value is increased, the image loss is correction
increased. (0.1mm/step) value
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ E DENB Tray 1 rear 1 - 99 50
step) -CS1 edge void area
adjustment
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. correction
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ value
step) F DENB Tray 2 rear 1 - 99 50
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. -CS2 edge void area
adjustment
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of correction
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) value
G DENB Tray 3 rear 1 - 99 50
50-5 -CS3 edge void area
adjustment
Purpose Adjustment
correction
Function (Purpose) Adjust the print lead edge image position value
(PRINTER MODE) H DENB Tray 4 rear 1 - 99 50
Section -CS4 edge void area
adjustment
Operation/Procedure correction
1) Select a target adjustment with scroll key on the touch panel. value
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. I DENB LCC rear edge 1 - 99 50
-LCC void aria
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is correction
printed. value
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment J DENB ADU rear edge 1 - 99 50
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is -ADU void aria
adjustment
in the standard adjustment value range.
correction
Standard reference value: 3.0 2.0mm value
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the K DENB Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the -HV rear edge void
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased. When area correction
value
the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about
0.1mm.
Item/ Content Setting Default 50-7
NOTE
Display range value
L MULT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Purpose Adjustment
I Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy image position and the
COU image loss (DSPF mode) (simple adjust-
NT ment).
M PAPE Tray Manual 1 2
R paper Section
feed Operation/Procedure
Tray 1 2 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Tray 2 3 panel.
Tray 3 4 2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
Tray 4 5 3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
LCC 6 DSPF duplex mode.
N DUPL Dupl Yes 0 1 4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
EX ex No 1 surement value of distance a (DSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of
0.1mm.
50-6 (Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)
Purpose Adjustment L4: Distance a (DSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
Function (Purpose) Adjust the copy image position and the L5: Distance a (DSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
image loss (DSPF mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
[DSPF-installed model]
Setting Default
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50
scan position Distance "a"
adjustment
C Image LEAD_EDG Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss E (SIDE1) edge image loss
D t FRONT_R Front surface side 0 - 99 20 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
setting EAR image loss amount
SIDE1 (SIDE1) setting Setting Default
E TRAIL_ED Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40 range value
GE (SIDE1) image loss amount A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
setting 0.1mm unit) from the front
F Image LEAD_EDG Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40 surface image lead edge
loss E (SIDE2) image loss amount to the scale of 10mm.
amoun setting B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
G t FRONT_R Back surface side 0 - 99 20 0.1mm unit) from the back
setting EAR image loss amount surface image lead edge
SIDE2 (SIDE2) setting to the scale of 10mm.
H TRAIL_ED Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20 C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
GE (SIDE2) image loss amount (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
setting D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 (SIDE1) loss amount setting
document off-center E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
adjustment (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50 F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 30
document off-center (SIDE2) image loss amount setting
adjustment G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50 (SIDE2) loss amount setting
surface magnification H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
ratio adjustment (Sub (SIDE2) image loss amount setting
scan)
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing is increased.
is delayed. All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.
is increased.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Adjust the image off-center position. (The center adjustment
adjustment is made separately for each B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
paper feed section.) center adjustment
Section C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
Operation/Procedure
panel. 50-27
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Adjustment

3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Perform the image loss adjustment of
scanned images in the FAX or image send
Setting Default mode.
range value
Section
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification 60 - 140 116
ratio BK Operation/Procedure
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 52 1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
value key.
(Manual paper feed) 2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60 panel.
value (Tray 1)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
value (Tray 2) 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60
value (Tray 3) But Item/Display Setting Default
Content
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60 ton range value
value (Tray 4) FA A LEAD OC lead edge image loss 0 - 100 30
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 60 X EDGE (OC) amount setting (3mm)
value B FRONT OC side image loss 0 - 100 20
(Large capacity tray) REAR (OC) amount setting (2mm)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 42 C TRAIL OC rear edge image loss 0 - 100 20
value (Duplex) EDGE (OC) amount setting (2mm)
(NOTE) If the adjustment items D LEAD Front surface lead edge 0 - 100 20
A - G are not properly adjusted, EDGE (SPF image loss amount setting (2mm)
this adjustment cannot be SIDE1)
executed properly. E FRONT Front surface side image 0 - 100 20
I SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual 1 - 99 44 REAR (SPF loss amount setting (2mm)
timing paper feed SIDE1)
J SUB-CS1 adjustment Standard 1 - 99 44 F TRAIL Front surface rear 0 - 100 30
cassette EDGE (SPF edge image loss (3mm)
K SUB-DESK Desk 1 - 99 44 SIDE1) amount setting
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 44 G LEAD Back surface lead edge 0 - 100 30
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 44 EDGE (SPF image loss amount setting (3mm)
N MULTI Number of print 1 - 999 1 SIDE2)
COUNT H FRONT Back surface side image 0 - 100 20
O PAPER Tray selection Manual 1 - 99 2 REAR (SPF loss amount setting (2mm)
paper feed SIDE2)
Tray 1 1 - 99 I TRAIL Back surface rear edge 0 - 100 20
Tray 2 1 - 99 EDGE (SPF image loss amount setting (2mm)
Tray 3 1 - 99 SIDE2)
Tray 4 1 - 99
LCC 1 - 99
P DUPLEX Duplex print Yes 1 - 99 1
selection No 1 - 99
50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Perform the scan image off-center position
adjustment. (The adjustment is made sepa-
rately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. 1step = 0.1mm
But Item/Display Setting Default 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
Content
ton range value 4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
SC A LEAD OC lead edge image loss 0 - 100 0 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
AN EDGE (OC) amount setting (0mm)
NE 6) Press [OK] key.
B FRONT OC side image loss 1 - 99 0
R REAR(OC) amount setting (3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image
(0mm)
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
C TRAIL OC rear edge image loss 1 - 99 0
EDGE(OC) amount setting (0mm) 1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
D LEAD Front surface lead edge 1 - 99 0 2) Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1 (Front surface) or SIDE 2
EDGE (SPF image loss amount setting (0mm) (Back surface) or ALL (Both modes).
SIDE1) 3) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
E FRONT Front surface side image 1 - 999 0 print.
REAR (SPF loss amount setting (0mm) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
SIDE1)
F TRAIL Front surface rear edge 1 - 99 0 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
EDGE(SPF image loss amount setting (0mm) 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
SIDE1)
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform procedures
G LEAD Back surface lead edge 1 - 99 0 5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back surface.
EDGE (SPF image loss amount setting (0mm)
SIDE2) 7) Press [OK] key.
H FRONT Back surface side image 1 - 99 0 (4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center
REAR (SPF loss amount setting (0mm) (Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
SIDE2)
1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
I TRAIL Back surface rear edge 1 - 99 0
EDGE(SPF image loss amount setting 2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust-
(0mm)
SIDE2) ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
50-28 (Two or more trays can be selected.)
Purpose Adjustment 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
Function (Purpose) Automatically adjust the image loss, void 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
area, image off-center, and image magnifi- 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
cation ratio. When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the proce-
Section dure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment pat-
tern printed with each paper.
Operation/Procedure
7) Press [OK] key.
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28. RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
* Print image magnification ratio adjustment REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.
* Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* Scan image off-center adjustment 51
* Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* Copy image position, image loss adjustment 51-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transport
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
voltage.
mode) Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio Operation/Procedure
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
panel.
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
RESULT Adjustment result display When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
DATA Adjustment operation data display ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image increased, the timing is delayed. When the adjustment value is
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 10ms. The setting
range is -490 - +490ms.
1) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern Default
print. value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. A TC ON TIMING Transfer voltage ON timing setting 45
B TC OFF TIMING Transfer voltage OFF timing 50
4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
setting
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
6) Press [OK] key.
(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
print.
51-2 But Item/Display Setting Default
Content
ton range value
Purpose Adjustment EN A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 - 99 66
Function (Purpose) Adjust the contact pressure (deflection GI deflection adjustment
amount) on paper by the main unit and the NE value small size
DSPF resist roller. B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 - 99 66
deflection adjustment
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport value large size
Operation/Procedure C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 - 99 40
1) (When DSPF model) HEAVY A deflection adjustment
PAPER(S) value Small size
Select a target adjustment mode with [REGI1] or [REGI2] or
D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 - 99 40
[ENGINE] keys. HEAVY A deflection adjustment
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll key. PAPER(L) value Large size
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. E TRAY2(S) Desk cassette deflection 1 - 99 66
adjustment value Small
size
F TRAY2(L) Desk cassette deflection 1 - 99 66
But Item/Display Setting Default
Content adjustment value Large
ton range value
size
RE A NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50
G TRAY2 Desk cassette deflection 1 - 99 40
GI1 PLAIN HIGH adjustment value 1
HEAVY A adjustment value Small
B NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50
PAPER(S) size
PLAIN LOW adjustment value 1
H TRAY2 Desk cassette deflection 1 - 99 40
C NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50
HEAVY A adjustment value Large
THIN HIGH adjustment value 1
PAPER(L) size
D NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 I MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 66
THIN LOW adjustment value 1
PLAIN deflection adjustment
E RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 PAPER(S) value Small size
PLAIN HIGH adjustment value 1
J MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 66
F RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 PLAIN deflection adjustment
PLAIN LOW adjustment value 1 PAPER(L) value Large size
G RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 K MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 40
THIN HIGH adjustment value 1 HEAVY A deflection adjustment
H RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 PAPER(S) value Small size
THIN LOW adjustment value 1 L MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 40
RE A NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 HEAVY A deflection adjustment
GI2 PLAIN HIGH adjustment value 2 PAPER(L) value Large size
B NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 M MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 40
PLAIN LOW adjustment value 2 HEAVY B deflection adjustment
C NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 PAPER(S) value Small size
THIN HIGH adjustment value 2 N MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 30
D NORMAL DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 HEAVY B deflection adjustment
THIN LOW adjustment value 2 PAPER(L) value Large size
E RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 O MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 40
PLAIN HIGH adjustment value 2 OHP deflection adjustment
F RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 value OHP
PLAIN LOW adjustment value 2 P MANUAL Manual feed tray 1 - 99 40
G RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 ENV deflection adjustment
THIN HIGH adjustment value 2 value Envelope
H RANDOM DSPF deflection amount 1 - 99 50 Q ADU PLAIN ADU deflection 1 - 99 66
THIN LOW adjustment value 2 PAPER(S) adjustment value Small
size
R ADU PLAIN ADU deflection 1 - 99 66
PAPER(L) adjustment value Large
size
S ADU HEAVY ADU deflection 1 - 99 40
A PAPER(S) adjustment value Small
size
T ADU HEAVY ADU deflection 1 - 99 40
A PAPER(L) adjustment value Large
size
U DESK(S) DESK deflection 1 - 99 66
adjustment value Small
size
V DESK(L) DESK deflection 1 - 99 66
adjustment value Large
size
W DESK DESK deflection 1 - 99 40
HEAVY A adjustment value Small
PAPER(S) size
X DESK DESK deflection 1 - 99 40
HEAVY A adjustment value Large
PAPER(L) size
Y A4LCC A4LCC/deflection 1 - 99 66
adjustment value
<Small size, Large size>
53-8
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter
than the LT size (216mm). Purpose Adjustment
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer Function (Purpose) Adjust the document lead edge reference
than the LT size (216mm). and the DSPF mode document scan posi-
tion.
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp Section Automatic document feeder
amount is decreased. Operation/Procedure
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
changed by 0.1mm.) <AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>
(Auto adjustment)
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
53 table.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
53-6 adjustment value is saved.)
Purpose Adjustment Setting Default
Function (Purpose) Adjust the detection level of the DSPF doc- range value
ument width. MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
Section
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure reference position
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
NOTE: The AUTO mode must not be used.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
<MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment>
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. Setting Default
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. range value
The A5R width detection level is recognized. A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 10
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. stop position adjustment)
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop position
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is shifted
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
by 0.1mm.
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value 53-9

2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value Purpose Adjustment
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Function (Purpose) Set dirt detection for DSPF scanning posi-
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
tion.
53-7
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment
1) Select an items to be set with scroll key.
Function (Purpose) Adjust the DSPF document size width sen-
sor.
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content Setting Default
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch range value
panel. A SIDEA_SC SPF front surface OFF 0 1
AN_POSITI optimum scan ON 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ON_SET_S position detection
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) TART setting
B SIDEA_SC SPF front surface OFF 0 1
Setting Default AN_POSITI optimum scan ON 1
Item/Display
range value ON_SET_J position detection
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66 OB setting
B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 438 C SIDEA_SC SPF front surface WEAK 0 1
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 699 AN_POSITI optimum scan MIDDLE 1
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893 ON_LV position detection STRONG 2
level setting
D OC_DIRT_L OC dirt level setting WEAK 0 1
V MIDDLE 1
STRONG 2
E SIDEA_DIR SPF front surface dirt WEAK 0 1
T_ALARM_ alarm level setting MIDDLE 1
LV STRONG 2
Setting Default
range value
F SIDEB_DIR SPF back surface WEAK 0 1 A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1
T_ALARM_ dirt alarm level MIDDLE 1
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit
LV setting STRONG 2
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank:
G SIDEA_DIR SPF front surface OFF 0 1 20H]
T_SHADIN streak delete ON 1 D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
G_SET shading setting
[Alphabet:
H SIDEB_DIR SPF back surface OFF 0 1 41H("A) -
T_SHADIN streak delete ON 1 5AH("Z")]
G_SET shading setting
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit 48 - 57
I SCAN_POS SPF front surface MVIEW 0 1 [Numeral:
ITION_PRI MVIEW/SCU priority SCU 1 30H("0") -
ORITY_SE setting 39H("9")]
T
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right
J DIRT_ALAR SPF MVIEW/SCU MVIEW 0 0 edge)
M_PRIORIT priority SCU 1 G TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1
Y_SET
1 com- type
PATTERN posing OR 1
53-10 2 method process
Purpose Adjustment type
PATTERN No- 2
Function (Purpose) SPF dirt detection execution. 3 delete-
Section Automatic document feeder compo-
Operation/Procedure sition type
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Input value
Item Content Print Blank A B C E F G

SPF SIDEA RSPF front surface dirt detection position Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71
(main scan position 1 to 8)
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt Print H I J K L M N
Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
1 to 8)
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt Print O P Q R T U V
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
55 Print
Input value
W
87
X
88
Y
89
Z
90
0
48
1
49
2
50
55-1 Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Purpose Setting Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the engine control

operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
56
Operation/Procedure
56-1
55-2 Purpose Data transfer
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Transport data between HDD - EEPROM.
Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the scanner control (Used to repair the PWB.)
operation. (SOFT SW) Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
55-3 Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
Purpose Setting When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Function (Purpose) Set the specifications of the controller oper- displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
ation. (SOFT SW)
EEPROM  HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
Section HDD  EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine.
If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
55-10
machine issue may arise.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Set the special stamp text 56-2
Section Purpose Data backup
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Backup the data in the EEPROM. SD card,
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. and HDD (including user authentication
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key. data and address data) to the USB memory
3) Press [OK] key. Section
Operation/Procedure <EXPORT>
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. From EEPROM, SD card, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
<IMPORT> Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD, HDD When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
<EXPORT> displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
From EEPROM, SD, HDD To USB MEMORY
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 56-4
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed Purpose Data backup
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Function (Purpose) Backup the JOB log data to the USB mem-
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. ory.
(Machine with the DSK installed) Section HDD
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Operation/Procedure
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
<IMPORT> 2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD, HDD 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
<EXPORT> Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
From EEPROM, SD, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
3) Enter the password with 10-key. displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
4) Press [SET] key.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 56-5
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Function (Purpose) Import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. in the TEXT format
<Data list outside the backup targets> Section
(EEPROM/SD card) Operation/Procedure
PWB Type Content NOTE 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Controller Machine serial No. 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Product key information 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Various counter Copy counter/FAX Procedure 2) The selected data is imported.
send counter etc.
Trouble history
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
PCU Machine serial No.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Various counter Maintenance counter
Machine adjustment execute 56-6
history Purpose Operation data check
Trouble history
Function (Purpose) Import the SIM23-2 data to a USB memory
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
in the TEXT format.
Trouble history
Section HDD
(HDD) Operation/Procedure
Classification Content NOTE 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Job end list Job end list display data 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
(The image send series 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
include the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB is
56-7
enable.
Operation E-manual Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
manual Function (Purpose) Import the syslog data to a USB memory.
Document filing Document filing data
Section HDD
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. Operation/Procedure
If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
trouble may be generated.
2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
56-3
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Backup the document filing data to the USB 60
memory
Section HDD
60-1
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Check the operations (read/write) of the
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
MFP PWB memory.
<IMPORT>
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD card, HDD
Operation/Procedure
Default value
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Item/Display Content
Setting
(cpm)
range
Start the test. 36 46 56
CO A LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 123 140
Result display Description PY POWER setting/middle
OK Success 600 MIDDLE speed
NG Fail (BW)
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) B LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 102 102
INVALID Execution disable POWER setting/low
LOW (BW) speed
C LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 123 140
SLOT Description
POWER setting/middle
ICUM SLOT1 ICUM (standard) ON BOARD MIDDLE speed save
ICUM SLOT2 ICUM (expansion) DIMM SAVE (BW) mode
ICU1 SLOT1 ICU1 (standard) ON BOARD D LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 102 102
ACRE SLOT ACRE ACRE– POWER setting/low
LOW SAVE speed save
(BW) mode
61 E LASER
DUTY
Laser duty
select middle
0 - 255 0 0 0
MIDDLE speed
61-1 (BW)
F LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
DUTY LOW select low
Function (Purpose) Check the LSU polygon motor rotation and (BW) speed
laser detection. G LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
Section LSU DUTY select middle
MIDDLE speed save
Operation/Procedure SAVE (BW) mode
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. H LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed. DUTY LOW select low
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed. SAVE (BW) speed save
mode
Display Content I LASER Laser power 0 - 255 100 100 100
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality POWER K1 setting K1
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K) J LASER Laser power 0 - 255 100 100 100
POWER K2 setting K2
K LASER Laser power 0 - 255 100 100 100
61-3 POWER K3 setting K3
Purpose Setting L LASER Laser power 0 - 255 100 100 100
POWER K4 setting K4
Function (Purpose) Set the laser power
CO A LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 123 140
Section LSU PY POWER setting/middle
Operation/Procedure 12 MIDDLE speed
00 (BW)
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY600],
B LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 102 102
[COPY1200], [PR600/FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel.
POWER setting/low
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch LOW (BW) speed
panel. C LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 123 140
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. POWER setting/middle
MIDDLE speed save
SAVE (BW) mode
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are D LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 102 102
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of POWER setting/low
line images are increased. LOW SAVE speed save
(BW) mode
E LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
DUTY select middle
MIDDLE speed
(BW)
F LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
DUTY LOW select low
(BW) speed
G LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
DUTY select middle
MIDDLE speed save
SAVE (BW) mode
H LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0
DUTY LOW select low
SAVE (BW) speed save
mode
Default value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content (cpm) Item/Display Content
range value
36 46 56
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1
PR A LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 123 140
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2
600/ POWER setting/middle
CS1 selection 2 Paper feed tray 1 (Paper
FAX MIDDLE speed
CS2 3 Paper feed tray 2 feed tray
(BW)
CS3 4 Paper feed tray 3 1)
POWER setting/low CS4 5 Paper feed tray 4
LOW (BW) speed LCC 6 LCC
POWER setting/middle 61-11
MIDDLE speed save
SAVE (BW) mode Purpose Adjustmet
D LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 102 102 Function (Purpose) Correct the laser power automatically
POWER setting/low
Section LSU
LOW SAVE speed save
(BW) mode Operation/Procedure
E LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 40 40 40 1) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
DUTY select middle 2) Select a density to be corrected.
MIDDLE speed
(BW) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
F LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 40 40 40 4) Place the printed sample for scanning on the OC in the
DUTY LOW select low A4R(LTR) direction.
(BW) speed
G LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 40 40 40
DUTY select middle
MIDDLE speed save
SAVE (BW) mode
DUTY LOW select low
SAVE (BW) speed save
mode
PR1 A LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 123 140
200 POWER setting/middle
MIDDLE speed
(BW)
POWER setting/low
LOW (BW) speed 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
POWER setting/low
61-12
LOW SAVE speed save
(BW) mode Purpose Adjustment
D LASER Laser power 0 - 255 102 102 102 Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction
POWER setting/low
LOW SAVE speed save Section LSU
(BW) mode Operation/Procedure
E LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0 Press an item button to be adjusted.
DUTY select middle
When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:
MIDDLE speed
(BW) 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
F LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DUTY LOW select low
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
(BW) speed
G LASER Laser duty 0 - 255 0 0 0 4) Enter the adjustment value by the density meter.
DUTY select middle 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MIDDLE speed save Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
SAVE (BW) mode
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
played.
DUTY LOW select low
SAVE (BW) speed save When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
mode 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
61-4 3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
Purpose Adjustment 4) Press [4POINT CORRECTION] or [31POINT CORRECTION].
Function (Purpose) Print the print image skew adjustment pat- 5) Enter an adjustment value.
tern 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section LSU Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
Operation/Procedure adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel. played.
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key.
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
61-13
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
Purpose Adjustment tion.
Function (Purpose) Clear the laser power correction value
Section LSU 62-7
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Print the hard disk self diagnostics error
2) Press [YES] key. log.
Section HDD
Reference value reset item
Operation/Procedure
Laser power automatic correction amount 32 data (point)
Laser power manual correction amount 32 data (point)
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
62
62-8
62-1
Function (Purpose) Format the hard disk/SD card.
(HDD:Excluding the system area and the
Function (Purpose) Format the hard disk/SD card (HDD:except operation manual area/SD card:user area)
operation manual area/SD card:user data).
Section HDD
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-10
62-2
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Clear the job completion list data.
Function (Purpose) Check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
Section HDD
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-11
62-3
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Delete the document filing data
Function (Purpose) Check read/write of the hard disk (all
Section HDD
areas).
Operation/Procedure
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-12
Purpose Setting
62-6
Function (Purpose) Set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard
disk trouble.
Function (Purpose) Perform the self diagnostics of the hard
Section HDD
disk.
Operation/Procedure
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
1) Select the self diag area.
The set value is saved.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
The self diag operation is performed.
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
NOTE: data storage area is cleared.
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this
simulation to cheek the HDD. A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)
SHORT S.T Partial area diag
EXTENDED S.T All area diag
62-13
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Purpose Data clear/Reset
normal display.
Function (Purpose) Format the hard disk. (only operation man-
Normal completion "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed. ual and watermark data)
Abnormal end "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure OC ANALOG GAIN Analog gain adjustment value (odd
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ODD number)
2) Press [YES] key. ANALOG GAIN Analog gain adjustment value (even
EVEN number)
The operation manual data are deleted.
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain adjustment value (odd
ODD number)
62-14 DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain adjustment value (even
Purpose Data clear EVEN number)
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling average value
Function (Purpose) Delete the document filing management
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling average value
data
TARGET VALUE Target value
Section HDD BLACK LEVEL Black output level
Operation/Procedure ERROR CODE 0: No error
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1: Loop number over
2: The target value is under the specified
2) Press [YES] key.
value
The document filing management data are cleared. 3: The gain set value is negative
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. 4: END is not asserted (gain adjustment)
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases. 5: Retry max
* The document filing function does not work normally. 6: Underflow
7: Black shading error
* The job log is not recorded normally.
8: Other error
9: END is not asserted (white shading)
10: END is not asserted (black shad-
ing)
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. 11: END is not asserted (light quantity
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- correction)
sion. 12: END is not asserted (scan)
13: Register check error (white booting/
gain)
62-20
14: Register check error (before light
Purpose Data clear/Reset quantity correction)
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the mirroring hard DSPF FACE First scan DSPF front surface white
disc WHITE LEVEL reference level
1ST
Section HDD DSPF FACE DSPF front surface white reference level
Operation/Procedure WHITE LEVEL of the second or later scanning
Enter the simulation mode, and the operation status of the HDD is 2ND
displayed. DSPF ANALOG GAIN Max. density judgment value
ODD
The status display is renewed in every second. ANALOG GAIN Max. density position
EVEN
Display Content description
DIGITAL GAIN LED DA adjustment value
OK Normal operation ODD
NONE Not connected
DIGITAL GAIN LED DA adjustment save value
REBUILDING Data rebuilding EVEN
ERROR Error occurrence SMP AVE ODD Gain adjustment save value
TROUBLE Trouble SMP AVE EVEN Target save value
TARGET VALUE White plate scan ratio
BLACK LEVEL Black offset set value (1-12 area)
63 ERROR CODE 0: No error
1: Loop number over
2: The target value is under specified
63-1
value
Purpose Information display 3: The gain set value is negative
Function (Purpose) Display the shading correction result. 4: END is not asserted (gain adjustment)
5: Retry max
Section Scanner
6: Underflow
Operation/Procedure 7: Black shading error
1) Select a mode. 8: Other error
2) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] key on the touch 9: END is not asserted (white shading)
panel 10:END is not asserted (black shading)
11:END is not asserted (light quantity
Button Item/Display Content correction)
12:END is not asserted (scan)
13:Register check error (white booting/
gain)
14:Register check error (before light
quantity correction)
DSPF BACK First scan DSPF back surface white
WHITE LEVEL1ST reference level
DSPF BACK DSPF back surface white reference level
WHITE LEVEL2ND of the second or later scanning
63-2 63-11
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Perform shading. Function (Purpose) Set standard target of engine halftone auto
Section Scanner adjustment.
Operation/Procedure Section Scanner
DSPF-installed model Operation/Procedure
1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and 1) Select the target gray balance with the touch panel
press [EXECUTE] key. Default.DEF1
63-3
Purpose Adjustment 64
Function (Purpose) Perform scanner (CCD) color balance and
gamma auto adjustment. 64-2
Section Scanner Purpose Self print
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Test print (Self print).
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) Section Scanner
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
Operation/Procedure
ument table and place the SIT chart backside up on the DSPF
tray. 1) Set the print conditions.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Set the print conditions with 10-key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
formed. The test print (self print) is performed.
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data range value
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key. A PRINT Print pattern specification 1, 2, 9 - 1
PATTERN (* For details, refer to the 11, 15 -
(1,2,9 - 11,17 - description below.) 19, 21,
63-4 19, 21, 22, 29, 22, 29,
33 - 35) 33 - 35
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number Pattern 1
Function (Purpose) Display the SIT chart patch density. (DOT1>=2 IF (M parameter) (Self print 2,11: 2-
Section Scanner A:2,11) pattern: m by n) 255
except
Operation/Procedure above:
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to 1-255
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- C DOT2 Setting of blank dot number Pattern2, 254
ment table and place the SIT chart backside up on the DSPF (DOT2>=2 IF (N parameter) (Self print 11: 2-255
tray. A:2,11) pattern: m by n) except
above:
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. 0-255
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. D DENSITY Used to specify the print Pattern 255
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned. (FIXED "255" gradation. 9: 255
IF A: 9) Fixed
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
except
the normal display.
above:1-
4) Select a data display mode. 255
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data F EXPOSURE Exposure THROUGH 1 8
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the (2 - 9 IF A: 15 - mode CHAR/PIC 2
SIT chart scan data 19, 33 - 35) specificati CHAR/PRPIC 3
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of on CHAR 4
the SIT chart scan data
PRINT PIC 5
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys PRINT 6
PAPER
MAP 7
63-5
STANDARD 8
Purpose Adjustment/Setup DITHER
Function (Purpose) Perform the scanner (CCD) color balance AUTO 9
and gamma default setting. G PAPER Tray Manual paper 1 2
selection feed
Section Scanner
Tray 1 2
Operation/Procedure Tray 2 3
1) Select [SIDE A(OC)] key or [SIDE B(DSPF)] key. Tray 3 4
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key Tray 4 5
LCC 6
The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
H DUPLEX Duplex YES 0 1
default.
print NO 1
Item/Display Content Setting Default Operation/Procedure
range value 1) Set the print conditions.
I PAPER TYPE Paper type Standard 1 1 Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
paper
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Heavy paper 2
OHP 3 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Envelope 4 3) The test print (self print) is performed.
Heavy paper2 5
Glossy paper 6 Item/Display Content Setting Default
Heavy paper3 7 range value
A PRINT Print pattern specification (* 1-3 3
<Print pattern of Item A> PATTERN For details, refer to the
description below.)
Pattern
Pattern B DENSITY specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
Content generating
No. C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC D PAPER Paper feed Manual paper 1 2
tray feed
2 Dot print
selection Tray 1 2
9 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10 Belt print Tray 2 3
11 Dot print (sub scan) Tray 3 4
17 Halftone pattern (all over the page) Controller Tray 4 5
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) (Memory) LCC 6
19 256 gradations pattern (straight) 600dpi E HALFTONE Halftone Low line 0 0
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC number
22 Slant line High line 1
29 Dot print 1200dpi number
33 Halftone pattern 1200dpi (all over the page) Controller F QUALITY Image Standard 0 1
34 256 gradation pattern 1200dpi (Memory) quality High quality 1
35 256 gradation pattern (straight) 1200dpi setting Fine 2
G DITHER Dither Straight 0 1
correction Calibration 1
64-4
H PAPER TYPE Paper type Standard 0 0
Purpose Self print
paper
Function (Purpose) Printer test print (Self print). Heavy paper 1
Section Scanner Heavy paper2 2
Heavy paper3 3
Glossy paper 4
<Print pattern of Item A>

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern
2 Half tone pattern
3 Dot, background
64-5 Item/Display Content Setting Default

range value
Purpose Self print F QUALITY Image Standard 0 1
Function (Purpose) Printer test print (Self print). quality (600dpi, 1bit)
setting High quality 1
Section Scanner
(600dpi, 4bit)
Operation/Procedure Fine (1200dpi, 2
1) Set the print conditions. 1bit)
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys. G DITHER Dither straight 0 1
correction calibration 1
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
H PAPER TYPE Paper type Standard 0-1 0
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. paper
The test print (self print) is performed. Heavy paper 1
Heavy paper2 2
Heavy paper3 3
range value
Glossy paper 4
A PRINT Print pattern specification 1 1
I TONER SAVE Toner not set 0 0
PATTERN
MODE save mode set 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER Paper feed Manual paper 1 2 64-6
tray feed Purpose Self print
selection Tray 1 2
Function (Purpose) Printer test print (Self print) (PS).
Tray 2 3
Section Scanner
Tray 3 4
Tray 4 5 Operation/Procedure
LCC 6 1) Set the print conditions.
E HALFTONE Halftone Image 0 0 Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Text 1 Set the print conditions with 10-key.
65-2
The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display Content Set- Default Function (Purpose) Display the touch panel (LCD display sec-
ting value tion) detection coordinates.
range Section Operation unit
A PRINT Print pattern specification 1 1 (Operation/Display control PWB)
PATTERN
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
Operation/Procedure
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Touch the touch panel.
D PAPER Paper feed Manual paper 1 2 The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
tray feed the touched position is displayed in real time.
selection Tray 1 2

Tray 2 3
Tray 3 4 ;<

Tray 4 5

LCC 6
E HALFTONE Halftone Image 0 0

Text 1
F QUALITY Image Standard 0 1

quality (600dpi, 1bit)
setting Hight quality 1

(600dpi, 4bit)
Ultra Fine 2
(1200dpi, 1bit)
G DITHER Dither straight 0 1

correction calibration 1
65-5
H PAPER TYPE Paper type Standard 0 0
paper Purpose Operation test/check
Heavy paper 1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
Heavy paper2 2 input.
Heavy paper3 3
Section Operation unit
Glossy paper 4
(Operation/Display control PWB)
I TONER SAVE Toner not set 0 0
MODE save mode set 1 Operation/Procedure
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen.
65 If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
65-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Adjust the touch panel (LCD display sec- 67
tion) detection coordinates.
Section Operation unit 67-17
(Operation/Display control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Printer controller reset
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen. Section
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to Operation/Procedure
the simulation sub number entry menu. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. 2) Press [YES] key.
The set data related to the printer are initialized.
67-24
Function (Purpose) Printer density adjustment (Auto adjust-
ment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
The printer density auto adjustment is performed, and the
adjustment result is printed.
4) Press [OK] key.
67-25 Screen Content
SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit high (graphics)
Purpose Adjustment SCREEN4 1200dpi 1 bit low
Function (Purpose) Printer density adjustment (Manual adjust- SCREEN5 1200dpi 1 bit high
ment)
Section Setting Default
Operation/Procedure range value
A-Q POINT1 - POINT17 Point 1 - Point 17 0 - 255 128
1) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel.
67-34
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Function (Purpose) Set the density correction in the printer high
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) density section (Support for the high den-
sity section tone gap)
increased, and vice versa. Section
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in Operation/Procedure
the density corresponding to the adjustment value. 1) Select a target item with scroll key.
A4 (11" x 8.5") paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4 (11" x 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
8.5") paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
0 Enable
Setting Default 1 Disable
Item/Display
range value
A-Q POINT1 - POINT17 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display
67-26 range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup A K K engine highest 0 1
(0: ENABLE density correction mode
Function (Purpose) Set the standard scanner target of Printer
1: DISABLE) K engine highest 1
engine halftone adjustment (Manual adjust-
density correction mode
ment)
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500
Section TARGET maximum density
Operation/Procedure correction
1) Select the target gray balance with the touch panel.

C RATIO LOW Ratio value for high 0 - 100 50
density correction
Default DEF1.
D RATION HIGH Ration value for high 0 - 100 5
density correction
67-31 E DITHER Dither threshold 0 - 255 250
Purpose Data clear THRESHOLD value
Function (Purpose) Clear the printer calibration value (Half-tone F SLOPE Slope threshold 100 - 400
process control data). THRESHOLD value 500
Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
2) Press [YES] key. Function (Purpose) Adjust the density in the low density section
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are Section
cleared. Operation/Procedure
(The printer density correction is canceled.)
1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
67-33
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
Purpose Adjustment are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
Function (Purpose) Adjust the gamma and the density in each low density are images are weakly reproduced.
printer screen. When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
Section section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
1) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. Item/Display Content
range value
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key. A A PATCH INPUT A patch input value 0 - 13 1
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 67-45
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in Purpose Adjustment/Setup
the density corresponding to the adjustment value. Function (Purpose) Adjust the printer image filter
A4 (11" x 8.5") paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4 (11" x
Section
8.5") paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
Operation/Procedure
Screen Content 1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper mode 2) Enter the set value.
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit screen
3) Press [OK] key.
SCREEN2 600dpi 4 bit low (photo)
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
Setting Default
Item/Display Content and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
range value
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
A SHARPNESS: B/W Monochrome print 0-4 2
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
PRINT
B BOLD B/W PRINT Bold text 0-4 1 To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
67-52 After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
Function (Purpose) Set the default of the gamma of the printer 10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
screen
Section
Operation/Procedure Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default values.
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
600DPI 1BIT SCREEN1 (6000dpi 1bit)
4BIT HIGH SCREEN3 (600dpi 4bit graphic
1200DPI LOW SCREEN4 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
1200DPI SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
HIGH
67-54
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Printer halftone balance adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the halftone balance, the density,
and the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper
mode, the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 11”x8.5” or A3 11" x 17" paper is
automatically selected.)
The halftone balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 11”x8.5” or A3 11" x 17" paper is
automatically selected.)
The halftone balance adjustment is automatically performed,
and the halftone balance check patch image is printed out.
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
MX-M503N
[6]
1. Self diag C. Self diag operation
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- (1) Self diag operation and related work flow
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine The machine always monitors its own state.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, displays the trouble message.
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
machine to minimize the damage. nearly expired or is expired.
A. Function and purpose When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
trouble.) The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD and lamp.
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
stopped on detection of a trouble.) Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
tion.
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
sumable part.) Monitors the machine
conditions.
B. Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Detects/analyzes
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the
the content.
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
Warning
࠙࣬
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.) Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a Trouble
Πρήσ
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
stopped.
Others -
ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-M565N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 6 – 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan-
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan List FAX FAX
block (including To Print
(Push) (Pull) print Send print
interruption) HDD
FAX board trouble MFP F6       x x
(00,01,04,21,30,97,98)
CF card trouble E7 (A6) x x x x x x x x
SD card trouble E7 (07) x x x x x x x x
HDD trouble E7 (03,A5) x x x x x x x x
HDD-ASIC trouble E7 (04) x x x x x x x x
SCU communication trouble E7 (80) x x x x   x 
A0 (02)
PCU communication trouble E7 (90) x x x x x x x x
A0 (01)
ACU communication trouble A0 (04) x x x x x x x x
Printer port system trouble F9 (91, 92) ○ x x ○ x △ ○ ○
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) x x x x x x x x
External communication disable (RIC) U7 (50,51) x x x x x x x x
Memory error (included not installed the U2 (00,11,40,41,42) x x x x x x x x
expansion RAM)
Connection trouble (MFP detection) A0 (15,17,20,60,61） x x x x x x x x
E7 (89)
Serial number discrepancy U2 (30) x x x x x x x x
HDD registration data sum error U2 (50) x x x x x x x x
Memory check error when booting E7 (95, 96) x x x x x x x x
Image memory trouble, decode error E7 (01,49,91,92,93,94) x x x x x x x x
Image memory trouble, decode error E7 (42,46,47,48) x  17 x x x   
(ACRE-related 1)
Personal counter installation trouble PC (00) x x x x x x x x
Power controller trouble L8 (20) x x x x x x x x
Special function error P1 (00,01,02) U2        
(60)
Laser trouble PCU L6 (10) x x x x x x 10 x x
Connection trouble E7 (50,55) x x x x x x x x
(PCU detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10), x x x x x x 10 x x
(motor, fusing, etc.) C4 (20)
F2 (40,64,70,74,91),
H2 (00,01,02),
H3 (00,01,02),
H4 (00,02),
H5 (01),
H7 (10),
L4
(02,03,04,11,31,32,34,
35,40,43,44,50),
L8 (01,02),
U2 (90,91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) 3    3  3/10  3
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3 (22) 3    3  3/10  3
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6 (01) 3    3  3/10  3
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6 (02) 3    3  3/10  3
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 3    3  3/10  3
(09,20,21,22,51)
Paper feed tray other troubles U6 (00,10,50,52)  11     11  10/11   11
Staple trouble F1 (08,10) 4 4 4 4 4  4/10 4 4
Saddle stitch section trouble F1 4 4 4 4 4  4/17 4 4
(41,42,43,44,45,46,47,
51)
After-process trouble PCU F1 4 4 4 4 4  4/10 4 4
(00,03,11,15,19,20,21,
22,23,30,32,33,34,36,
37,38,39,52)
Other troubles EE (EC,EL,EU)        
Process control trouble (PCU detection) F2 (22,39,50,58,78)        
 12

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan-
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan List FAX FAX
block (including To Print
(Push) (Pull) print Send print
interruption) HDD
Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) x x x x x x x x
(SCU detection)
SCU color system troubles (SCU UC (02) 9 9 9 9   9 
detection)
Anti copy system UC (20) x x x x   x 
EEPROM faction U2 (80,81) x x x x   x 
Multi touch panel error U9 (01) x x x x ○ ○ x ○
Scanner section troubles (mirror motor, L1 (00), L3 (00) x x x x   x 
lens, copy lamp)
CCD troubles (shading, etc.) E7 (10,11,14) x x x x   x 
DSPF/DF trouble U5 (00,16,30,31) 6 6 6 6   6 
General troubles in the DSPF back E6 (10, 11, 14) 7 7 7 7   7 
surface scanning section
: Operation enabled, ? : Operation disabled

 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
However it is valid only when the escape tray setting has been made.
 9 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the monochrome mode.
 10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
 11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK and the LCC.
 12: Trouble message is displayed (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
 17 : Job execution enable only in a format other high compression PDF.
(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when on, check is made in each
initializing and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence) sim task
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

(To the corre-
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel sponding block)
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel is initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
Main Sub Trouble code content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection nism
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble PCU 
C4 20 Transfer output trouble PCU 
E6 10 DSPF (CCD) shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 DSPF (CCD) shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP 
02 HDD trouble when the mirroring kit is installed MFP 
03 HDD trouble / Mirroring kit error MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP 
07 SD card error MFP 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error PCU 
21 LSU laser deterioration trouble PCU 
24 LSU LD driver error PCU 
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU 
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU ○
42 Image data error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
46 Image data decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
47 Combination error between MFP PWB and ACRE firmware MFP 
48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error MFP 
49 Water mark data error MFP ○
50 Engine connection trouble PCU 
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU 
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP 
61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP 
80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP 
89 Communication error between MFP PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC MFP ○
controller
90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error MFP 
91 FAX reception image data error MFP 
92 Copy image data error MFP 
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP 
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP 
95 MFP PWB DIMM memory check error (Soc) MFP ○
96 MFP PWB DIMM memory check error (ASIC) MFP ○
A0 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
A5 Installation error of HDD which was used in the mirroring kit MFP 
A6 Compact flash memory trouble MFP 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU ○
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU 
10 Staple operation trouble PCU 
11 Finisher grip operation trouble PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU 
22 Finisher assist motor trouble PCU 
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU 
30 Finisher - saddle unit communication trouble PCU 
31 Saddle paper folding trouble PCU 
32 Finisher - Punch unit communication error PCU 
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU 
34 Punch operation trouble PCU 
36 Punch paper edge detection error PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU 
39 Punch paper dust sensor error PCU 
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU 
42 Saddle guide motor trouble PCU 
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU 

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
F1 44 Saddle staple motor R trouble PCU ○
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU 
46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble PCU 
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU 
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU 
51 Saddle sensor connection trouble PCU 
52 Finisher micro switch trouble PCU 
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble PCU 
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU 
45 Image density sensor trouble PCU 
50 Drum phase sensor trouble PCU 
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU 
78 Registration image density sensor trouble PCU 
91 High density process control high voltage error PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
F6 00 MFP-FAX communication trouble MFP 
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX 
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch FAX 
30 Access error to 1-chip microprocessor on the FAX board (FAX detection) FAX 
97 The FAX PWB does not match with the machine model. FAX 
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX destination information and the FAX 
machine destination information.
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM) PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
04 Drum motor trouble PCU 
11 Shift motor trouble PCU 
31 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM1/2) trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU 
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU 
35 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble PCU 
40 Ozone fan trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM3) trouble PCU 
44 Ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU 
50 Process fan 1 trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Communication error of MFP PWB/Mother board MFP 
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP ○
01 PCI fan error MFP ○
02 Plasma generating device error MFP ○
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 Erroneous detection of account management data /HDD internal MFP 
authentication DB table error
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP 
40 SD card system storage data area error MFP 
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP 
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP 

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
U2 50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP 
60 Watermark check error MFP 
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU 
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU 
16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble SCU 
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU 
31 Document feed unit tray lift down trouble SCU 
U6 00 Communication error of PCU PWB/Desk paper feed unit PCU 
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU 
02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble PCU 
09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU 
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU 
20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error PCU 
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU 
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
52 PCU - Paper feed desk communication trouble PCU 
U7 50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine error MFP 
U9 01 Touch panel trouble SCU 
UC 02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error SCU 
20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error SCU 
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP 
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP 
04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner expansion kit is installed) MFP 
15 DSK BOOT version disagreement MFP 
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFP 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
3. Details of trouble code
C1-10 Main charger trouble E6-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Section PCU Section SCU

Cause The main charger unit is not installed properly. Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. CCD unit trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. DSPF PWB trouble.
MC/DV high voltage PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
PCU PWB trouble unit.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. Check the CCD unit / the DSPF PWB.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB
connector./Replace. E6-11 Shading error (White correction)
Replace the MC/DV high voltage PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Section SCU
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
C4-20 Transfer output trouble Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the reference white plate.
CCD unit trouble.
Section PCU DSPF PWB trouble.
Cause Transfer unit abnormality. Shading adjustment error
Transfer unit insertion trouble. Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD unit.
TC output harness disconnection, breakage. Clean the reference white plate.
OPC drum abnormality (does not rotate). Check the CCD unit / the DSPF PWB.
High voltage PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the transfer unit. E6-14 CCD-ASIC error
Reinsert the transfer unit.
Check or replace the TC output harness
Replace the high voltage PWB. Section SCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the DSPF PWB.

E7-01 MFP image data error E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Section MFP Section SCU

Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB. Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
MFP PWB trouble. scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
the MFP PWB. CCD unit abnormality.
Replace the MFP PWB. SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit / the SCU PWB.
E7-02 HDD trouble
(when the mirroring kit is installed)
E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
Section MFP
Section SCU
Cause When installing the mirroring kit, the HDD of the
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
machine or the HDD of the mirroring kit breaks down
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
or connection fails..
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Defective installation of the mirroring kit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Breakdown of the HDD of the mirroring kit.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Defective connection between the HDD and the
CCD unit abnormality.
mirroring kit harness.
SCU PWB abnormality.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM62-20 to check the trouble.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
Check installation of the mirroring kit and replace if
necessary. unit.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
Replace the broken HDD.
Replace the mirroring kit. plate.
Replace the MFP PWB. Check the CCD unit / the SCU PWB.
E7-03 HDD trouble E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Section SCU
Trouble content
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
PWB and HDD. Replace the SCU PWB.
HDD error file management area data abnormality
(FAT breakage).
MFP PWB trouble. E7-20 LSU laser detection error
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
the MFP PWB and HDD. Section PCU
Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the Cause Optical axis shift.
HDD. Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Replace the HDD. trouble.
Replace the MFP PWB. Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU.
Trouble content Replace the LSU.
Detail MFP
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when E7-21 LSU laser deterioration trouble
booting.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB. Section PCU
Cause Power reduction due to laser deterioration.
Harness and connector disconnection/insertion
E7-07 SD card error trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU control
PWB.
Section MFP Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
Cause SD card trouble or contact error.
LSU.
MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy Replace the SD card.
Check the SD card socket.
Replace the MFPC PWB.

E7-24 LSU LD driver error E7-48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC)
Section PCU Section MFP

Cause Disconnection or improper connection of the harness Cause DIMM trouble, memory slot trouble.
and the connector between the LD PWB and the LSU DIMM insertion trouble, different DIMM inserted.
control PWB. Check & Remedy DIMM trouble.
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble. Replace the PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the harness and the connector between the LD
PWB and the LSU control PWB. E7-49 Water Mark data error
Replace the LD PWB / LSU control PWB.
Section MFP
E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error Cause Watermark data trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
Section PCU
Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
PWB and the LSU control ASIC. E7-50 Engine connection trouble
Improper connection of the communication connector
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU Section PCU
control PWB. Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported by
PCU PWB or LSU control PWB trouble the machine specifications is detected in the PCU
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness PWB.
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU control PWB. LSU trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.
E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
E7-55 PWB information sum error
Section PCU
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and (Engine detection)
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB. Section PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB. Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU EEPROM trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
E7-42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Section MFP Replace the PCU EEPROM.
Cause Image transfer trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connection state of the ACRE ASIC PWB
connector.
E7-60 Combination error between the MFP
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. PWB and other PWB, firmware
Section MFP
E7-46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
Section MFP MFP PWB trouble.
Cause Compression data abnormality. The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
Garbled data are produced in image compression/ machine specifications is connected.
transmission. Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
ACRE ASIC PWB trouble. Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Check & Remedy Check the installation state of the PWB.
Check connection of the ACRE ASIC PWB.
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. E7-61 Combination error between the MFP
PWB and the PCU PWB
E7-47 Combination error between MFP PWB
Section MFP
and ACRE firmware Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
PCU PWB.
Cause Connect to the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) with PCU PWB trouble.
the firmware which does not support MFP PWB Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
Check & Remedy Update the firmware on SIM49-1 or SIM49-10. the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFP PWB.

E7-80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image
data process error
Section MFP
Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble. Section MFP
SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
Cause Image data process abnormality.
SCU PWB mother board connection trouble.
HDD trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Image compression data corruption.
MFP PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Mother board trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
memory.
and the mother board.
Replace the HDD.
Check the ground.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the mother board.
E7-94 Image file data process error (when
importing file data)
E7-89 Communication error between MFPc
PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC con- Section MFP
troller Cause Image data process abnormality.
HDD trouble.
Image compression data corruption.
Cause No response can be obtained from the energy-saving Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
NIC controller memory.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the HDD.
E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error

E7-95 MFP PWB DIMM memory check error
Section MFP (Soc)
Cause PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Section MFP
MFP PWB trouble. Cause Memory data corruption occurs
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB, MFP PWB trouble.
Check the ground. DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
memory.
DIMM memory socket check.
Replace the DIMM memory.
E7-91 FAX reception image data error
Section MFP E7-96 MFP PWB DIMM memory check error

Cause Image data process abnormality. (ASIC)
HDD trouble.
SD card trouble or contact error.
Image compression data corruption. Section MFP
MFP PWB trouble. Cause Memory data corruption occurs.
FAX control PWB trouble. DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the MFP PWB trouble.
memory. Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
Replace the HDD. memory.
Replace or check installation of the SD card. Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the MFP PWB.
Replace the FAX control PWB.
E7-A0 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write

E7-92 Copy image data error error
Section MFP Section PCU

Cause Image data process abnormality. Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble.
HDD trouble. EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble.
Image compression data corruption. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
MFP PWB trouble. the LD PWB and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the Replace the PCU PWB.
memory. If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble
Replace the HDD. replace the LSU.

E7-A5 Installation error of HDD which was F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
used in the mirroring kit error

Cause HDD which was used in the mirroring kit is installed to Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
the MFP without the mirroring kit. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the HDD with one which has not been used Finisher control PWB trouble.
in the mirroring kit. PCU PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
E7-A6 Compact flash memory trouble finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Section MFP
Cause Compact flash memory trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
File system control area data trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the compact flash memory.
operation trouble
Section PCU
Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment Harness and connector connection trouble.
error Home position sensor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density roller lift motor.
adjustment is outside of 1283. Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Section PCU Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the developing unit. F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Section PCU
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
error (Over toner) Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density motor.
adjustment is 77 or less or the control voltage is 207 Replace the stapler shift motor.
or above. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Section PCU Replace the home position sensor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. F1-10 Staple operation trouble
Replace the developing unit. Section PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause Staple motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
error (Under toner) motor.
Replace the staple motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Replace the home position sensor.
adjustment is 177 or above or the control voltage is 52 Replace the finisher control PWB.
or less.
Section PCU
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. F1-11 Finisher grip operation trouble
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Section PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Cause Grip motor trouble.
Replace the developing unit. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Grip arm trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor.
Replace the grip motor.
Replace the grip arm.
Replace the home position sensor.

F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble
trouble
Section PCU
Section PCU Cause Motor lock trouble.
Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
SIM3-3.
tray lift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F F1-30 Finisher - saddle unit communication
trouble
Section PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Section PCU
Motor speed abnormality. Cause Connector and harness connection trouble.
Over-current to the motor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Turn OFF/ON the power.
alignment motor F. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble Section PCU
R Cause Motor lock trouble.
Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Section PCU Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the saddle motor with SIM3-3.
Motor speed abnormality. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Over-current to the motor. Replace the control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-32 Finisher - Punch unit communication
Replace the paper alignment motor R. error
Section PCU
F1-21 Finisher fan trouble
Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or
disconnection between the finisher and the punch
Section PCU unit.
Cause Finisher fan motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Malfunction due to noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor. The punch unit is in the adjustment mode.
Check connection between the finisher control PWB Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
and the fan. finisher and the punch unit.
Replace the fan. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
F1-22 Finisher assist motor trouble

F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble
Section PCU
Cause Motor harness short/open trouble. Section PCU
Control PWB trouble. Cause Punch shift motor trouble.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with Home position sensor trouble.
SIM3-3. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
Replace the control PWB. shifting.
Replace the punch shift motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

F1-34 Punch operation trouble F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
trouble
Section PCU
Cause Punch motor trouble. Section PCU
Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the punch operation. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the punch motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper positioning motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the sensor.
F1-36 Punch paper edge detection error
Section PCU F1-42 Saddle guide motor trouble

Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble.
Harness disconnection. Section PCU
Cause Saddle roller guide motor trouble.
Punch control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the punch paper edge sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle roller
Replace the punch control PWB.
guide motor.
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error Replace the control PWB.
Replace the sensor.
Section PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control Section PCU
PWB DIP SW adjustment.) Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
Section PCU alignment motor (FSPAM).
Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
Replace the sensor.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
F1-44 Saddle staple motor R trouble

F1-39 Punch paper dust sensor error
Section PCU
Cause Saddle staple motor R trouble.
Section PCU
Cause Punch dust sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
Punch unit control PWB trouble.
staple motor R.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
Replace the punch dust sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the punch unit control PWB.
F1-45 Saddle staple trouble
Section PCU
Cause Saddle staple motor trouble.
staple motor.
Replace the sensor.

F1-46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble
Section PCU Section PCU

Cause Saddle motor trouble. Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB and
Finisher control PWB trouble. the PCU PWB.
Home position sensor trouble. Discharge lamp PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB.
motor. Check the harness and connector.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the sensor. F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
Section PCU
F1-47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble
Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
Section PCU PCU PWB trouble
Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Fuse blown (24V line).
paper transport motor. F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble
Replace the sensor. Section PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
level 35 or less, or 220 or above)
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Section PCU Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit Replace the developing unit.
model is installed. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F2-45 Image density sensor trouble
Section PCU
F1-51 Saddle sensor connection trouble
Cause Image density sensor trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble.
Section PCU Image density sensor dirt.
Cause Firmware control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the image density sensor .
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check connection of the sensor harness and
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operations of the guide HP connector.
sensor and the push plate lead edge sensor. Clean the image density sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the sensor.
F2-50 Drum phase sensor trouble
F1-52 Finisher micro switch trouble Section PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Section PCU Drum phase sensor harness and connector
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. connection trouble.
Each micro switch trouble. Drum drive section trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operations of the front door/ Check & Remedy Replace the drum phase sensor.
upper door open detection and the oscillation guide Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
close detection. and the connector.
Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor. Repair the drum drive section.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the sensor.
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble
Section PCU
Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.

F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble

Cause Toner clutch trouble. Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
Toner density sensor trouble. CLUD1 sensor trouble
Connector/harness trouble. Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
Check & Remedy Replace the toner clutch. LUD1.
Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the lift-up unit.
Connector and harness check. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit. F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Section PCU
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Section PCU Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit PCU PWB trouble.
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) Harness and connector connection trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the lift-up unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.
F6-00 MFP-FAX communication trouble

F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Section PCU Protocol error
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. Section MFP
PCU PWB trouble. Case 1 Cause FAX unit PWB connector connection error
Connector/harness trouble. Check/ Check the connector connection between the FAX unit
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. remedy PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Case 2 Cause FAX unit PWB - MFPcnt PWB harness trouble
Connector and harness check. Check/ Check the connector harness between the FAX unit
remedy PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 3 Cause FAX unit PWB mother board connector pin breakage
F2-78 Registration image density sensor Check/ Check the machine grounding.
trouble remedy
Case 4 Cause FAX unit ROM trouble/ROM pin breakage
Section PCU Check/ Check the FAX unit PWB ROM.
remedy
Connection trouble of the harness between the PCU
PWB and the image density sensor.
Dirt on the image density sensor F6-01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
Check & Remedy Check the sensor and the harness.
Replace the registration image sensor. Trouble content EEPROM access error (read/write)
Replace the PCU PWB. Section FAX
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
Check/ Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
F2-91 High density process control high remedy EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
voltage error insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check/ Replace the PWB. In this case, not need to execute
Section PCU
remedy the simulation.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and image density sensor.
Dirt on the image density sensor. F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Developing tank abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-2 to execute the gain adjustment of the Trouble content FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
process control sensor. Section FAX
Check the drum surface. Case 1 Cause FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Replace the developing tank.
Check/ Replace the FAX PWB MODEM chip.
remedy
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check/ Replace the FAX PWB.
remedy

F6-21 Combination error between the F9-91 Communication error between MFP
TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch and the Printer section when booting
Trouble content Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the Section MFP
FAX PWB information (soft switch) Cause MFP section PWB trouble.
Section FAX Printer section PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause The destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB differs. Printer flash ROM trouble.
Check/ Check the destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB. MFP PWB-printer section PWB connection trouble.
remedy Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB information (soft switch) differs. Replace the printer flash ROM.
Check/ Check the FAX PWB information (soft switch). Check connection between the MFP PWB and the
remedy printer section PWB
Case 3 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble
Check/ Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
remedy
F9-92 Printer (section) PWB hardware error
Section MFP
F6-30 Access error to 1-chip microproces- Cause MFP PWB trouble.
sor on the FAX board (FAX detection) Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Trouble content Access error (read/write) to 1-chip microprocessor on

the FAX board
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM)
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause Program writing error (or no writing) to the 1-chip Section PCU
microprocessor Cause Thermistor trouble.
Check/ Use SIM66-24 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor PCU PWB trouble
remedy program. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Case 2 Cause 1-chip microprocessor trouble Fusing unit not installed.
Check/ Replace the 1-chip microprocessor chip. When Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
remedy replacing, use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip Replace the PCU PWB.
microprocessor program. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Case 3 Cause FAX PWB 1-chip microprocessor access circuit
trouble
Check/ Replace the FAX PWB.
H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM)
remedy
Section PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
F6-97 The FAX PWB does not match with the PCU PWB trouble
machine model. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble.
Fusing section connector connection trouble.
Fusing unit not installed.
Trouble content The FAX PWB identification model does not match Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
with the machine model. Replace the thermistor.
Section FAX Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 1 Cause An improper type of FAX PWB is installed to the Check connection of the thermistor connector and
machine. harness.
Check/ Replace the FAX PWB with a proper one. Check the connector in the fusing section.
remedy
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)

F6-98 Combination error between the FAX-
BOX destination information and the Section PCU
machine destination information. Cause Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content Combination error between the FAX PWB destination Fusing unit not installed.
information and the machine destination information.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Section FAX Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the destination Check connection of the connector and the harness.
information written in EEPROM on the FAX PWB and
the destination information of the machine (set with
SIM26-6).
Check/ 1) Check the destination of the FAX PWB.
remedy 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
3) Use a proper combination of the machine and
the FAX PWB.

H3-00 Fusing section high temperature H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM) trouble (TH_UM)

Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Thermistor trouble. level within the specified time from turning ON the
PCU PWB trouble power relay.
Connection trouble of the fusing section connector Thermistor trouble.
and the harness. Heater lamp trouble.
HL PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Thermostat trouble.
heater lamp. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. HL PWB trouble.
Replace the thermistor. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the HL PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat.
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature Replace the HL PWB.
Replace the interlock switch.
trouble (TH_LM) Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Section PCU Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble. trouble (TH_US)
HL control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. Section PCU
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Replace the thermistor. level within the specified time from turning ON the
Replace the PCU PWB. power relay.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Thermistor trouble.
Replace the HL PWB. Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL PWB trouble.
trouble (TH_US) Interlock switch trouble.
Section PCU Replace the heater lamp.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Replace the PCU PWB.
Thermistor trouble. Replace the thermostat.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
HL PWB trouble. Fusing section connector connection Replace the HL PWB.
trouble. Replace the interlock switch.
HL PWB trouble. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.
heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor and the harness.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit section. H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
(When the lamp is ON:) Check the HL PWB and the jam
PCU PWB lamp circuit.
Replace the thermistor, the HL PWB, and the PCU
PWB. Section PCU
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
remains.)
POD1 sensor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.

H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
(TH_UM)
Section PCU
Section PCU Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
fusing motor.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Fusing motor trouble.
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
to fall in the fusing temperature.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
PCU PWB trouble motor.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the Fusing motor.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
HL PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB. L4-04 Drum motor trouble
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Section PCU
Replace the HL PWB.
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
drum motor.
heater lamp.
Drum motor trouble.
Drum unit trouble.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble PCU PWB trouble
Developing unit trouble.
Section SCU Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the drum
Cause Scanner feed is not completed within the specified motor.
time. Replace the drum motor.
Scanner unit trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
SCU PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Scanner control PWB trouble. Replace the drum unit.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the developing unit.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. L4-11 Shift motor trouble
Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB. Section PCU
Cause No change in the shifter home position sensor signal
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.
Replace the scanner motor.
Shift motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
L3-00 Scanner return trouble Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Section SCU Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
Cause Scanner return is not completed within the specified home position sensor.
time. Replace the shift motor.
Scanner unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
SCU PWB trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Scanner control PWB trouble. Replace the shifter home position sensor.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble. L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM1)
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. trouble
Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Section PCU
Replace the scanner home position sensor. Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Replace the scanner motor. specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation.
Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Section PCU Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Cause A lock signal is detected during ON period of the Replace the PCU PWB.
paper feed motor in warming up or canceling a jam.
Paper feed motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.

L4-32 Power source cooling fan (PSFM1) L4-44 Power source cooling fan (PSFM2)
trouble trouble

Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
specified time in the power cooling fan operation. and the fan motor.
Power cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Fan motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. (No power supply to the fan motor)
Replace the power cooling fan. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the harness and the connector between the
Check/replace the connector or the harness. PCU PWB and the fan motor..
Replace the fan motor / the PCU PWB.
L4-34 LSU cooling fan (LSUCFM) trouble

L4-50 Process cooling fan (PROFM1) trouble
Section PCU
Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan Section PCU
operation signal is not detected within the specified Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
time. and the fan motor.
LSU cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Fan motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. (No power supply to the fan motor)
Replace the LSU cooling fan. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the harness and the connector between the
Replace the LSU control PWB. PCU PWB and the fan motor..
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the fan motor / the PCU PWB.
L4-35 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM2) trou- L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
ble
Section PCU
Section PCU Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 8 sec
after starting rotation of the polygon motor.
Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
Polygon motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Replace the PCU PWB. motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
L4-40 Ozone fan (OZFM1) trouble
Section PCU L8-01 Full wave signal detection error

Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
and the fan motor.
Section PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Fan motor trouble. Cause No full wave signal is detected.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble PCU PWB trouble
(No power supply to the fan motor) Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor / the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the power unit.
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM3)

L8-02 Full wave signal error
trouble
Section PCU
Section PCU Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the detected. (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation. above, or 45Hz or less.)
Paper exit cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Power unit trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan. Replace the power unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check the power waveform.

L8-20 Communication error of MFP PWB/ U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Mother board
Section MFP
Section MFP Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Cause Mother board PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Mother trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and the Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
MFP PWB. Replace the MFP PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit. Check the power environment.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the mother board.
U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents
inconsistency
P1-00 PCI Communication error
Section MFP
Section MFP Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
Cause Communication error between the MFP PWB and the before turning OFF the power is installed.
PCI. HDD trouble.
Connection failure of connectors and harness MFP PWB trouble.
between the MFP PWB and the PCI. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
MFP PWB trouble. If there is backup data (export data by device cloning),
PCI control PWB trouble. import it.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors
between the MFO PWB and the PCI.
Check the MFP PWB and replace if necessary. U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check
Check the PCI control PWB and replace if necessary
sum error
P1-01 PCI fan error Section MFP

Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
Section MFP
MFP PWB trouble.
Cause The PCI fan operation signal is not deleted.
PCI fan trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.
Check the PCI control PWB and replace if necessary
Replace the PCI fan.
U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB
manufacturing No. data inconsistency
P1-02 Plasma generating device error Section MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
Section MFP in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
Cause Connection failure of connectors and garness When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
between the plasma generating device and the PCI EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
control PWB. replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
Plasma generating device trouble. MFP PWB trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
between the plasma generating device and PCI Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
control PWB. mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
Replace the plasma generating device. on the new PWB.
Check the PCI control PWB and replace if necessary Replace the MFP PWB.
PC-- Personal counter not detected

U2-40 SD card system storage data area
Section MFP
error
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected. Section MFP
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Cause File error occurs in the SD card system storage data
Replace the SCU PWB. partition.
SD card trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
U1-01 Battery trouble Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power and the backup data in the
HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
automatically booted.
Section MFP
Check the MFP PWB and replace if necessary.
Cause Battery life Check the SD card and replace if necessary.
Battery circuit abnormality
Check & Remedy Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about 2.0V
or above.

U2-41 HDD system storage data area error U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Section MFP Section SCU

Cause File error occurs in the HDD system saved data area Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
disabling backup of the saved file of the machine Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
adjustment value in the SD card. SCU PWB trouble.
HDD trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace if necessary. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
When replacing the HDD and MFP PWB, refer to the Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
chapter of “necessary procedures of HDD and MFP simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
PWB replacement. and the adjustment values.
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system

storage data area) error U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error

Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in the
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is broken .
PCU PWB trouble
Both of the SD card set data and HDD system saved
data area are corrupted.
HDD trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
MFP PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
SD card trouble. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Check the MFP PWB, and replace if necessary. simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary. and the adjustment values.
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
adjustment values.
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
sum error Section PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
Section MFP PCU PWB trouble
Cause HDD trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Strong external noises Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
(address book, image send system registration data) Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Replace the HDD. and the adjustment values.
Replace the MFP PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
U2-60 Water Mark check error U5-00 Document feed unit communication
error
Section MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble
Section SCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Section SCU Replace the SCU PWB.
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Replace the DSPF PWB.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. U5-16 Document feed unit fan (SPFFAN)
Replace the SCU PWB. trouble
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data Section SCU
and the adjustment values. Cause Fan motor trouble.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
Check the DSPF PWB and the driver PWB connection
of the connector and the harness.

U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
Section SCU Section PCU

Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within Cause DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time
the specified time. when lift-up operation.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble. DLUD2 sensor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and harness. Desk control PWB trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble. Lift unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the DSPF PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU2 sensor.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
U5-31 Document feed unit tray lift down trou- Check connection of the connector and the harness.
ble
Section SCU U6-09 LCC lift trouble

Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Section PCU
Cause No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is
DSPF PWB trouble.
detected within the specified time after outputting the
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
lift motor ON signal.
The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the
Replace the DSPF PWB.
lift motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble
U6-00 Communication error of PCU PWB/ Lift mechanism trouble.
Desk paper feed unit Lift motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
Section PCU
sensor and the lift motor.
Cause Error when testing the communication line after Replace the lift motor rotation sensor.
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the lift mechanism.
Desk control PWB trouble. Replace the lift motor.
PCU PWB trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Strong external noises. Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
Replace the PCU PWB. motor trouble
Section PCU
U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor rpm
abnormality, over-current to the motor).
Section PCU Desk control PWB trouble.
Cause DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
when lift-up operation. Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk
DLUD1 sensor trouble. transport motor.
Desk control PWB trouble. Replace the desk control PWB.
Lift unit trouble. Replace the desk paper feed motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU1 sensor.
Replace the desk control PWB. U6-20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error
Replace the lift unit.
Section PCU
Cause Error when testing the communication line after
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
LCC control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Improper combination between the main unit and the
LCC.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
communication line.
Replace the LCC control PWB.

U6-21 LCC paper transport motor trouble U7-50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine
communication error
Section PCU
Cause No change in the paper transport motor rotation Section MFP
sensor signal is detected within the specified time
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal.
(SIMI26-3).
The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
Vendor machine trouble.
varies though the paper transport motor is stopped.
MFP PWB trouble.
Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
Mechanism trouble.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Paper transport motor trouble.
communication line. Change the specifications of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper
vendor machine (SIM26-3).
transport motor.
Replace the paper transport motor.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the mechanism.
Replace the paper transport motor.
U7-51 Vendor machine error
Section MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy "Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Section PCU
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
Cause The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit
code.
to the LCC.
communication line.
Power source unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the power
line.
U9-01 Touch panel trouble
Replace the power unit.
Replace the LCC control PWB. Section SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness related with the touch panel
U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Section PCU Check the connector and the harness related with the
touch panel in the communication line.
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
desk.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
UC-02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error
Section SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Section PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the UC-20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error
LCC.
LCC control PWB trouble. Section SCU
Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode. Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
Replace the LCC control PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
U6-52 PCU - Paper feed desk communication A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error
trouble
Section MFP
Section PCU Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
Cause Connection failure between the machine and the interruption of the power during the version-up
paper feed tray 2 (desk unit). operation, etc.
PCU PWB trouble. ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
Replace the PCU PWB. again.
Replace the ROM.

4. Paper JAM code
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
A. JAM cause code list
Section MFP (1) Main unit/Desk
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. JAM code JAM content
ROM trouble. APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
again. APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
Replace the ROM. APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
A0-04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
expansion kit is installed) CPFD1_NT1 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
CPFD1_NT2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper)
Section MFP CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
Cause The firmware update is failed because of turning OFF CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
the power during the firmware update operation, etc. CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
ROM trouble. CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to execute update of the firmware. CPFD1_ST1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
Replace the ROM. CPFD1_ST2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper)
CPFD2_DES
CPFD2 JAM (Desk communication abnormality detection)
K
A0-15 DSK BOOT version disagreement CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
Section MFP CPFD2_NT1 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
Cause Firmware combination error between the DSK and the CPFD2_NT2 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper)
BOOT. CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the DSK and the CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
BOOT. CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
CPFD2_ST1 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
CPFD2_ST2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper)
A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data D1PPD1_ST1 D1PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
and the CPU firmware version D1PPD2_NT1 D1PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
D1PPD2_ST1 D1PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
Section MFP
DPFD1_NT1 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed tray)
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and
the CPU UI firmware version. DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all firmware version up DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
mode. DPFD1_ST1 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
DPFD1_ST2 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper)
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (PPD1 not-reached)
version (MFP) MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
NO_MATCH Parameter inconsistency
Section MFP
P_FPFD_NM FPFD not reached JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
P_FPFD_N1 FPFD not reached JAM (Tray 1 feed paper)
the EEPROM data version.
P_FPFD_N2 FPFD not reached JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
P_FPFD_N3 FPFD not reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
P_FPFD_N4 FPFD not reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data P_FPFD _NL FPFD not reached JAM (LCC feed paper)
P_FPFD_NT1 FPFD not reached JAM (Tandem left feed paper)
version (PCU) P_FPFD_NT2 FPFD not reached JAM (Tandem right feed paper)
P_FPFD_NA FPFD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
Section PCU P_FPFD_SM FPFD remaining JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and P_FPFD_S1 FPFD remaining JAM (Tray 1 feed paper)
the EEPROM data version. P_FPFD_S2 FPFD remaining JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware. P_FPFD_S3 FPFD remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
P_FPFD_S4 FPFD remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
P_FPFD_SL FPFD remaining JAM LCC feed paper)
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data P_FPFD_ST1 FPFD remaining JAM (Tandem left feed paper)
version (SCU) P_FPFD_ST2 FPFD remaining JAM (Tandem right feed paper)
P_FPFD_SA FPFD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
Section SCU POD1_FUS POD1 JAM (Fusing winding detection)
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
the EEPROM data version. POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware. POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM (LCC communication abnormality detection)

JAM code JAM content (3) LCC
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper) JAM code JAM content
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper) LCC LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD not reached)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (LCC feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
(4) Inner finisher
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
PPD1_NT1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper) JAM code JAM content
PPD1_NT2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper) FED_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper) FED_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper) FEXIT_S Bundle exit remaining JAM
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper) FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) FSTPLJ Staple JAM
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (LCC refeed paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
(5) 1K finisher
PPD1_ST1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
PPD1_ST2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper) JAM code JAM content
PPD2_DRUM PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection) FDRLMJ Paper exit roller lift motor JAM
PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM (Finisher communication abnormality detection) FGMJ Gripper motor JAM
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper) FIN_PAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper) FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper) FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining JAM
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) FPNCHJ Punch JAM
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual tray feed paper) FPPD2_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
PPD2_NT1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper) FPPD2_S Saddle section remaining JAM
PPD2_NT2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper) FPPD3_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout) FPPD3_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper) FSATPD_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper) FSDMJ Saddle motor JAM
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper) FSPTMJ Saddle paper transport motor JAM
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) FSSMJ Staple shift motor JAM
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) FSTPLJ Staple JAM
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual tray feed paper) PDPPD1_N Interface inlet port not-reached JAM
PPD2_ST1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper) PDPPD1_S Interface inlet port remaining JAM
PPD2_ST2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper) PDPPD2_N Interface outlet port not-reached JAM
SIZE_ILG Size irregular JAM PDPPD2_S Interface outlet port remaining JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM
TRAY1 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper) (6) 4K finisher
TRAY2 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
TRAY3 Paper feed JAM (Desk upper tray/Tandem left tray) JAM code JAM content
TRAY4 Paper feed JAM (Desk lower tray/Tandem right tray) FED_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
FED_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
(2) DSPF FFPD_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
FFPD_S Saddle section remaining JAM
FHS_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
JAM code JAM content
FHS_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
P_SHORT Short size JAM
FPNCHJ Punch JAM
SDFS_S Paper JAM
FSFS_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
FSFS_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
FSHS_N Saddle transport not-reached JAM
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
FSHS_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM
FSTPLJ Staple JAM
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
PDPPD1_N Interface inlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD1_S Interface inlet port remaining JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
PDPPD2_N Interface outlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD2_S Interface outlet port remaining JAM
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not reached JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM

MX-M503N
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Fir mware.s fu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
- Store the firmware data (XXX.sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
- The media used for the update must have an enough capacity for storing the firmware data.
- The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-M565N FIRMWARE UPDATE 7 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 * If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware and cannot be pressed.
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
panel.) becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
2) Enter the SIM49-01. firmware.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
the update screen. 0
　　　S
F I RM W AR E U P D AT E [ /m e d ia / us b / ic u 00 0 00 0 0 0. s fu ]
： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0 10 K EY
I C UM ( M AI N )
0
I CU M ( OS ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
　　　S
T E ST I MU L AT I O N　　 NO . 49 - 01 C L OS E EX I T B10AKCEY
K C LE A R
I CU M ( CN ) ： CU R RE N T 0 90 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 0 00 0 0
F IR M W AR E U P DA T E [ /m e di a / us b / ]
10 K EY I C UM ( B OO T ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
<D I R > F OL D ER 1 F IL E 1
I C UM ( B IO S ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0 1 0K
1EY 1 0K2 E Y 10 3K EY
FI L E2 < D IR > F O L DE R 2
EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R I C U( M AI N ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
： CU R RE N T 0 90 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 0 00 0 0 1 0K
4EY 1 0K5 E Y 10 6K EY
I C U( B O OT M )
I CU ( S UB ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
1 0K
1EY 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
1 0K
7EY 1 0K8 E Y 10 9K EY
L AN G U AG E ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
SL I ST ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
1 0K
4EY 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
1 0K
*EY 1 0K0 E Y 10 #K EY
U I CO N T EN T S ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
EOSA ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
1 0K
7EY 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
1 0 KE Y
0S T AR T
A LL A R E Y O U S U RE ? YES NO E X EC U TE 1/4 C LO S E
1 0K
*EY 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
1 0 KE Y S T AR T
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE
.. 1/1
UPDATE" title by 20 steps.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. 0
　　　S
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to F I RM W AR E U P D AT E

10 K EY
S ** * ** * * E
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE R EM A IN S FO R * * MI N UT E S.

CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the C AU T IO N DO NO T PO W ER OF F TH E M F P! F IR M WA R E U P DA T E I N P R OG R ES S !
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] 1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 3K EY
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 6K EY
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB 1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 9K EY
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is 1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 #K EY
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen

appears. 1 0 KE Y S T AR T
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated

will be shown for each firmware respectively. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
0 displayed.
　　　S
T E ST I MU L AT I O N　　 NO . 49 - 01 C L OS E
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
F IR M W AR E U P DA T E [ /m e di a / us b /i c u 00 0 00 0 00 . s fu ]
I C UM ( MA I N ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0 10 K EY played.
I CU M (O S ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
EX I T 10AKCEYK
B C LE A R
I CU M (C N ) ： CU R RE N T 0 90 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 0 00 0 0
I C UM ( BO O T ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
0
　　　S
I C UM ( BI O S ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0 1 0K1 E Y 1 0K2 E Y 10 K3 EY
F I RM W AR E U P D AT E
I CU ( M AI N ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0 10 K EY
C OM P LE T E :P L EA S E T O UC H [ O K] T O F IN I S H.
： CU R RE N T 0 90 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 0 00 0 0 1 0K4 E Y 1 0K5 E Y 10 K6 EY
I C U( B OO T M )
EX I T 10
BAKCEY
K C LE A R
I CU ( SU B ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
1 0K7 E Y 1 0K8 E Y 10 K9 EY
L AN G UA G E ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
S L I ST ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0 1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 K3 E Y
1 0K* E Y 1 0K0 E Y 10 K# EY
U I CO N TE N T S ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 00 0 0 U P DA T E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0 1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 K6 E Y
E O SA
1 0 KE Y
0
S T AR T
A LL A R E Y O U S UR E ? YES NO E X EC U TE 1/4 CL O S E 1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 K9 E Y
4) Press [ALL] key. 1 0K

*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 K# E Y
All the firmware programs are selected.

1 0 KE Y S T AR T
OK
0
　　　S
T E S T I MU L A TI O N　　NO . 49 - 0 1 C L OS E Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
F I RM W AR E U P D AT E [ /m e d ia / us b / ic u 00 0 00 0 0 0. s fu ]
I C UM ( M AI N ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0 10 K EY Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-

I CU M ( OS ) ：
：
CU R RE N T
CU R RE N T
0 10 0 0 00 0
0 90 0 0 00 0
U P D AT E D T O
U P D AT E D T O
0 10 1 00 0 0
0 10 0 00 0 0
EX I T 10AKCEY
B K C LE A R cessfully.
I CU M ( CN )
I C UM ( B OO T ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0 7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-

1 0K
1EY 1 0K
2EY 10 3K EY
I C UM ( B IO S ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
played.
I C U( M AI N ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
： CU R RE N T 0 90 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 0 00 0 0 1 0K
4EY 1 0K
5EY 10 6K EY
I C U( B O OT M )
I CU ( S UB ) ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
0
1 0K
7EY 1 0K
8EY 10 9K EY
L AN G U AG E ： CU R RE N T 0 10 0 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 10 1 00 0 0
　　　S
SL I ST ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0 F I RM W AR E U P D AT E
1 0K
*EY 1 0K
0EY 10 #K EY 1 0 K EY
U I CO N T EN T S ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0 E RR O R :P L EA S E T O UC H [ O K ] T O F IN I S H.
I CU M ,P C U M, S CU B
EOSA ： CU R RE N T 0 10 1 0 00 0 U P D AT E D T O 0 90 0 00 0 0
1 0 KE Y
0
S T AR T
EX I T 1B0AKCK
EY CL E A R
A LL A R E Y O U S U RE ? YES NO E X EC U TE 1/4 C LO S E
10 K1 EY 10 2K E Y 1 0 K3 EY
* Normally select all the firmware and execute updating.

10 K4 EY 10 5K E Y 1 0 K6 EY
* In this case, firmware which does not exist on the machine

side are ignored. 10 K7 EY 10 8K E Y 1 0 K9 EY
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with 10 K* EY 10 0K E Y 1 0 K# EY
the firmware display key.

1 0K E Y S TA R T
OK

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Fir mware.s fu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
A Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-XXXX
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

D. Firmware update using the CN update function c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on
the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
(1) Outline
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called OFF (normal mode).
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program. d. Keys used in the CN update mode
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
in the boot program. mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
normal mode.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal-
ity in the main program. [UP] [BACK]
2) Firmware version check function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this
manual.)
3) ROM making function
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in
this manual.)
[DOWN] [MENU] [OK]
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other Key name Functions in the CN update mode
than the CN update. [OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
update operation of other method than the CN update, this [UP] key Selects an item.
method can be used to update the firmware. [DOWN] key Selects an item.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a new
one having the normal boot program.

(2) Operating procedures 6) Select the firmware update mode.
a. Firmware update function Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
PWB, and each option.
Firm Update
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
From USB Memory
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected. Display of the firmware update mode
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
7) Press [OK] key.
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
update. the file selection menu is displayed.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this
method cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must be
replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
Firm Update
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
> F 0100xx00.sfu
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
Display of file selection
the main program (SD card).
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
a-1. Necessary items
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
1) Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine.
[DOWN] key.
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
lower directory. When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
a-2. Procedures menu returns to the original upper directory.
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP 9) Press [OK] key.
PWB cover. The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. minute.
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is
continued.
USB port Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under
4) Turn ON the power. update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes
more than ten seconds to display the menu.) * During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Update Program Init Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
Please wait firmware programs.
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Version Check Display of the firmware update result
Conf : 00050000 OK: Update is completed successfully.

NG: Update is failed.
Display when booting is completed Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.

MX-M503N
[8] MAINTENANCE Service Manual
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
To perform the procedures safely, refer to "NOTE FOR SERVICING" on the first page of this service manual.
Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5
B. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

Perform the work items listed in the maintenance list (parts) and details of works as well as the items described below.
(The necessary execution items are marked with " " in the table below.)
When repairing (replacing consumable parts) / maintenance

When
When When After cleaning
No. Work item Simulation replacing the Periodic
Installation replacing the replacing the scanner
fusing web maintenance
OPC drum developer (read) section
roller
1 Toner concentration reference control 25-2 
level setting
2 The photo-conductor counter is 24-4 
cleared.
3 Clear the fusing web cleaning send 24-4 
counter.
4 Copy/Printer image quality check and 46-24     
adjustment
C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing

Item Simulation
The paper jam / trouble data are cleared. 24 1
The use quantity counter of each paper feed section is cleared. 24 2
The numbers of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch are cleared. 24 3
The maintenance counter is cleared. (Select MAINTENANCE ALL) 24 4
The list of setting values and adjustment values is printed. 22 6
MX-M565N MAINTENANCE 8 – 1
2. Contents of the maintenance codes (Relationship between various counters values
and display messages)
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the specified value.
The relationships between the kinds of messages and counters are as shown below.
A. Maintenance counter C. Fusing section counters

Message when near end over Message when near end over
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Near end Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Counter name Counter name
conditions “0” “1” conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop Print Enable Print Stop
Maintenance 90% of Sim.21-1 Message (1) Fusing web 300K sheets Message (7) Message (7)
counter (Total) set value cleaning send
counter
Message when end over

Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Message when end over
Counter name End conditions
“0” “1” Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Print Enable Print Stop “0” “1”
Maintenance Sim.21-1 set value Message (1) Message (2) Print Enable Print Stop
counter (Total) Fusing roller print 300 K sheets Message (5) Message (5)
counter
Fusing pressure 300 K sheets Message (6) Message (6)
Message Print job
Message roller print counter
No. Enable/Disable
Fusing web Judged by the Message (7) Message (8)
(1) Maintenance required.Code: TA Enable
cleaning send fusing web life end
(2) Maintenance required.Code: TA Disable
counter detection signal,
(With parentheses)
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the fusing web print
After completion of maintenance, clear the maintenance counter of
counter or the web life end detection.
SIM24-4.
B. Transfer unit section counters Message Print job

Message
No. Enable/Disable
Message when near end over (5) Maintenance required.Code: FK1 Enable
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A (6) Maintenance required.Code: FK2 Enable
Counter name (7) Maintenance required Code: FK3 Enable
conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop (8) Maintenance required Code: FK3 Disable
Waste toner After near end Message (4) Message (4)
detection After completion of maintenance, clear the fusing unit counter of
SIM24-4 (fusing roller, pressure roller, separation pawl, fusing
web).

Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A D. OPC drum section counters
“0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop Message when end over
Transfer unit print 300K sheets Message (3) Message (3) Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
counter “0” “1”
Waste toner After end Message (5) Message (5) Print Enable Print Stop
detection Drum print counter 300K sheets Message (9) Message (9)
Drum accumulated 1200K rotations Message (9) Message (9)
Message Print job rotation number
Message Main charger print 300K sheets Message (10) Message (10)
No. Enable/Disable
(3) Maintenance required Code: TK Enable counter
(4) Please replace the toner collection Enable Main charger 1150K rotations Message (10) Message (10)
container. (with OK key) accumulated
(Displayed with parentheses) rotation number
(5) Please replace the toner collection Disable
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum print counter or
container. (Displayed with parentheses)
the drum rotations accumulated number counter.
After completion of maintenance, clear the transfer unit counter of
Message Print job
maintenance counter of SIM24-4(transfer unit print counter, trans- Message
No. Enable/Disable
fer unit accumulated traveling distance and transfer unit usage
(9) Maintenance required.Code: DK Enable
days).
(10) Maintenance required Code: MC Enable
After completion of maintenance, clear the drum counter of SIM24-

7 (drum print counter and drum accumulated traveling distance).
E. Developer section counters Message when near end over
Sim.26-69B
Message when end over Near end Sim.26-69B
Sensor name “1”
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A conditions “0”
Counter name End conditions Not
“0” “1” Displayed
displayed
Print Enable Print Stop
Toner remaining When a low toner Message (14)
Developer print 600K sheets Message (11) Message (11)
quantity sensor state continues for
counter
(K) more than the
Developer 2400K rotations Message (11) Message (11) specified time
accumulated
rotation number
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
counter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter. “0” “1”
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum Print Enable Print Stop
motor rotation number. Toner remaining When the pixel Message (13) Message (13)
quantity sensor count value
Message Print job (K) reaches the
Message specified level
No. Enable/Disable
from the near end
(11) Maintenance required.Code: VK Enable
condition
After replacement of developer, use SIM25-2 to set the toner den-
sity control level. By this setting, the developer counters (the devel- Message Print job
Message
oper print counter and the developer accumulated traveling No. Enable/Disable
distance counter) are cleared. (12) Toner Low Enable
(Do not replace cartridge until requested)
F. Toner cartridge section counters (13) Change the toner cartridge Disable
(14) Ready to scan to copy Enable
Toner preparation message (Change the toner cartridge)
Sim.26-69A
Near near end Sim.26-69A
Sensor name “1”
conditions “0”
Not
Displayed
displayed
Toner remaining Total toner supply Message (12)
quantity sensor time (Equivalent to
(K) 10% or less of
toner remaining
quantity)
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works

X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ☆ : Lubricate
When
Section Part name 300k 600k 900k 1200k 1500k 1800k 2100k 2400k Remark
calling
Photo- Drum –        
conductor Cleaner blade –        
section
Toner reception seal –        
Toner reception side –        
sheet F/R
Side seal F/R –        
Drum separation pawl –        
unit
MC unit x        
Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. calls. It is advisable to
replace in advance if
necessary.
Developing Developer –    
section DV seal – x x x x x x x x
DV side seal F/R – x x x x x x x x
Toner filter –    
Connector – x x x x x x x x
Toner Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty.
supply
section
LSU Dust-proof glass  x x x x x x x x
section
Transfer Transfer roller x        
section Discharge plate x        
Transfer roller bearing F –        
and R
Transfer roller collar –        
Transfer rear star ring – x x x x x x x x
Pre-transfer paper guide         
Process control sensor x         Air cleaning
When
calling
Fusing Lower heat roller x         Apply grease(UKOG-
section Lower heat roller bearing x x x x x x x x x 0235FCZZ) to specific
position
Upper separation pawl x        
Thermistor x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed
Lower separation pawl x        
Web pressure roller x        
bearing
Web pressure roller x        
Web roller x        
Fusing paper exit roller x        
Gears ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ Apply grease(UKOG-
0235FCZZ) to specific
position
Paper guides         
Upper heat roller x         Apply grease when
Upper heat roller bear- x x x x x x x x x replacing
ing 36 cpm
(UKOG-0323FCZ1)
46/56 cpm
(UKOG-0235FCZZ)
Upper heat roller gear x x x x x x x x x
Upper heat roller heat- x x x x x x x x x
insulation bush
Filter Ozone filter x        
section
Paper feed Paper pick-up roller x         Replace 100K of each paper
section Paper feed roller x         feed counter.
Separation roller x        
Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
Paper Resist roller (Idle) x ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ Apply grease
transport Paper dust removing unit  ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section Transport rollers x ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ Apply grease
Transport paper guides         
Duplex/ Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
paper exit Transport rollers x        
section Sensors x x x x x x x x x
Gears x x x x x x x x x
Drive Gears (Grease) – x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
section Shaft earth sections – x x x x x x x x necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
Belts – x x x x x x x x
Scanner Mirror/Lens/Reflection         
section sheet/CCD
Table glass/SPF glass         
Scanner lamp x x x x x x x x x Air cleaning for the LED
section
        
Rails ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Drive belt/drive wire x x x x x x x x x
Sensors x x x x x x x x x
DSPF Paper feed roller          Replace at 100K of the SPF
section Pickup roller          paper feed counter
Separation roller         
Torque limiter SPF (for - x x x x x x x x
separation)
Call-in torque limiter (for - x x x x x x x x
PIC)
Transport rollers         
No. 1 scanning plate         
No. 2 scanning section,         
scanning glass
No. 2 scanning section,         
white reference glass
Paper exit roller         
Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
OC mat         
Belts - x x x x x x x x
Option
When
calling
Inner Transport rollers x        
finisher/ Transport paper guides x        
Punch unit Gears x x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
for Inner necessary positions.
finisher Belts x x x x x x x x
Knurling belt x         Replace at every 1000K of
Paddle x         the finisher paper exit count
value.
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Saddle Transport rollers         
stitch Transport paper guides         
finisher Gears x x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
(1K)/Punch necessary positions.
unit for Belts x x x x x x x x x
Saddle
Knurling belt x         Replace at every 1000K of
stitch
the finisher paper exit count
finisher
value.
(1K)
(For saddle finisher)
Staple cartridge (For Replacement is made by the user at every 2,000 pcs.
saddle finisher)
Finisher Transport rollers         
(4K)/Punch Transport paper guides         
unit for Gears x x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
Finisher necessary positions.
(4K) Belts x x x x x x x x x
Paper Transport rollers         
pass unit Transport paper guides         
A4 large Pickup roller/ x         Replace at 100K of paper
capacity Paper feed rollers feed counter
tray Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
Transport rollers x        
Gears x x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
Belts x x x x x x x x
Paper feed Pickup roller x         Replace at 100K of paper
tray (Desk) Paper feed roller x         feed counter
Separation roller x        
Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
Transport rollers x        
Gears x x x x x x x x x
A. Photo-conductor section
When
No. Part name 300k 600k 900k 1200k 1500k 1800k 2100k 2400k Remark
calling
1 Drum –        
2 Cleaner blade –        
3 Toner reception seal –        
4 Toner reception side –        
sheet F/R
5 Side seal F/R –        
6 Drum separation pawl –        
unit
7 MC unit x        
8 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. calls. It is advisable to
replace in advance if
necessary.
5
7
4
6
1
6
3
4
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) (1) Waste toner box replacement
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment 1) Open the front cover.
[Note] 2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it.
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum Maintenance: Replace the waste toner box with a new one
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.) every time when it is full (By the user). Check it every-time
* When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the when a serviceman calls. (Replace it in advance if necessary.)
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
* Apply the yellow toner powder (CKOG-0345DS51) on the OPC
drum surface
5mm
5mm
(2) Photo-conductor unit removal

1) Remove the toner cartridge.
2) Remove the developing unit.
3) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
3) Apply yellow toner powder.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
* Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
[Note]
* Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
* Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
* Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
4) Remove the cover and disconnect connector. Remove the (4) Drum replacement
blue screw. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and hold the handle 1) Remove the blue screw, and rotate the fixing shaft to remove.
to remove the unit. Slide the drum to the front side to remove.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 300K.
NOTE: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
drum by making it into contact with the separation pawl.
Before installing the drum to the process unit, apply the yel-
low toner (UKOG-0345DS51) over the stearic acid (white)
which is applied to the photoconductor drum for replace-
ment in advance. then rotate the drum once to make it col-
lect the yellow toner. Apply the stearic acid powder (UKOG-
0312FCZZ) within 40mm - 50mm from the both ends of the
drum.(Be sure to apply the powder while rotating the drum
for 3 times or so)
NOTE: Before installing the photo-conductor unit, clean the both

surfaces of the resist unit paper guide.
Clean the metal section of the paper guide with alcohol,
and clean the cushion section without alcohol.
At that time, be careful not to deform the paper guide.
(5) Drum separation pawl unit replacement

1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the drum separation pawl
unit.
* Maintenance
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the tip of the separa-
tion pawl.
(3) MC unit replacement

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the MC unit.
* Maintenance
NOTE: When inserting the MC unit, be careful not to scratch the
drum.
(6) Toner reception seal, toner reception side sheets F (8) Cleaner blade replacement
and R replacement 1) Remove the screw, MC case and lens.
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the toner reception seal.
* Maintenance
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
A and B.
NOTE: Attach the toner reception side sheets F and R according to
the reference.
B
2) Remove the blue screw, and slide the cleaner blade to the rear
side to remove.
* Maintenance
A Replace at every 300K.
NOTE: Before removing the cleaner blade, remove the side seals
Plate edge reference F and R in advance. When, therefore, the cleaner blade is
0mm 0mm replaced, replace the side seals F and R with new ones as
well.
If this note is ignored, a trouble such as improper cleaning
0.3mm 0.3mm
or toner leakage may occur.
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm NOTE: Be careful not to touch or scratch the tip of the cleaner
blade.
Duplex tape reference Duplex tape reference
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
A -> B -> C.
(7) Side seals F and R replacement
1) Remove the side seals F and R.
* Maintenance
NOTE: Attach with the cleaner blade edge as the reference so that
the clearance is within 0 - 0.3mm. Press to secure attach-
ment.
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm

F R
0.3mm 0.3mm
0mm 0mm
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
2) After replacement of the side seals F and R, apply stearic acid

(UKOG-0309FCZZ) evenly to the side seals F and R by using
the micro-spatula (UKOG-0311FCZZ).
NOTE: Be careful not to apply excessively to the parts on the
periphery.
5᳸7mm
5᳸7mm
F R
B. Developing section
When
calling
1 Developer –    
2 DV seal – x x x x x x x x
3 DV side seal F/R – x x x x x x x x
4 Toner filter –    
5 Connector – x x x x x x x x
6 DV MG seal - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5
3
6
3
(Note for servicing the DV roller) (Note for cleaning the developing unit)
1. Prevent roller contamination If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
[Note] with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller may be accumulated in the unit.
surface. * Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
face when transporting developer or removing foreign mate-
* When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section
rial from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the
to rotate it. and it is difficult to rotate, use handle (UKOG-
0341FCZZ) magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling
the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum. (Do not pinch the grounding
wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent
against damage on the cored bar.)
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02.
[Check method] (2) Developer replacement
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily NOTE: Supply of developer must be performed after completion of
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following all the maintenance works of the developing unit.
method.
1) Remove the screw, and hold the rib to remove the cover.
* Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in NOTE: After installing, check to confirm that the cover is securely
the image. engaged with the frame pawl.
(1) Developing unit removal

1) Remove the waste toner box.
3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
2) While rotating the mixing roller, discharge developer from the (4) DV seal replacement
unit. 1) Remove the DV seal.
Maintenance
Replace as needed.
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
0.5mm 0mm
0mm
0.5mm
(5) DV side seal F and R replacement

1) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
Maintenance
3) Supply new developer. Replace as needed.
Maintenance NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
Replace at every 600K. hold securely after attachment.
NOTE: When supplying developer, use care not to spill it. Espe-
cially, take a great care not to spill developer on the drive
section.
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.
0.3mm 0.3mm
F 0mm 0mm R
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
(6) DV MG seal cleaning
1) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
Maintenance
Cleaning at every 300K.
(3) Toner filter replacement

1) Remove the cover and the toner filter.
Maintenance
C. Toner supply section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) ○ : Clean : Replace : Adjust ☆ : Lubricate
When
calling
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty.
(1) Toner cartridge replacement

1) Open the front cover.
2) Pull out the toner cartridge to remove.
Maintenance: Replace every-time when toner empty. (By the
user)
NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and

inset it slowly.
NOTE: Shake the toner cartridge several times.
D. LSU section
When
calling
1 Dust-proof glass  x x x x x x x x
(1) LSU removal

1) Turn OFF the machine power and disconnect the power plug.
2) Remove the lef cabinet.
1
1
2
5) Remove the LSU mother PWB unit and the HDD unit.
6) Disconnect the LSU connector and remove the securing
screws to remove the LSU.
3) Remove the shield plate.
NOTE: Lift the LSU tip and insert it so that the LSU boss comes in
the frame hole. After insertion, remove the toner cartridge
and check.
4) Remove the MFP control PWB unit.

Since the MFP control PWB and the LSU mother PWB are
connected together, use care when removing and attaching
them.
(2) Dust-proof glass cleaning
1) Clean the dust-proof glass.
Maintenance
Clean at needed.
NOTE: Do not touch the dust-proof glass with bare hands.
E. Transfer section
When
calling
1 Transfer roller x        
2 Discharge plate x        
3 Transfer roller bearing –        
F and R
4 Transfer roller collar –        
5 Transfer rear star ring – x x x x x x x x
6 Pre-transfer paper guide         
7 Process control sensor x         Air cleaning
4
5
5
5
5
5 3
5
2
43 6
(1) Transfer unit removal
2) Remove the transfer roller collar and the transfer roller bearing
F from the holder.
Maintenance
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit. NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing F and the holder boss securely.
NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller col-
lar.
(2) Pre-transfer paper guide and process control

sensor cleaning (4) Discharge plate replacement
1) Remove the pre-transfer paper guide. Clean the pre-transfer 1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the discharge plate
paper guide and the process control sensor. holder. Remove the discharge plate.
Maintenance Maintenance
Clean at every 300K. Replace at every 300K.
NOTE: When installing, engage the boss in the rear side, and then NOTE: When installing, insert the discharge plate into the boss
engage the boss in the front side. and check to confirm that it is securely on the ground elec-
trode.
(3) Transfer roller, transfer roller bearing F and R, and

transfer roller collar replacement
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the transfer roller. Remove
the transfer roller bearing R, the transfer roller collar, and the
transfer roller from the transfer roller.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing R and the holder boss securely.
NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller
gear and the transfer roller collar.
F. Fusing section
When
calling
1 Lower heat roller x         Apply grease (UKOG-
2 Lower heat roller bearing x x x x x x x x x 0235FCZZ) to specific
position
3 Upper separation pawl x        
4 Thermistor x x x x x x x x x Replace as needed
5 Lower separation pawl x        
6 Web pressure roller x        
bearing
7 Web pressure roller x        
8 Web roller x        
9 Fusing paper exit roller ○        
10 Gears ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ Apply grease (UKOG-
0235FCZZ) to specific
position
11 Paper guides         
12 Upper heat roller x         Apply grease when
replacing
36 cpm machine
(UKOG-0323FCZ1)
45/56 cpm machine
(UKOG-0235FCZZ)
13 Upper heat roller gear x x x x x x x x x
14 Upper heat roller bearing x x x x x x x x x Apply grease when
replacing
36 cpm machine
(UKOG-0323FCZ1)
45/56 cpm machine
(UKOG-0235FCZZ)
15 Upper heat roller heat- x x x x x x x x x
insulation bush
14
36 cpm 46/56 cpm 6

3 6 3
14 14
7 7
8 8 13
13
3 3
4 12 4 12
6 6
2 2
5 5
13 1 1
11 13 11
5 5
14 14
2 2
10 10
10 10
10 10 10
Grease Grease
UKOG-0323FCZ1 UKOG-0323FCZ1
Grease
10 UKOG-
0235FCZZ
10
10
10 Grease
UKOG-
10 0235FCZZ
Grease Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ UKOG-0235FCZZ
(1) Fusing unit replacement 2) Remove the web spring, the web pressure roller bearing. and
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. the web pressure roller
Maintenance
Replace at every 300K. and life end
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit. Do not rotate B direction
[Route diagram]
(2) Web pressure roller bearing and web pressure

roller replacement
1) Remove the screw, and remove the web unit. (3) Thermistor replacement
1) Release pressure lever and remove the screw and the cover.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness, the screw, 4) Remove the stopper and upper heat roller unit.
and the thermistor. 36 cpm machine
Maintenance
Check and clean at every 300K and replace as needed.
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert into the thermistor boss.
(4) Upper heat roller, upper heat roller gear, upper 46/56 cpm machine
heat roller insulation bush, upper heat roller
bearing, and heater lamp replacement
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and heater
lamp.
2) Remove the screw, and release the pressure of the heat roller
and open the fusing unit. 5) Remove the roller stopper from the upper heat roller, and
remove the upper heat roller gear, the upper heat roller insula-
tion bush, and the upper heat roller bearing.
Maintenance
36 cpm machine
3) Put the screw to keep opened.
46/56 cpm machine
6) When replace an upper heat roller, take off a protection sheet 46/56 cpm machine
and soak alcohol into cloth enough and clean the heat roller
surface well
(5) Lower heat roller and lower heat roller bearing

replacement
1) Remove the lower heat roller unit. Remove the lower heat
(7) Lower separation pawl replacement
roller bearing from the lower heat roller.
1) Release the spring edge on the paper guide side from the
Maintenance
paper guide spring stopper. Precisely speaking, slide the
Replace at every 300K. spring edge and push it down to the back surface of the paper
guide. In addition, disengage the lower separation pawl from
the lower separation pawl shaft side where the spring is
attached. Remove the spring from the lower separation pawl.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing the spring, pass the spring hook through
the hole in the lower separation pawl.
NOTE: When installing the lower separation pawl, first install the
shaft which is not provided with the spring to the paper
guide.
(6) Upper separation pawl replacement

1) Remove the screw, the upper separation pawl unit, and the
upper separation pawl.
Maintenance
36 cpm machine
①
②
G. Filter section
When
calling
1 Ozone filter x        
(1) Ozone filter replacement

1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the ozone
filter.
Maintenance
When installing the filter, be careful not to turn out the periph-
eral molt and to insert the filter straight.
H. Paper feed section
When
calling
1 Paper pick-up roller x         Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller x         Replace according to each
3 Separation roller x         paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at 100K
or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x x x x Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray: 100K
Manual feed: 100K
5 Transport rollers x        
6 Sensors x x x x x x x x x
6 6
6
2 2
1 5
3
6
4 6
6 6
5 4 3 6
(1) Manual paper feed roller, separation roller, and (2) Tray paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper feed
torque limiter replacement roller, and separation roller replacement
1) Remove the cover. 1) Remove the tray 1.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
2) Slide the stopper and the collar and remove the paper feed Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
roller counter.
2 1
3
2
3) Remove tha separation roller and the torque limiter.

3) Remove the separation roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
3
2
(3) Tray paper feed unit torque limiter replacement
1) Remove the E-ring, the bearing, and the paper feed lower PG
unit.
2
2 2
3
2) Remove the pressure release spring, and remove the paper

feed lower PG supporting plate. Remove the separation pres-
sure spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
1
2
3) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the sep-
aration shift. Remove the torque limiter.
counter.
2
4
I. Paper transport section
When
calling
1 Resist roller (Idle) x ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ Apply grease
(UKOG-0012QSZZ)
2 Paper dust removing unit  ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 Transport rollers x ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ Apply grease
(UKOG-0012QSZZ)
5 Transport paper guides         
3
1
4
3 Apply grease
(1) Resist roller (idle), and each transport roller (2) Resist roller (idle), and transport roller applying
cleaning grease
1) Open the right door. 1) Open the right door.
2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the 2) Applygrease the resist roller (Idle), resist roller (Drive) and the
transport roller 8 (Drive) (C). transport roller 8 (Drive).
Maintenance Maintenance
Clean at every 300K. Apply grease at every 300K.
B C
J. Duplex/Paper exit section
When
calling
1 Discharge brush x x x x x x x x x
2 Transport rollers x        
Gears x x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
1
3
2
2 3
1
2
2
(1) Each transport roller cleaning 4) Open the right door.
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
Maintenance
Clean at every 300K.
2) Open the ADU open/close door.

5) Remove the reverse PG unit.
6) Clean the transport roller (Drive).

Maintenance
3) Clean the transport roller (Drive) (A), and the transport roller
(Drive) (B).
Maintenance
K. Drive section
When
calling
1 Gears (Grease) – x x x x x x x x When checking, apply to the
2 Shaft earth sections – x x x x x x x x necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts – x x x x x x x x
1
グリス
UKOG-0307FCZZ
2 1
3 グリスグリス
UKOG-0012 UKOG-0307
QSZZ FCZZ
1
グリス
UKOG-0299
FCZZ
L. Scanner section
When
calling
1 Mirror/Lens/         
Reflection sheet
(Reflector)/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF glass         
3 Scanner lamp x x x x x x x x x Air cleaning for the LED
section
4 Rails ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5 Drive belt/drive wire x x x x x x x x x
2 4
6
2
4 5
1
5
1
3
M. DSPF section
When
calling
1 Paper feed roller          Replace at 100K of paper
2 Pickup roller          feed counter
3 Separation roller         
4 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Torque limiter x        
7 No. 1 scanning plate         
8 No. 2 scanning section,         
scanning glass
9 No. 2 scanning section,         
white reference glass
10 Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 Lens/CCD         
12 Scanner lamp/Reflector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 OC mat         
14 Gears x x x x x x x x x
15 Belts x x x x x x x x x
1
6
4 2
3
4
7
4 13
4
4
5
10
14
11 12
12 15
8
10 14
15
9
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement (2) Separation roller replacement
1) Open the upper door.Remove the screw and the paper feed 1) Remove the screw and the paper feed PG lower cover.
cover.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the reverse pressure release

2) Remove the pawl and the paper feed PG upper cover. lever and separation roller.
counter.
(3) Scanning plate, scanning glass and white

reference glass cleaning
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder guide, the pickup 1) Open the DSPF unit, and clean the No.1 scanning plate.
roller and the paper feed roller. Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
counter.
4) Remove the paper feed roller.

Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed 2) Open the lower door.
counter.
3) Remove the cleaner. 2) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet.
2 3
4) Use the cleaner to clean the scanning glass (surface).

Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. 3) Remove the screw. Remove the pawl. Remove the rear cabi-
net.
5) Use the cleaner to clean the white reference glass.

Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. 4) Open the DSPF unit, and remove the OC mat from the left
edge.
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
(4) Mirror, Lens/CCD, scanner lamp, OC mat cleaning

1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw. * When assembling, place the OC mat on the document table
to fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit.
5) Remove the connector from the DSPF CL inverter PWB. 9) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp mounting plate.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.

Remove the lower door.
10) Clean the scanning glass (back surface).
2
1
11) Remove the screw, and remove the reflector and the DSPF
copy lamp.
7) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the white reference plate.
8) Remove the screw, and remove the scanning section cover.

Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.
2
3
12) Remove the screw, and remove the transport PG upper. 16) Remove the pawl, and remove the lens cover.
13) Remove the screw, and remove the harness cover. Disconnect
17) Clean the lens (a) and the CCD (b).
the connector.
* When assembling, arrange the harness so that it is placed in
the lower position than the rib height.
1
b
a
2
14) Remove the step screw, and remove the screw. Remove the 18) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
optical fixing plate. Remove the optical unit.
2
3
15) Remove the pawl. Remove the dust-proof cover. Remove the
19) Clean the mirror.
screw, and remove the dark box.
N. RSPF section
When
calling
1 Document pickup roller          Replace at 100K of the SPF
2 Paper feed roller          paper feed counter
3 Separation roller         
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x x x x
5 Take-up torque limiter x x x x x x x x x
7 Registration roller         
8 Transport roller 2         
9 Transport roller 3         
10 Paper exit roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 Scanner plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 Gears x x x x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x x x x
15 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4
2
5
14
11
7
11
8
12
10
6
15
(1) RSPF unit b. Separation roller, Torque limiter SPF
1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.
No. Name
1 Document pickup roller
2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter SPF
5 Take-up torque limiter
6 Discharge brush
7 Registration roller
8 OC mat
5
7 2 2) Remove the holder, and remove the separation roller.
4
1
3
8 1
a. Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller 3) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
c. Take-up torque limiter

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring. Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing,
the holder, and the take-up torque limiter.
2) Remove the holder, and remove the document pickup roller,
and the paper feed roller.
6
2 7
8 5
1 2 3 4
d. Discharge brush (2) RSPF transport unit
1) Open the document tray, and remove the discharge brush.
No. Name
1 Transport roller 2
When replacing the discharge brush, attach a new brush to the 3 Paper exit roller
reference. 4 Scan plate
3
1
4
2
Character edge reference
1mm 1mm
Square
hole
reference
0 - 0.5mm
a. Transport roller 2, Transport roller 3, Paper exit roller

1) Clean the transport roller 2, the transport roller 3, and the
e. Registration roller
paper exit roller
1) Open the paper feed unit, and clean the registration roller.
f. OC mat
1) Open the RSPF unit, and clean the OC mat.
b. Scan plate
1) Clean the scan plate.
MX-M503N
Service Manual
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
1. HDD/SD card/CF card memory map
A. HDD partition
HDD size = 320GB (Actual size 289GB)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
0 [L-1] 0.3GB [S-1] 7GB [I-1] 100GB
Outer
track
10
90
100 [I-2] 10GB
110 [I-3] 10GB
[S-2]
120 [I-4] 1GB [L-2] 1GB
0.2G
[S-5] B
130 [S-3] 4GB [S-4] 2GB
0.5G
[S-6] 2GB [S-7] 2GB
B
140 [S-8] 16GB
150 [S-9] 4GB
160 [S-10] 4GB [S-11] 120GB
170
270
280 [S-12] 8GB
Inner 290 [L-3] 1GB

track
[GB]
B. HDD data contents

No File system Stored data NOTE
L-1 Not available UI content data
e-manual / html
S-1 Universal
Watermark
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH / Document filing) 3000 documents,20000 images
I-2 Image data Image data (Temporary storage) 1000 documents,10000 images
I-3 Image data User watermark / Stamp 1000 documents,10000 images
I-4 Image data FAX / Internet FAX receive images 3000 documents,5000 images
L-2 Not available System storage data
L-3 Not available RAID system information
S-2 Universal System storage data (for backup)
Download font
User profile
S-3 Universal User macro
storage data
System setting data
S-4 Universal System log
Document filing (Database)
S-5 Universal Job log (Database)
Job completion list
Address book (Database)
Account management information (Database)
S-6 Universal
Individual setting information for direct WEB browsing
Coolie file for OSA application
S-7 Universal Database file
S-8 Universal Spool area for printer
S-9 Universal Application work area (User file used in SMB direct print
S-10 Universal OSA application file
S-11 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
User data of set value etc which must not be erased when installing the DSK.
S-12 Universal
(Address book, account information)
MX-M565N VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 9 – 1

C. CF card partition
CF card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.8GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-201] 7080MB
7 [S-201] 512MB [S-203] 200MB
[GB]
D. CF card data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE
ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Log data
L-201 Universal
Snapshot
Swap area
font
web help
S-201 Universal
spdl
Option Font ROM
S-203 Universal System setting value data file
E. SD card partition
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-101] 500MB [I-101] 1GMB
[GB]
F. SD card data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE
L-101 Not available ICU (Reus) firmware (Boot/Main)
I-101 Image data FAX/Intermet FAX receive images

2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD, the SD Card and the CF Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card, CF card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
Ground your body with grounding band during the work.

2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this time, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-2 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
Note for the handling of EEPROM

WARNING:
Never execute Sim16 to clear U2 trouble WITHOUT investigating the root cause of U2 trouble using the following note.
1) Make sure to put an earth band while handling PWB. EEPROM data may be garbled due to the static charge.
(It is mentioned in Note for Serving.)
2) Never to insert EEPROM to the socket in reverse. U2 trouble occurs 100% of the time if the machine is turned on after inserting the
EEPROM in reverse.
Execution of Sim16 to clear this U2 trouble will lead to the garbled data. Data won’t recover once the data is garbled.
3) Make sure that PCU, MFP, SCAN EEPROMs will not be switched. U2 trouble occurs 100% of the time if the machine is turned on while the
EEPROMs are being switched. Execution of Sim16 to clear this U2 trouble will lead to the garbled data. Data won’t recover once the data
is garbled. To prevent
such troubles, put a mark such as “MFP” to each EEPROM before removing from PWB so that it is easy to distinguish.
4) Please handle EEPROMs with care to prevent bending of pins.
They will be broken if bent several of times. (This type of trouble has been reported many times.).
5) Do not use foamed styrol etc. for packing during the transportation of EEPROM. Foamed styrol easily generates static charge. In some
cases, EEPROM is damaged just by sticking it into foamed styrol. Make sure to use the black sponge for packing during transportation.
The black sponge is used to pack EEPROM provided as service parts.Special material is used for this black sponge so that it will not gen-
erate a static charge. Make sure that PCU, MFP, SCAN EEPROMs won’t be switched. U2 trouble occurs 100% of the time if the machine
is turned on while the EEPROMs are being switched. Execution of Sim16 to clear this U2 trouble will lead to the garbled data. Data won’t
recover once the data is garbled. To prevent such troubles, put a mark such as “MFP” to each EEPROM before removing from PWB so
that it is easy to distinguish.
CAUTION: Please note that counter data and machine adjustment values are recorded in the EEPROM.
If the data in EEPROM is garbled, it is impossible to recover. In such cases, the only solution will be the initialization of the EEPROM.
Counter data and adjustment values will be reset to “0” or “default” once the data are initialized.
Once all the adjustment values are set to default, it will be necessary to readjust all the adjustment values, which requires tremendous
workload.
Caution to prevent damage on EEPROM

? In case any trouble other than U2 trouble occurs to the machine, replace PWB (remove and install EEPROM) to fix, and U2 trouble
occurs right after power on, never execute Sim16 under the condition.
As previously mentioned, the data in EEPROM will be garbled after the execution of Sim16.
? In such cases, EEPROM may have been inserted in reverse or MFP and PCU EEPROM may have been switched.
? Turn off the machine without execution of Sim16, install proper EEPROM in proper position (on PWB), turn on the machine again, and
then execute Sim16. This way U2 error will be cleared.
? Sim16 is executed to clear U2 errors if it occurred without performing any services (such as machine repair or maintenance).
As previously mentioned, execution of Sim16 won’t clear artificially-generated U2 errors. Instead, it actually damages the
EEPROM.HDD storage data and backup

B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
- Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data back up is possible before
replacement. perform data back up and then replace the HDD.
- If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
- The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
- HDD storage data and back up.
- Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be back up.
- Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD.
- Re-install and update procedures of operation manual data saved in HDD.
- Re-install and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage
data cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable WEB PAGE. or User
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable
WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 Mirroring information (When Not available Available Disable Not available Enable The mirroring Service
the mirroring kit is installed, (After installation information is
the mirroring information is of the mirroring erased by
written.) kit) forcible build or
RIB BUSTER.
16 Individual setting Not available Available Disable Disable Service
information for direct WEB
browsing
17 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
18 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
19 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
backed up data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03
When a new HDD
is appears.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
is normal but a program model) is used * must be replaced.
error occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
memory.) is normal but a program model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 error occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
or servicing). performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
is displayed.  Cancel
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
is no need to perform
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
formatting procedure with SIM.
data are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
 Formatting is automatically machine. type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
performed. data are given to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
is displayed.  Cancel memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
with SIM16. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
automatically formatted, there the HDD. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
is no need to perform Fax models.)
formatting procedure with SIM. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
the HDD data and the image related memory and to machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Fax models.) shipping.
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed.  Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD.  After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.Import enable data: Document filing data, User font,
Use macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD (5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
storage Operation Manual data 1) Obtain the watermark data.
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
Download the Operation Manual data (**.uar) from the utility site (Tech-DS home page).
menu on the web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Copy the downloaded file to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.
the file hierarchy.
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 12 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
- The file size is different.
',5!0$18$/
- The time stamp is different
- The file exists only in the USB memory.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

',5!:0
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.

- When the USB memory is not inserted, “INSERT A STOR-
AGE E-MANUAL STORED ON” is displayed. When [OK] but-
ton is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
4) Select the file of the Operation Manual data. (The screen shifts
to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.

[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons 3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
are changed from gray-out to active display. - When the USB memory is not inserted, “INSERT A STOR-
AGE E-MANUAL STORED ON” is displayed. When [OK] but-
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
ton is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
is installed.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
the watermark data install menu.)
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
The current version and the update version are displayed.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
are installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement
(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup
Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
ARM9 firmware (BOOT cannot be
installed again.)
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data
1) Use SIM56-2 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory.

2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized,
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD
3) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use card supplied as a service part.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the The firmware required for booting must be included in the SD
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can- card used in this machine. The commercially available SD
not be restored to the machine.) cards have no such data.
4) Replace the SD card with a new one.
5) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
6) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by
order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trouble in
image related memory.) the SD card.
7) Use SIM56-2 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
8) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function. The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to another
machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
trouble may be generated.
D. Procedures necessary for CF card replacement

(1) CF card data and backup
Some CF card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some CF card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the CF card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the CF card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the CF card.
The CF card includes the following data.
CF card backup
Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
ARM9 firmware (BOOT cannot be
installed again.)
S201 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
web help
spdl
UI content file
lang (message data)
Graph (graphic data)
eOSA delegator
Option font ROM
S-203 System data Setting value data (system setting/ Enable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
SIM setting data)
1) Use SIM56-2 to backup the CF card data to the USB memory.

2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized,
backup the CF card data by using the device cloning function. When replacing the CF card, be sure to use only the specified CF
3) Replace the CF card with a new one. card supplied as a service part.
4) Update the firmware to the latest version. The firmware required for booting must be included in the CF
card used in this machine. The commercially available CF
5) Use SIM56-2 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
cards have no such data.
6) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function.
When E7-A6 error occurs, there may be some trouble in the CF

card.

3. Necessary procedure and notes for replacement of the mirroring kit HDD
NOTE:
Terminology and contents
Mirroring information: When the mirroring kit is installed and the power is turned ON, the mirroring information is written into the L-2 partition of
the both HDD's.
Rebuilding: Copying operation of the whole contents of one HDD to the other HDD.
Forcible rebuilding: Erasing the mirroring information in the HDD and rewriting new information.
When the mirroring kit is installed, the two HDD's are named HDD1 and HDD2.
HDD1: Mirroring kit HDD
HDD2: Standard HDD for the machine
The status of each HDD can be checked with SIM62-20.
Outline / Description Items
Kinds of errors and remedies A. Causes and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed
B. Causes and remedies when the E7-03 error display is popped up
Specified remedies for each error C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine
(Details of remedies and procedures) D. Replacement procedures of both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine
E. Note for reuse of HDD
Mirroring kit status and status icons

When the mirroring kit is installed, one of the following icons is displayed on the operation panel.
Icon Mirroring kit status
Mirroring kit installed
Mirroring kit/HDD trouble
Mirroring kit/Rebuilding
A. Causes and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed

(When the icon shown below is displayed)
Display screen
1) When one HDD goes into trouble, the UI icon which indicates HDD trouble of the mirroring kit is displayed.
2) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles (When the icon of HDD trouble is displayed)
HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK - A - A A
NONE A - - - -
REBUILDING - - - - -
ERROR A - - - -
TROUBLE A - - - -
3) Refer to the table below and check to confirm the remedy.

Table: Causes of troubles and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed
Case State Cause Remedy

A One HDD status is OK. ? The HDD which indicates the status other than ? Replace the HDD. (Perform "C. Replacement procedures of the
The other HDD status is other OK is in trouble. HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine")
than OK. ? Connection failure of the connectors and ? Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform "C. Replacement procedures
harness of the mirroring kit of the HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine")
4) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.

B. Causes and remedies when the E7-03 error display is displayed
1) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
Refer to the table of "Causes of troubles and remedies when the E7-03 error occurs" and perform the necessary procedures.
Backup the data from the HDD without trouble first.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles
HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK B B or C B B B
NONE B or C C C C C
REBUILDING B C F F F
ERROR B C F F F
TROUBLE B C F F D or E
2) Refer to the table below, and check to confirm the remedy.

Causes of troubles and remedies when the E7-03 error occurs

B When at least one HDD is ? Communication trouble through the SATA ? Replace the cable. Remove and connect.
OK. harness of HDD. ? Replace the HDD which indicates other than OK. (Perform
? Trouble of HDD which indicates the status procedures of "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the
other than OK. mirroring kit or that of the machine.")
? Broken data in HDD ? Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
? The mirroring side HDD is normal. The machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
machine side HDD is in trouble or rebuild both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
operation is not completed.
? RAID PWB trouble
C When at least one HDD is ? Communication trouble through the SATA ? Replace the cable. Remove and connect.
NONE. harness of HDD. ? Check connection between the mirroring kit and the HDD.
? Connection failure between the RAID PWB ? Replace the HDD which indicates NONE. (Perform procedures of
and the HDD. "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
? HDD trouble that of the machine.")
? HDD SATA harness and connector trouble ? Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
? Both the mirroring side HDD and the machine "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
side HDD are in trouble. that of the machine.")
? RAID PWB trouble ? Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
D When in TROUBLE- ? RAID PWB trouble ? Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
TROUBLE. ? (Both or one) HDD trouble "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
? Raid PWB is in trouble. The mirroring side that of the machine.")
HDD is normal. The machine side HDD is ? Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
other than OK. machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
E When in TROUBLE- ? The mirroring kit is composed of HDD's which ? Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
TROUBLE. (Occurring when have different mirroring information each other. machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
replacing the HDD) (A HDD which has been used in the mirroring both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
kit of another machine is used.)
3) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.
Causes and remedies when cases B, C, D, and E are not applicable

F Other than cases B, C, D, ? RAID PWB trouble ? Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
and E ? Both HDD's trouble "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
that of the machine.")
? Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of

C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the D. Replacement procedures of both of the HDD of
mirroring kit or that of the machine the mirroring kit and that of the machine
(Details of the remedies and the procedures) (Details of the remedies and the procedures)
? When replacing the mirroring kit, follow the replacement proce- (1) Work contents and procedures
dures of the HDD of the mirroring kit only.
Data backup
(1) Work contents and procedures
Step 1 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX,
Data backup use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card
NOTE: to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the
When E7-03 error code is displayed, procedures of Step 1 and PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give
the backed up data to the use.
Step 2 are nor required.
Step 1 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By HDD replacement procedures
servicing) Procedure Procedure
Use SIM56-2, the device cloning, or the storage backup Condition When two new HDD's (blank)(*1) (service part) are used for
function to save the data. (Back up the data to the PC or a the both.
USB memory.)
Step 2 Replace the both HDD's (as well as the RAID PWB if
(Data which can be backed up: Address book data, image
necessary). (*2)
send registration data, user authentication data)
Step 3 Set DIPSW2 of the mirroring
Step 2 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By the
kit to ON, and turn on the
user or by servicing)
main power of the machine.
Back up the data to the PC by Web page.
 Forcible rebuilding is
(Data which can be backed up: Document filing data, JOB
executed.
log data)
 Check to confirm that the
Step 3 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX, E7-03 error (HDD trouble)
use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card does not occur and that the UI
to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the icon which indicates
PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give installation of the mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to
the backed up data to the use. confirm that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/
HDD2=OK/OK.
HDD replacement procedures
Step 4 Turn OFF the main power of
Procedure Procedure the machine, and set DIPSW2
Condition When a new HDD (blank)(*1) (service part) is used. to OFF. Then, turn ON the
Step 4 If HDD1 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the mirroring kit. If main power of the machine
HDD2 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the machine. (*2) again.
Step 5 Boot the machine. Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
 Rebuilding is automatically executed. is cleared in order to ensure consistency between the HDD
 Check to confirm that E7-03 error (HDD trouble) does not data and the image memory and to prevent against
occur, and that the UI icon which indicates rebuilding of the malfunctions. (Not only the FAX model, but also the scanner
mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM 62-20 to confirm that the and the Internet FAX models require memory clearing.)
status of the replaced HDD is displayed as REBUILDING. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the e-Operation Manual data to the
Step 6 It takes about one hour to complete rebuilding. HDD.
Step 7 Check to confirm that the UI icon which indicated installation Step 7 The trouble code "U2-60" is displayed.
of the mirroring unit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to confirm  Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data to the HDD.
that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/HDD2=OK/OK.  Use SIM16 to cancel the U2-60 error.
E. Note for reuse of HDD

When replacing the HDD for the mirroring kit, be sure to use a new
HDD.
If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is used for replac-
ing the HDD, the operations and the data cannot be assured.
If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is installed, the
original data may be erased.
If, however, the mirroring information of the HDD is erased by RIB
Buster as described later, it can be used. (*1) In addition, if the both
HDD's are replaced with HDD's which have been used, SIIM62-1
must be executed to format HDD's in addition to erasing the mirror-
ing information.
When removing the HDD after installing the mirroring kit, be sure to
remove the both HDD's together.
If only one HDD is removed then it is reinstalled, the data of both
HDD's may not be identical, causing an error.
When removing the HDD and performing some work, first discon-
nect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB and perform the
work.
With the above procedure, the both HDD's are brought into the sta-
tus disconnected from the machine.
Put mark on the mirroring kit HDD and the machine HDD to indi-
cate that they have been used. (*2)
*1: Refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information."
*2: Refer to "5-B. How to check the usage history of a HDD in a
mirroring kit."

4. Note for installing and repairing the mirroring kit
When installing or repairing the mirroring kit, fully understand the following descriptions to avoid erroneous handling and procedures. When a
HDD which has once been used for the mirroring kit is reused without proper preparation, it may cause an error and destruction of user data, or
other troubles.
The following three cases must be strictly avoided.
- When newly installing a mirroring kit, do not use one which has been previously used.
- When replacing the HDD because of a HDD trouble, do not replace it with a HDD which has been previously used in a mirroring kit.
- When replacing the HDD because of a HDD trouble in the machine, do not replace it with a HDD which has been previously used in a
mirroring kit.
NOTE:
When a HDD is once used in a mirroring kit, the mirroring information is written into the HDD. This causes a trouble by erroneous using.
The details of inhibited items, results of erroneous procedures, and precautions for avoiding those errors are described below.
A. Details of inhibited items

(1) When newly installing a mirroring kit, do not use one which has been previously used.
Trouble contents
If HDD1 which has been previously used is used for new installation of a mirroring kit, the data in HDD1 will be written into HDD2. This causes
erasure of the original user data, freeze of the machine, or other troubles. The "HDD which has been previously used" includes a HDD which
was just installed and connected only.
Before installation of the mirroring kit Rebuild
Mirroring kit which has been once used

MFP control RAID PWB
PWB MFP control RAID
PWB controller
Data
User data overwriting
Rebuild start during
rebuilding
No mirroring Mirroring Mirroring

information information A information A
HDD1 HDD2
HDD
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Machine side
Approx. after 1 hour
Installation of a mirroring kit which has been once used

Rebuild complete o The HDD1 data is overwritten into the user data
Mirroring kit which has been once used area of HDD2.
RAID PWB Mirroring kit which has been once used
MFP control RAID RAID PWB
PWB controller MFP control RAID
PWB controller
User data
Mirroring No mirroring
information A information Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A
HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side
Boot o The mirroring information is written.
Since HDD1 acts as the master, the HDD1

Mirroring kit which has been once used
data is overwritten into HDD2, erasing the
RAID PWB
MFP control user data of HDD2.
PWB RAID
controller
Since the mirroring User

information area in data
HDD2 is empty, the write
mirroring information is
Mirroring Mirroring
written into it. information A information A
HDD1 HDD2
Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been previously used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before
installation. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")

(2) When replacing the HDD in case of a trouble in the HDD, do not use a HDD which has been used in another
mirroring kit of another machine.
Trouble contents
If a HDD which has been used in another mirroring kit, the RAID controller cannot recognize the HDD, causing E7-03 error, and the necessary
data may be destroyed in some cases.
A HDD which has been used in a

HDD trouble mirroring kit is installed.
Mirroring kit
Mirroring kit RAID PWB
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
MFP control RAID PWB controller
PWB controller
User data User data

Used
User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring
Mirroring Mirroring information X information A
HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2

Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side
Removing the HDD in trouble The RAID controller cannot recognize both HDD's.
Mirroring kit Mirroring kit

RAID PWB RAID PWB
MFP control MFP control RAID

RAID
PWB controller PWB controller
??????
Remove.
User data
User data User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A information X information A
HDD1 HDD2
HDD1 HDD2
Since the mirroring information of both HDD's

does not synchronize each other, the RAID
controller cannot recognize both HDD's.
oE7-03 error occurs.
The user data may be erased and the machine
may freeze in some cases.
Countermeasures
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")

(3) When the HDD is replaced because of a HDD trouble, do not use a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit of
another machine.
Trouble contents
In the case of a machine produced before March/2011
If a HDD which has been used in another mirroring kit is installed, the operation and the data safety cannot be assured. If a HDD which has
been used in another mirroring kit is installed, the original data may be erased.
Support from production of May/2011.
E7-A5 error occurs. If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is used as the machine HDD, the machine does not operate normally.
In this case, the trouble of erasing the original data is avoided.
Remove the mirroring kit from the machine.
Mirroring kit
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
PWB controller
Remove. User data User data
Mirroring Mirroring
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side MFP main unit side
Boot o The error message is displayed.
MFP control
PWB
User data
E7-A5 error occurs.
Mirroring The machine cannot be operat ed.
information A
HDD
MFP main unit side
Countermeasures
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")
When a HDD is used without any other HDD, the mirroring information must be erased before executing SIM62-1 to format.
This procedure allows the HDD being treated as a new HDD.
When removing the HDD after installation of the mirroring kit, remove both HDD's simultaneously. If only one HDD is removed and then
installed again, the data of both HDD's may not match, causing a trouble.
[Simultaneous removal of both HDD's] Disconnect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB, and both HDD's are brought into disconnected
state from the machine.

B. How to check the usage history of a HDD in a IMPORTANT:
mirroring kit When removing or attaching a HDD to the HDD case, be sure
As stated before, when installing a mirroring kit or replacing a HDD, to disconnect the USB cable from the PC in advance.
be sure to check the usage history of a HDD or a mirroring kit which If this precaution is ignored, the HDD may be damaged.
is to be used. 2) Copy the RIB Buster software files (RIB Buster {YYYYM-
For convenience of checking the usage history, put a mark on the MDD}.exe and Setup.ini) to a same directory of the PC.
mirroring kit HDD and the machine HDD when installing them to ? RIB Buster{YYYYMMDD}.exe
indicate that they have been used. ? Setup.ini
3) Connect the PC and the USB HDD case unit assembled in
procedure 1) with the USB cable.
C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information

Be deleting the HDD mirroring information, the HDD can be used
under the mirroring kit environment.
(1) Necessary tools
4) Double-click RIB Buster {YYYYMMDD}.exe to boot the RIB
? RIB Buster software
Buster software.
The software is composed of the following two files. (They can be
If the user account control is ON in VISTA or Windows 7 set-
downloaded from Tech DS Web site.)
ting, the user account control menu is displayed. Click [Allow]
? RIB Buster{YYYYMMDD}.exe on this menu.
? Setup.ini
? Commercially available USB HDD case unit (SATA support)
5) Select the target HDD to delete the mirroring information.
? USB cable
? Windows PC
(Support OS: Windows XP, Windows VISTA, Windows 7 (32/
64bit)
(2) Procedures
1) Assemble the HDD (the mirroring information of which is to be
deleted) to the USB HDD case unit (SATA support), and con-
nect the USB cable.

6) Click [Clear RIB in HDD] button. Phenomenon 2
The mirroring information has not been deleted normally.
Cause Temporary communication trouble, cable or other

device trouble, HDD trouble
Countermeasures 1. Click [Clear RIB in HDD] button again.
2. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 1. ,
disconnect and connect the cable, change the
devices, and reboot the RIB Buster. Then execute
procedure 1. .
7) Click [OK] button. (The mirroring information is deleted.)
8) After completion of deleting the mirroring information, "OK" is

displayed.
Phenomenon 3
Though the target HDD is connected, it is not displayed.
Cause The target HDD is not registered in the Setup.ini file.

Cable or other device trouble, HDD trouble
Countermeasures 1. Reboot RIB Buster, and click the frame section.
2. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 1. , replace
the Setup. ini file and the RIB Buster {YYYYMMDD}
(3) Kinds of errors, causes and remedies with the latest version, and execute procedure 1. .
3. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 2. ,
Phenomenon 1 disconnect and connect the cable, change the
An error indicating an abnormality in the Setup.ini file when booting devices, and reboot the RIB Buster. Then execute
the RIB Buster software. procedure 1. .
Cause Setup.ini file does not exists, or there is any

abnormality in the file.
Countermeasures Check to confirm that there is Setup.ini file in the
proper directory and that there is no abnormality in
the descriptions.

MX-M503N
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE 2. Details
Service and operation procedures
Manual
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page
1. General exclusively used for the serviceman
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page 1) Boot a browser program.
exclusively used for the serviceman. 2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the
Menu/Item Function and content servicing page menu.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting Default password: "service"
contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and
other resources are downloaded to the HDD MX-XXXX
and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting
information in XML format. By importing the
export file to the other device, the setting values
and setting contents of the device can be
copied to another device. This function is useful
to set the same setting to two or more machines
efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data
in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the
screen is shifted to the setting screen of user B. Output of Test Page
management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the
Favorite Operation Group by authority of the MX-XXXX
serviceman. (Select among preset items.)
Job Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
Log View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Syslog Administration Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
*1 Settings
Storage/Send Keep all the items selected.
Settings
Save/ Delete Used to save or delete the log data.
Syslog
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs.

When submission of the log data file is requested in order to
troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data
file to the client PC. 1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.
When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
C. Font/Form Download
MX-XXXX
MX-M565N SERVICE WEB PAGE 10 – 1

(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro E. Filing Data Backup
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro) MX-XXXX
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press (1) Export
Yes key. 1) Select the folder to be backed up.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
The file in the HDD is deleted. index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time 2) Click "Execute" button.
1) Click "Initialize" button. Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
name: *****.bin)
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
OK key. 3) Click "Update" button.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. (2) Import
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files 1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
can be set to write protect. 2) Click "Execute" button.
D. Device Cloning The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.
MX-XXXX
F. User Control
MX-XXXX
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
G. User Control 2
(1) Export MX-XXXX
1) Select an item to be backed up.

2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be set in advance.)
entered. (Example of use)
3) Reboot the machine. The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
mode for servicing work.

H. Job Log I. Update of Firmware
(1) Save Job Log
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job 2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
Log to save it.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
(2) View Job Log firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now
processing..." is displayed.
MX-XXXX
J. Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
MX-XXXX
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,
all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.

(2) Storage/Send Settings (4) View Syslog
Keep all the items selected.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
K. Machine ID Setting
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and 1) Enter the machine ID.
press OK key. Max. 30 digits of numeral figures and characters can be
entered.
2) Press the registration button.
NOTE: The machine ID can be set with SIM26-7 as well as this
function.

L. Administration Settings (Menu display setting)
This setting is to select whether to display all the menus of Web
Page on the machine display or to display only the restricted sys-
tem setting menu of the default.
Setting must be executed according to the user request.
1) Press the setting execution button corresponding to the dis-
play mode.
MX-XXXX

MX-M503N
[11] SPECIFICATIONS Service Manual
Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
1. Basic specifications 8mm or less
FR total: 4mm2mm or less
A. Base engine
(1) Type (8) Engine speed (ppm)
a. In case of tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
Type Desktop
Paper 36 cpm 46 cpm 56 cpm
(2) Engine composition Paper size
type machine machine machine
Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 17 22 26
Photo-conductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: 30mm) paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 20 26 30
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development 8.5" x 13.5"
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 25 32 35
Transfer system Transfer roller B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
Cleaning system Counter blade A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 23 28
Fusing system Heat roller A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 36 46 56
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle Extra, User-Extra: 16 20 25
system Paper width 150mm or less
Extra, User-Extra:
(3) Dimension / Weight Paper width over 150mm
Heavy A3, 11" x 17", 8K 15 15 15
Outer dimension (W x D x H) 618 x 713x x843 mm
paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 17 17 17
Machine dimension with the 925 x 713 mm
8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
bypass tray extended
8.5" x 13.5"
(W x D).
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 21 21 21
Weight Main unit Approx. 78 kg 171 lbs
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
(including OPC
drum) A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 23 25
(not including A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 32 32 32
consumables) Extra, User-Extra: 15 15 15
Paper width 150mm or less
(4) Warm-up Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width over 150mm
Warm-up time 12 seconds or less
Pre-heat Yes b. In case of manual paper feed tray paper feeding
(5) First copy time Paper

Paper size
36 cpm 46 cpm 56 cpm
type machine machine machine
Engine 36 cpm machine 46 cpm machine 56 cpm machine Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 17 22 26
Platen 4.5 second 3.9 second 3.7 second paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 20 26 35
DSPF 7.4 second 7.0 second 6.6 second 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5"
A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, B5 32 41 48
* Measuring conditions: A4 (8.5" x 11") B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 23 30 35
(6) Engine resolution A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 23 28
Copy Print 12" x 18", A3W *1 16 20 25
Resolution 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi Extra, User-Extra:
*1 9600(equivalent) x 600dpi 9600(equivalent) x 600dpi Paper width 150mm or less
1200 x 1200dpi 1200 x 1200dpi Extra, User-Extra:
Gradation 600 x 600dpi 4bit 600 x 600dpi 1bit, 4bit Paper width over 150mm
*2 9600(equivalent) x 600dpi 1200 x 1200dpi 1bit Heavy A3, 11" x 17", 8K 15 15 15
1200 x 1200dpi 1bit paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 17 17 17
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5"
*1: Default resolution (Copy) A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, B5 25 25 25
- Printed photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph: 1200dpi B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 21 21 21
- Automatic, Text, Text/Printed photo, Map: 600dpi A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 22 22
*2: Equivalent to 256 gradation
12" x 18", A3W *1 15 15 15
(7) Printable area Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width 150mm or less
A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 279 x 432mm Extra, User-Extra:
A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm Paper width over 150mm
B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm Envelope 17 17 17
A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm Postcard HIGH *2 25 25 25
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm Postcard LOW *2 15 15 15
A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm OHP (A4, 8.5" x 11") 25 25 25
Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm OHP (A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) 21 21 21
8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm *1: ppm when exiting to the finisher (A3W/12" x 18" cannot exit to
the center tray)
* The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the A3/ *2: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
11" x 17" page dimension (297 x 450mm) by PCL/PS driver. before shipment.
MX-M565N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 1
2 : ‘16/Jan
(9) Power source Ethernet 1 port
NOTE: Check the shape of the power plug of the machine, and Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
1000Base-T
insert it into a power outlet of the acceptable shape.
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/
100V series 200V series Protocol SPX, EtherTalk
Voltage / Current 100 - 127V 12A 220 - 240V 8A USB 2.0 (Host) The ports on the front and on the side of
* Simultaneous connection the rear section cannot be used
Frequency 50/60Hz
is inhibited. The total simultaneously. (Exclusive use)
Power source code Fixed type Inlet
current consumption must
(Direct connection)
not exceed 500mA.
Power switch 2 switches
USB 2.0 (high speed) Device 1 port
(Primary switch: in the front cover;
Scanner expansion I/F Yes
Secondary switch: the operation panel)
Memory slot 1 slots
(10) Power consumption b. Memory, hard disk
100V series 200V series
SD card 4GB
Max. Rated Power 1.44kW 1.84kW
HDD*1 320GB
Consumption *1
MFP PWB Image process 2GB (STD)
Moving time to Pre-heat mode 1 minutes (default)
Print 1GB (STD)
Moving time to Sleep mode 1 minutes (default) 16 minutes for Europe
2GB (OPT)
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification
*1: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status
heater is OFF.
(3) AR-M460N / M560N series 2
B. Controller board
a. Controller board
(1) MX-M365N / M465N / M565N series
CPU ARM11 600MHz
a. Controller board
ARM 9 400MHz
CPU ARM11 600MHz Interface
ARM 9 400MHz Ethernet 1 port
SOC Intel Atom D525 1.8GHz Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
Interface 1000Base-T
Ethernet 1 port Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/
Protocol SPX, EtherTalk
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
1000Base-T USB 2.0 (Host) The ports on the front and on the side of
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/
Protocol SPX, EtherTalk
USB 2.0 (Host) The ports on the front and on the side of
not exceed 500mA.
USB 2.0 (high speed) Device 1 port
b. Memory, hard disk
not exceed 500mA.
USB 2.0 (high speed) Device 1 port mSATA SSD 16GB
Scanner expansion I/F Yes MFP PWB Image process 2GB (STD)
Memory slot 1 slots
C. Operation panel
b. Memory, hard disk
(1) Display device
SD card 4GB
a. 10.1 inch LCD
Compact Flash 8GB
HDD*1 320GB
Size 10.1inch
MFP PWB Reus 1GB (STD)
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
SOC 2GB (STD)
Display dot number 1024 x 600 dot (WSVGA)
1GB (OPT)
Color Yes
*1: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system
Angle/position adjustment Yes
c. Wireless LAN Touch panel method Resistive touch display
(effective 2 point touch)
Type Built-in type
Compliance Wireless LAN standard protocol b. 7 inch LCD
standards IEEE802.11n/g/b
Transmission OFDM (IEEE802.11n/g) Size 7inch
method DS-SS (IEEE802.11b) Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Transmission IEEE802.11n/g/b 2.4GHz 11b’(1-14ch) 11n/g(1-13ch) Display dot number 800 x 480 dot (WVGA)
frequency range 11ng(3-11ch) Color Yes
Access method Infrastructure mode, soft AP mode LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system
Security WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA-EAP, WPA2-PSK, WPA2-EAP
(2) MX-M364N / M464N / M564N series

a. Controller board
CPU ARM11 600MHz

ARM 9 400MHz
Interface
D. Scanner section Reading gradation 10bits
Output gradation B/W : 1bit
(1) Resolution/Gradation
Gray scale : 8bit
Full color : RGB colors are 8bit each
Scanning Platen600 x 600 dpi
Resolution 600 x 400 dpi (2) Document table
(dpi) 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
DSPF 600 x 600 dpi Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
600 x 400 dpi Scanning area 297 x 432mm
600 x 300 dpi (Default)
Original standard position Left bottom reference
RSPF 600 x 600dpi
Detection Yes
600 x 400dpi (Default)
Detection size Automatic detection
In sending Internet Fax /
Scanner Fax Dehumidifying heater Supplied as a service part
Resolution Direct SMTP
(Scanner section)
(dpi) Standard
200dpi x 100dpi
(203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
100dpi x 100dpi (halftone not
(halftone not
allowed)
allowed)
Fine
200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi (203.2 x 195.6
dpi)
Super Fine
300dpi x 300dpi 200dpi x 400dpi
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
Ultra Fine
400dpi x 400dpi 400dpi x 400dpi
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi ---
Exposure lamp White LED
(3) Automatic document feeder
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder):

Scan speed Monochrome (A4 / 8.5" x 11") Color (A4 / 8.5" x 11")
Copy DSPF
Single: 85-sheet/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 4bit)
56-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 4bit)
41-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4bit)
Duplex: 170-page/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 4bit)
80-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 4bit)
N/A
50-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4bit)
RSPF
Single: 56-sheet/min (600 x 400 dpi 4bit)
38-sheet/min (600 x 600 dpi 4bit)
Duplex: 20-page/min (600 x 400 dpi 4bit)
17-page/min (600 x 600 dpi 4bit)
Fax / Internet Fax DSPF
Single: 85-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Duplex: 170-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
RSPF
Single: 56-sheet/min (200 x 200 dpi 1bit)
Duplex: 20-page/min (200 x 200 dpi 1bit)
Scanner DSPF DSPF
Single : 85-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single : 85-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 170-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 170-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
RSPF RSPF
Single: 56-sheet/min (200 x 200 dpi 1bit) Single: 56-sheet/min (200 x 200 dpi 8bit)
Duplex: 20-page/min (200 x 200 dpi 1bit) Duplex: 20-page/min (200 x 200 dpi 8bit)
Original setup direction Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position Face Up (1 to N Feeding standard)
Original transport Sheet-through method
method
Original size Standard size: (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed combination
Mix feeding available. (same system, same width)
Random feeding (feeding of different types / different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed:
either A3 or A4 and either B4 or B5; either B4 or B5 and either A4R or A5 and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
2-sided scanning is disabled during random feeding (when the RSPF is used).
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (46pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600dpi)) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
documents
Un-acceptable originals OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
for feeding. document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(Platen/DSPF/RSPF) Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11"
DSPF
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11"
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11"
* 5.5" x 8.5"R, A5R cannot be detected.
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding
Finish stamp Option
Power source Provided from main unit
Dimensions W23-13/16 x D20-5/64 x H6-3/32 inch (W615 x D512 x H159 mm)
E. Paper feed section Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
letter head, punched paper, colored paper,
(1) Type heavy paper
Paper Weight Plain paper:
Type Standard:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
1-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
Heavy paper:
feed tray
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 220g/m2)
Full option:
Paper size setting when Maximum position of paper guide width
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
shipping
feed + LCC
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
Dehumidifying heater Service parts
detection
(2) Tray 1 (Main unit) Power consumption 20W (Power is supplied from main unit)
Dimensions 583(W) x 577(D) x 382(H)
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) (W x D x H)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",
(5) Tray 2, 3, 4 (MX-DE20)
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13",
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R,
Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
5.5" x 8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
(LCC left) (LCC right)
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
Paper capacity 500 sheets 1150 850 sheets
letter head, punched paper, colored paper,
(80 g/m2) sheets (80 g/m2)
heavy paper
(80 g/m2)
Paper Weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, A4 A4,
Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index
B5, B5R 8.5" x 11" 8.5" x 11"
(106 - 220g/m2)
11" x 17",
Paper size setting when AB series; Tray 1: A4
8.5" x 14",
shipping Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 13.5",
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) 8.5" x 13.4",
detection 8.5" x 13",
8.5" x 11",
(3) Manual paper feed tray (main unit) 8.5" x 11" R,
7.25" x 10.5"R,
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) 8K, 16K, 16KR
envelope/OHP: 20 sheets
Paper type Plain paper, Plain paper, printed
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, printed paper, paper, recycled paper,
12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", recycled paper, letter head, punched
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, letter head, paper, colored paper
7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, envelope, 8K, punched paper,
16K, 16KR colored paper,
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, heavy paper
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, Paper weight Plain paper: Plain paper:
heavy paper, thin paper, envelope, OHP, 16 lb bond-28 lb 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond
label sheet, tab paper bond (60-105g/ (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper Weight Thin paper: m2)
13 lb bond -16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) Heavy paper:
Plain paper: 28 lb bond-110 lb
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) index (106-220g/
Heavy paper: m2)
28 lb bond - 110 lb cover (106 - 300g/m2) Paper size setting when Maximum AB series: A4
shipping position of paper Inch series:8.5 x 11
(4) Tray 2, 3, 4 (MX-DE12/DE13/DE14) guide width
Paper remaining Yes Yes Yes
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
detection (3 levels: 100%, (3 levels: (3 levels:
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 67%, 33%, none) 100%,
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", 100%,
33%, 6%,
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11" R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, 8K, 50%, 9%,
none)
16K, 16KR none)
Power consumption Power is supplied from main unit)
Dimensions (W x D x H) 583(W) x 577(D) x 382(H) Paper exit paper size/ All of allowable paper for paper feed except
type envelope, tab paper and gloss paper.
(6) Tray 5 (LCC) Shifter function No
Paper exit paper full Yes
Type 3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray detection
Transport speed 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s
Paper size A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" G. Copy functions
Paper size setting Simulation setup
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Paper size setting when AB series: A4
shipping Inch series :8.5 x 11
Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio 1: 1 0.8%
Paper type setting Yes
AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
paper type and weight Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
for paper feed letter head, punched paper, colored paper:
200%, 400%
16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
Paper capacity 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
Effective height: 385 mm
Zoom 25-400% (DSPF: 25-200%)
Paper remaining Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
Preset magnification 4 (Reduction 2/Enlargement 2)
detection
ratio
Driving form The transport motor (DC brush-less motor)
XY zoom Yes
and control PWB are built-in to LCC.
Off-center adjustment  3mm (2) Density/copy image quality process
(Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment)
Power consumption Normal operation : 26.4W Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Map
(without heater) During lift-up : 40.8W (600 dpi)
Power source 5V5% and 24V5% are supplied from main Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph
unit (1200 dpi)
External dimensions 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 x 20-15/32 inch, Number of manual steps 9 steps
(W x D x H) 370 x 575 x 520 mm Toner save mode Yes
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs, 30 kg * Available for Automatic (AE), Text/Printed
Thermal heater Standard equipment: AC power is supplied Photo
from main unit. And main unit can control ON/
OFF operation. (3) Duplex
Optional detection Auto detection system
System Non stack system
F. Paper exit section Paper size 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356),
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343),
(1) Center tray of main unit 8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340), 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330),
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
Paper exit section Center section of the Right side paper exit 5.5" x 8.5"R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
main unit section of the main 8K, 16K, 16KR
unit
Type and weight of Plain paper:
Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper exit capacity 400 sheets 100 sheets passed Heavy paper:
(A4, 8.5" x 11") (A4, 8.5" x 11") 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 220 g/m2)
Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper: Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
weight 13 lb bond -16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) letter head, printed paper, punched paper,
Plain paper: heavy paper
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper: (4) Copy functions
28 lb bond - 110 lb cover (106 - 300g/m2)
Envelope: Functions
20 - 24 lb bond (75 - 90g/m2) Automatic paper selection Yes
Shifter function Yes No Automatic magnification ratio selection Yes
Paper exit detection No Paper type selection Yes
Paper exit full detection Yes Auto tray switching Yes
Rotation copy Yes
(2) Shifter
Large rotated copy over A4 width Yes
Paper weight 15 lb bond - 110 lb index (56 - 300g/m2) Electronic sort Yes
Paper size/type Non-offset Size: Rotation sort No
mode A3W and 12" x 18" are not Job reservation Yes (99)
acceptable Tray installation priority Yes
Offset Size: Program call / registration Yes (48)
mode A3W, 12" x 18", envelope are not Program name registration Yes
acceptable Document paper size registration Yes
Type: Preview function Yes
Envelope, OHP, label paper,
tab paper and glossy paper are H. Printer function
not acceptable
Offset width 30 mm (1) Platform
(3) Paper exit tray - IBM PC/AT, Macintosh
Type Exit tray unit

Paper exit position/ Paper exit to external in the right side of the
system main unit/Paper exits in face-down position
Paper exit capacity 100 sheets (A4 / 8.5" x 11")
(2) Support OS I. Image send function
Custom Custom (1) Mode
OS PPD
PCL6 PS
Windows XP Yes Yes Yes Scanner - Scan to e-mail
- Scan to Desktop
XP x 64 Yes Yes Yes
- Scan to FTP
Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes
- Scan to Folder (SMB)
Server 2003 x 64 Yes Yes Yes - Scan to USB memory
Vista Yes Yes Yes - Scan to e-mail with Meta
Vista x 64 Yes Yes Yes - Scan to Desktop with Meta
Server 2008 Yes Yes Yes - Scan to FTP with Meta
Server 2008 x 64 Yes Yes Yes - Scan to SMB with Meta
Windows 7 Yes Yes Yes - Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Document Admin)
Windows 7 x 64 Yes Yes Yes
Windows 8 Yes Yes Yes
Fax - Fax to Fax (Manual)
Windows 8 x 64 Yes Yes Yes - Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer)
Server 2012 x 64 Yes Yes Yes - Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound rout-
Mac X 10.4 No No Yes
ing) - Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound
routing)
X 10.5 No No Yes
X 10.6 No No Yes
X 10.7 No No Yes
Internet Fax - Internet Fax to internet FAX with (Manual)
X 10.8 No No Yes - Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Inbound rout-
(3) PDL emulation ing) -
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
PCL6 compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard. (Document Admin)
PostScript 3 PS3 of Adobe Systems.
(2) Support system
(4) Font
Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Emulation Built-in fonts Option font Direct SMTP
PCL6 Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Font for bar code Corresponding SMTP/SMTP-SSL POP server
compatibility Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font = 28 fonts server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP)/FTPS SMTP server
N/A
PostScript 3 Roman outline fonts - SMB ESMTP server
compatibility = 139 fonts HTTP/HTTPS
(5) Print channel (3) Support image
USB USB.1.1: Mode Support image

USB2.0 (High Speed): Scanner File format TIFF, PDF, Encrypted PDF,
PSERVER / RPRINT for Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be (Monochrome) XPS
NetWare environment used in netware environment File format Color TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print (Color/Grayscale) PDF/A, Encrypted PDF, XPS
channel Compression system Non-compression,
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0 (Monochrome) G3 = MH (Modified Huffman)
PAP: EtherTalk Print channel to be used for Macintosh G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
(AppleTalk) environment Compression system JPEG (High/Middle/Low)
FTP Equipped with the function to print data (Color/Grayscale) High compression PDF
received via built-in FTP server Internet Fax File format TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
Raw Port (Port9100) 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported Direct SMTP (Monochrome)
HTTP (Web Submit Compression system G3 = MH (Modified Huffman)
Print) (Monochrome) G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
POP3 (E-Mail To Print) Fax Compression system MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
(Monochrome)
IPP, HTTP and POP3 support SSL. Conversion for each page to a file (Available to quantity specification)
(6) Environment setting (4) Item number of registration items

Setting item General Item No. of registration items
Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number One-touch/Group 2000 items
of copies and the print direction Max. number of registration items for one
PCL Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts group (500 items)
PS Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS Program 48 items
error, setting of binary data outputting Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter /
relay and broadcast: 100*1 / 30*2 items
(Fax)
Sender registration Fax, Internet Fax*1: 1 item
User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000*1 / 200*2 items
Transfer table list Fax, Internet Fax*1: 1 item
Sender selection 18 items
Item name 30 items
File name 30 items
Polling allow number Fax: 10 items
(5) Image processing
Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Direct Fax
SMTP
Original Black-white Yes Yes
scanning Grayscale Yes N/A
color Full color Yes N/A
Auto Color Yes N/A
Selection
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to 256 gradations levels
Density Auto Yes
adjustment Manual 5 steps
Original Text Yes N/A
document Text/ Yes N/A
type Photograph
(Selectable Text/ Yes N/A
in manual Printed
mode) photo
Photograph Yes N/A
Printed Yes N/A
photo
Map Yes N/A
Selection of image quality N/A Halftone (Black-white only)
ON/OFF
Resolution 100 x 100dpi 200 x 100dpi Normal text
(depends on file format/ (Halftone not (203.2 x
transmission method) allowed) 97.8dpi)
(Halftone not
allowed)
200 x 200dpi 200 x 200dpi Fine (203.2
x 195.6dpi)
300 x 300dpi 200 x 400dpi Super Fine
(203.2 x
391dpi)
400 x 400dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra Fine
(406.4 x
391dpi)
600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi N/A
J. Ambient conditions
(1) Working environment
(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
10 30 35
(Temperature)
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C

conditions Humidity 65  5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Atmospheric 590 – 1013 hPa
pressure (height: 0 – 2000m)
Storage period Toner/Developer:
24 months from the manufactured month
(Production lot) under unsealed state
Drum:
36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state
MX-M503N
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION Service Manual
1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
MX-M565N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

B. PCU PWB

㼁㻿㻮㻌㻷㼑㼥㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㼃㼕㻲㼕㻌㻯㻺㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟
㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕㻸㻭㻺
㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓㻵㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰㻌㻾㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻌㼛㼞㻌㻾㼍㼕㼐㻌㻼㼃㻮㻌㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺㻸㻯㻰㻌㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘㻌
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻌㻔㻠㻷㻕㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
㻴㼕㼓㼔㼑㼞㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕㻿㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㼛㼞㻌㻴㼕㼓㼔㼑㼞
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻡㼜㼕㼚㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻺㻯㻺
㻡㼂㻻⣔ 㻡㼂㻸⣔
㻿㻼㻰㻳㻴㻙㻡㼜㼕㼚
㻿㼘㼕㼐㼑㻿㻰㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢㻵㻿㻸㻤㻜㻝㻢㻯㻺
㻿㼃㻠㻳㻮㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻿㻰㻝㻳㻮㻌㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻴
㻿㼛㼏㼗㼑㼠䠄㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻝㻢㼉㻌㼤㻌㻠㼜㼏㼟䠅㻝㻚㻤㼂㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂㻼㻯㻵㼑㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻥㻲㻳㻝㻜㻤
㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽㻠㼜㼛㼞㼠
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚
C. MFP control PWB
㻿㻸㻟㻤㻜㻜㻜
㻢㻹㻮㻛㻿㼑㼏
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻿㻼㻵㻛㻿㻰㻿㻭㼀㻭㻌㻵㻲
㻿㻰㻴㻯㻌㻯㼘㼍㼟㼟㻢
㻵㻲
㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㻳㻼㻵㻻
㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻝㻳㼎㼜㼟
㻸㻭㻺㻌㻶㻭㻯㻷㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻾㻶㻠㻡㻸㻯㻰㻯㻌㻵㻲㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻼㻴㼅㻳㻹㻵㻵㻿㻯㻺㻌㻵㻲
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳
㻔㻾㼀㻸㻤㻞㻝㻝㻱㻳㻕
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞㻸㻿㼁
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻕
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻮㻌㻯㻺㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻾㼑㼡㼟㻸㻿㼁㻌㻵㻲
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟㻸㼂㻰㻿㻭㻿㻵㻯
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻭㻿㻵㻯㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻌㻯㻸㻷㻒㻿㼅㻺㻯㻕
㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻝㻛㻠㼏㼔㻕
㻔㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻕㻼㻻㻲
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻵㻺㼀㻔㼃㼍㼗㼑㼁㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕
㻾㼀㻯
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞
㻼㻵㻯㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻵㻞㻯㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻕㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀㻹㼕㼏㼛㼚㻚
㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎
㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦㻲㻭㼄㻔㻝㼟㼠㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㼁㻭㻾㼀㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻔㻝㻝㼏㼔㻕㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻵㻲㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻰㻿㼁㻮㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㻵㻯㻌㻒㻌㻼㻯㻵㻌㻒㻌
㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻾㻿㻞㻟㻞㻯
㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻠㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻝㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟㻟㻞㻹㻮
㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀
㻔㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻌㻒㻌㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻰㻿㻷㻌㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻼㻯㻵㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻝㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻌㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟㻭㻯㻾㻱㻌㻻㼜㼠㻭㻯㻾㻱
㻯㻺㻼㼃㻮㻌㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻸㻿㼁㻌㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻌
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻯㻺㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕

㻲㻭㼄㻔㻟㼞㼐㻕㻲㻭㼄㻔㻟㼞㼐㻕
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻯㻺㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻤
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㼑㼍㼞㻕㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻝
㻸㼍㼚㼑㻌㻝㻙㻠
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㼂㻳㻭㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼤㻝㻜㻿㻼㻵
㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㻭㼐㼍㼜㼠㼑㼞㻌㻯㻺㼂㻳㻭
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻰㻹㻵㻰㻹㻵㻿㻭㼀㻭㻯㻺
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㻼㼕㼚㼑㼢㼕㼑㼣
㻵㻯㻴㻤㻯㻲
㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻰㻡㻞㻡㻼㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻲㻌㻯㻺
㻯㻲
㻡㼂㻸㼋㻞⣔
㻤㻳㻮
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻔㻭㼀㻻㻹㻌㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻕㼂㻾㻰㻝㻝㻵㻿㻸㻤㻜㻝㻢
㻵㻲㻿㻹㼎㼡㼟㻸㻼㻯
㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻵㻿㻸㻢㻟㻝㻠㻵㻯㻴㻌㻝㻚㻜㻡㼂
㻟㻜㼜㼕㼚㻌㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻶㻵㻿㻸㻤㻜㻝㻢

㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜㻿㻼㻰㻔㻿㼡㼜㼑㼞㻌㻵㻻㻘㻌㻣㻿㼑㼓㻕㻼㻸㻸㻌㻝㻚㻤㼂㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂
㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻯㻼㻸㻰㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㻞㻳㻮㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻿㼘㼛㼠㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻔㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻤㼉㼤㻤㼜㼏㼟䠅㻯㻷㻡㻜㻡
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚㻮㻵㻻㻿
㻝㻳㻮㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹㻿㻼㻵㻌㻞㻹㻮
㻻㼜㼠㻚
2
2
: ‘16/Jan
USB Host
USB Key Board IC CARD Reader
HDD 2.5' TYPE-A CN LCD Panel
(Option) (Option)
320GB (Front) SCU PWB
LVDS
AR-M460N/M560N series
SATA
CN
Slide SDHC
SW 4GB
UART(1ch)
LVDS (LCD)
LVDS (Scan)
SD PCIe
USB 2.0 Host Socket DDR3 On Board USB HUB
Clock
480Mbps 2GB
Generator
USB 2.0 Host 4port
USB Host 480Mbps
TYPE-A CN DDR3-800
(Rear)
6MB/Sec
DDR2/3
SPI/SD SATA IF
SDHC Class6
IF
CN Update
GPIO USB2.0 IF
Host USB 2.0 Host
480Mbps
1Gbps SoCへ
LAN JACK FPDLINK
RJ45 LCDC IF Transmitter LVDS (LCD)
33.26MHz
FPDLINK
GMII SCN IF
EtherPHY EtherMAC Receiver LVDS (Scan)
10/100/1G 10/100/1G 39.322MHz
FPDLINK FPDLINK
USB Device USB2.0 IF Transmitter LVDS (LSU) Receiver
TYPE-B CN Device Reus LSU IF 32MHz
LSU
USB 2.0 Device
480Mbps LVDS
Receiver LVDS (LSU CLK&SYNC)
ASIC
UART(1ch) UART
ASIC
32MHz
(1ch)
INT
INT (1/4ch)
(nFAX12_PIC_INT) POF
INT
(1/3ch) I2C(1/3ch)
Controller I2C 95KHz
INT(WaleUp)
INT
(2/3ch) I2C(2/3ch)
RTC
Board to Board Connector

Controller
PIC PCU PWB
I2C UART(1ch)
INT(Sleep) 360KHz nFAX12_PIC_INT Micon.
INT
(3/3ch) I2C(3/3ch) EEPROM
Controller I2C 256kb
360KHz FAX(1st)
UART(2ch)
EtherMAC UART PCIe IF PCIe IF Local Bus
CPLD
10/100/1G (11ch) (4lane) (1lane) IF Local Bus
UART(1ch)
DSUB CN

(RIC & PCI)
UART
RS232C
Level
Converter UART(1ch)
PCIe x4 gen1 FLASH DIMM FLASH DIMM
2.5Gbps SOCKET (DSK opt.)
Serial CN1
(Vender) UART(1ch)
UART
UART
Serial CN2
(Debug) CN Update
UART(1ch)
PCIe IF
GPIO
(4lane)
FAX(2nd) LSU Mother PWB
CN UART(2ch) I2C(1/2ch) Local Bus Logic IC FLASH DIMM FLASH DIMM
I2C 95KHz Controller IF (Address Fetch & Separate) SOCKET (Program)
SOC Local Bus
P1013
UART Debug CN
(1/2ch) UART(1ch) (UART)
DDR3 SO-DIMM DDR3 SO-DIMM
Opt. 2GB SOCKET DDR3-667 DDR2/3
DDR3 On Board IF EtherMAC Debug CN
1GB 10/100 RGMII (Ether)
D. Scanner PWB
24.576
3.3Ｖ DSPFcntPWB
1.8Ｖ Page Memory
CCD-R PWB 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
（DSPF
（DSPF） Tr RGB Rx FPD Link
10Ｖ Tr
Tr
AFE
Tr SCN
3line color CCD LVDS IC Tx
Tr 19.576MHz ASIC image data
CLK
Tr AFE_CS 10Ｖ/5Ｖ/3Ｖ
CS3
12→10Ｖ CTRL_A10V 1.5Ｖ
12→5Ｖ CTRL_A5V
5→3.3Ｖ CTRL_A3.3V
3.3Ｖ
CPU
DRIVER
motor (74VHCT
H8S/2373
sensor 244)
CS2 CS0orCS1
SRAM F-ROM
DRIVER pwb LED CS4

F-ROM
LED
24VPD
12V
5V
3.3V
3.3Ｖ 5VO
To power
1.8Ｖ IT model
SCNcntPWB
CCD-Ｆ PWB Memory
Tr 128MBYTE(256Mbitx4) To CPU
10Ｖ Tr
Tr RGB
AFE
T
Tr CPUCLK L
Lotusモデル
mode
3line color CCD
Tr line buf
Tr AFE_CS 19.576MHz
(8Mx16bit)
CLK
line buf
(8Mx16bit)
Rx FPD Link
clk LVDS IC Rx
35bit
LSU-MotherPWB
10Ｖ/5Ｖ/3Ｖ 244 Buﬀer

LVDS IC Tx
SCＡN image data
28bit
ASIC
serial 3.3Ｖ 1.5Ｖ
CS3
IPD/DOCC ASIC
12→10Ｖ CTRL_A10V
12→5Ｖ CTRL_A5V CS4
RSPF UN 5→3.3Ｖ CTRL_A3.3V
1.2Ｖ
CPUCLK
Mirror 3.3Ｖ
24V MOTOR
MOTOR
DRIVER
24VPD
151他ICs 5VN E2PROM
LED LED DRIVER
24VPD FlashROM
CS0orCS6
MHPsensor
5VPWM OCSW
CS2
SRAM
CPU
5VO RSPF Power
H8S/2373
SPED uart
5VPWM
CS5
Mother PWBへ
HC151
SEL_A/B/C
sensor
5VN
IT model
MTP IC
LVDS PWB ORS LED
24V
Touch panel
CPLD
DCDC 24V
LED ・LCD sensor
backlight PNL_SEL0
Lotus : 7inch DCDC

IT : 10.1icn 3.3V 5V
Tｘ Auditor(TBD
28bit
CCFT_CPU PNL_SEL0
/CCFT
nLCD_DISP
CPLD ( ON/OFF )
Ｒｘ
image data 28bit
5V
24V LCD Power
Original size
5V
12V 12V
HOME key
3.3V 3.3V
KEY CON
/BZR 5VPWM 5VPWM
5VO
nWU_KEY
テンキー他 nPWRSW
WU_LED
POW_LED 5VO
5VO
ﾌﾞｻﾞｰﾌﾞｻﾞｰ nHOME_KEY 24V PPower

ower
ower
24VPD FET 24V
ssupply
upply
upply
HOME LED LED matrix ＬＥＤ Drive
nHOME_LED 12V CPU
WU KEY key ) INFO LED(FAX LED)
PWRSW( SW) WU KEY )

WU LED LED) WU LED LED)
POW LED LED) POW LEDmain LED)
PWRSW( SW) 5V
SC_ACK PCU PWB
PCU_REQ
ＵＳＢ CV PWB
ＵＳＢＣＮ PWB
INFO LED(FAX LED) INFO_LED
Keyboard
MX-M365N/M465N/M565N MX-M364N/M464N/M564N

E. Serial communication

F. AC power line diagram (36cpm machine) (100V)

G. AC power line diagram (46/56cpm machine) (100V)

H. AC power line diagram (36cpm machine) (200V)

I. AC power line diagram (46/56cpm machine) (200V)

12V
/BZR
DC power PWB 5VO
PANEL UN（IT MODEL）
5VO_Duty 12V
BZR
5VN 5VN 5VN
3.3V
PW-SW PWB
WU_KEY( PIC (LSU-mother)
5V_PD sensor
A3.3V A3.3V 5VO PWRSW PIC (LSU-mother)
CTRL_A3.3V LDO LDO
1.8V WU_LED
5VO(保険) PIC(LSU-mother) PIC (LSU-mother)
A10V A10V 5VO_Duty POW_LED PIC (LSU-mother)
Original detect sensor
CTRL_A10V LDO A5V A5V 5VN 5VN HM-SW PWB
5V_PD sensor
CTRL_A5V LDO CCD PWB UN 3.3V
Original width sensor
3.3V 1.5V 24VPD
Clutch＆solenoid
LDO IPD1.2V 5VN 3.3V
POF_SCN(From PIC) A3.3V SPFM（DSPF transport motor） LDO
LED
H8S LDO CTRL_A3.3V LDO LDO
PWB UN 12V SPUM（DSPF paper feed motor）
LED DRV 1.8V
A10V A10V 24VPD
CTRL_A10V LDO SLUM（DSPF liftup motor） LDO
PWB UN
A5V A5V 18V_LCD
CTRL_A5V LDO SPOM（DSPF paper exit motor）
LED 10.1 LVDS PWB
CCD PWB UN PWB UN SPFFAN（DSPF cooling FAN）
1.5V
J. DC power line diagram
24V3 24V3 24VPD LDO

FET MIM DSPF DRV PWB
FAX_WUP(LSU-Mother PIC) LED backlight LCD(10.1 inch
DSPF CNT PWB
DSPF UN（IT MODEL）
PIC
5VO
KEYBOARD
5VL FAX UN（JAPAN ONLY） SCNcnt PWB UN RSPF UN（LOTUS MODEL） PIC(LSU-mother)
5VO
1.8V PIC LSU-mother) 5VO
5VO_Duty INFO_LED(FAX receivingLED)
DCDC Original detect sensor FRONT USB
5VN
1.9V 5V_PD sensor
3.3V
DCDC SH7706 Original width sensor
IC CARD READER WIFI
3.3V 24VPD
G-Array clutch＆solenoid
24V1
SPFM（RSPF transport motor）
SPUM（RSPF paper feed motor）

RSPF DRV PWB PANEL （LOTUS MODEL)
5VL VBUS
SW
5VHD 12V
5VO_Duty BZR
MFP-OPE PWB
FET POF_MFPC(PIC) RAID WU_KEY PIC (LSU-mother)
REQ_PIC(PIC) HDD
UART （OPTION 5VO PWRSW PIC (LSU-mother)
PIC SOC REQ_PIC_INT(PIC) (2.5")
IT ONLY） WU_LED
3.3V PIC (LSU-mother)
NETWORK / USB KEYCON
ARM9 FAX_WUP(LSU-Mother PIC制御) POW_LED PIC (LSU-mother)
5VO 5VO 5VO

PIC
5VL 5VL 5VL ANY KEY
2nd FAX UN（OPTION）
5VN
3rd FAX UN（OPTION JAPAN ONLY）
1.8V 5VN 3.3V
3.3V LDO
LDO
DCDC
LSU-MOTHER PWB UN LSU ASIC MFP PWB UN 1.9V LED

24VPD
1.5V
DRIVER 7.0 LVDS PWB
12V LDO DCDC SH7706
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V

G-Array
24V1 24V1
LED backlight LCD(7 inch)
24V1
PGM ACRE
5V_LD
5VO LD （OPTION KEYBOARD
IT ONLY） PIC制御(LSU-mother)
LD PWB UN
5VO
INFO_LED(FAX receivingLED)
24V1 DSW_R DSW_F FRONT USB
DS W - R DS W - F
6.3A
PCU(H8S)
PCU PWB UN 5VN_PD IC CARD READER
FET 5VN_PD sensor
5VN
5VN sensor
5V_LD
FET 5VN
COIN
24V3 24V3
VENDOR
OPTION
6.3A

INT24V1L
FET
24V3 HV PWB
5VN 5VN
HL PWB
DM（drum motor）
CPFM（paper feed motor）
12V FUM（fusing motor）
PROFM1（process FAN1）
clutch/solenoid
POFM1,2,3（cooling FAN1,2,3）
LSUFM（LSU cooling FAN）
PSFM1,2（cooling FAN1,2）
OZFM（ozone FAN）
WEBM（web motor）
OSM（shifter motor）
CLUM1,2（CS1,2 liftup motor）
24V_2 24V_2
POM（paper exit motor）
6.3A ADUM（ADU motor）
24V_4
RRM（PS motor）
24V_5
6.3A PFM（PS front motor）
3.3V 3.3V
6.3A H8S PMC ASIC CPLD
DCCNT2 DCCNT1 24V_5 5VN 24V_4 5VN

FW(DCDC PWBから) OP T I ON OP T I ON
POF_PCU(LSU-Mother PICへ)
OFF_CNT RY_CNT
LCC DESK FINISHER
(LSU-Mother PIC (LSU-Mother PIC)
2. Actual wiring chart
A. AC Power supply section (P1)
OPTI ON PCI
＜欧州向/その他の200V仕向地＞

B. DC Power supply section (P2)
DHAI - 5237FCPZ：har ness OR

DHAI - 5224FCPZ：DC mai n har ness OR

C. Fuser unit section (P3)
HL_US(subﾞ)

D. High voltage section, Fan section (P4)
DCPWB上

E. Right door unit section, Manual paper feed unit section (P5)
※ビスで共締
右排紙ﾄﾚｲ36UN(For Japan)
（NC)
R// P4- 32S- C( 01) ／ QR/ P4- 32P- C( 01)
QR

F. Paper feed unit section, PS unit section (P6)

G. DV unit section, Stepping motor section (P7)
DHAI - 3412FCZZ：DM dr i ve har nes s
（右ﾄﾞｱUN）
ADUM中継

H. Paper delivery unit section (P8)
DHAI - 3412FCZZ：DM dr i ve har nes s
DHAI - 5240FCPZ: POD1ﾊｰﾈｽ OR

DL基板

I. LSU section (P9)

J. FAX section, MFP section, HDD section (P10)
DHAI - 4708FCPZ: RAI D SATAｹｰﾌﾞﾙ- AR
DHAI - 5376FCPZ: SATAｹｰﾌﾞﾙ OR

【IC-Card Reader】【Keyboard】【Front USB】【Wiﬁ I/F】
DHAI - 4762FCPZ：USB mi ni har nes s J P- AR
直付

K. Finisher, Desk, LCC, Coin vender section (P10)

L. 10.1 inch operation system (P11A)
直付
ｺﾈｸﾀ
（NC)
DHAI - 5220FCPZ：SCN har ness OR

M. 7.0 inch operation system (P11B)
ｺﾈｸﾀ
日本向のみ
（NC)
（NC)
DHAI - 5220FCPZ：SCN har ness OR

N. Scanner unit section (DSPF model) (P12A)
DHAI - 4688FCPZ：SCNLED har nes s - AR
直付

O. Scanner unit section (RSPF model) (P12B)
DHAI - 4688FCPZ：SCNLED har nes s - AR
直付
（NC)

5V(sensor)
5V(ｾﾝｻｰ) 5V(sensor)
5V(ｾﾝｻｰ)
P. DSPF unit section (P13)
cooling fan
5V(sensor)
5V(ｾﾝｻｰ)

5V(ｾﾝｻｰ)
5V(sensor)
Q. RSPF unit section (P14)
ＰＳ
RSPF給紙ﾊｰﾈｽAR
SPFＭ

3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
name "L" "H" No. No. name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN6 18 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADUM ADU motor Drives the ADU section. – – CN14 B5,B6 PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] ,B7,B 4-phase signal.
8
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN6 14 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN6 11 PCU
[Transmission type] medium stream section.
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN13 21 SCN
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the ON OFF CN8 3 SCN
document for the CCD to scan
the document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 paper upper limit Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Upper limit – CN9 A4 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 paper upper limit Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Upper limit – CN5 11 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 B2 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN5 8 PCU
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN9 A7 PCU
[Transmission type] 1.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN5 13 PCU
[Transmission type] 2.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN12 4 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN5 2 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller 2 in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass – CN9 A10 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 1.
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass – CN5 15 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 2.
[Transmission type]
CPFM_CK Paper feed motor drive Changes the paper feed – – CN12 9 PCU Pulse input
frequency [Brush-less motor] section speed.
CPFM_D Paper feed motor start/stop Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN12 8 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor – Lock CN12 7 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN12 2 PCU
tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN5 1 PCU
tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN7 2 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity during lifting up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN5 20 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity during lifting up.
CSS11 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN9 B4 PCU
CSS21 Tray 2 paper size detection 1 Tray 2 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN5 12 PCU
DL Discharge lamp Discharge on the drum surface OFF ON CN11 B4 PCU
DM_CK Drum motor drive frequency Changes the drum section – – CN15 B10 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor] speed.
DM_D Drum motor start/stop Drives the drum section. Drive Stop CN15 B9 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
DM_LD Drum motor lock detection Detects the drum motor lock. – Lock CN15 B7 PCU
detection
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects open/close of the ADU Open Close CN6 12 RD I/F
detection [Transmission type] cover.
DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/ Detects open/close of the tray Open Close CN9 A13 PCU
close detection 1 transport cover.

DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN13 1 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN13 4 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor,
LSU laser power line.
DVCH1 Developing check 1 Detects the destination of the Detection – CN15 A8 PCU
developing unit 1.
developing unit 2.
developing unit 3.
FPFD Fusing front paper pass Detects paper pass in front of Pass - CN16 A5 PCU
detector fusing section
FRS Lower separation pawl Controls separation pawl ON/ ON OFF CN16 A10 PCU
solenoid OFF
FUM_CK Fusing motor drive frequency Changes the fusing section – – CN11 B10 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor] speed.
FUM_D Fusing motor start/stop Drives the fusing section. Drive Stop CN11 B9 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. – Lock CN11 B8 PCU
detection
HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN17 B10 PCU
control relay.
HLout_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN17 B11 PCU
main.
HLout_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN17 B13 PCU
sub.
HLout_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up OFF ON CN17 B12 PCU
operation of the heater lamp.
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home – Home CN15 5 PCU
position. position
HUD_DV Developing section humidity Detects the developing section – – CN15 A2 PCU Analog
detection humidity. detection
LSUFM_LD LSU cooling fan lock detection Detects cooling fan lock – Lock CN17 A10 PCU
detection
LSUCFM_V LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU. Stop Drive CN17 A8 PCU
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home – Home CN6 1 SCN
[Transmission type] position. position
MIM_* Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section – – CN5 1,2,3, SCN
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN6 1 PCU
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper Pickup – CN6 3 PCU
(Manual paper feed) pickup roller.
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
MPLD Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the Detection – CN6 10 PCU
detector manual paper feed tray.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the – – CN6 8 PCU Analog
width detector manual paper feed tray. detection
[Volume resistance]
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the pull-out position of – Storing CN3 25 RD I/F Manual paper
position detection 1 the manual paper feed tray. position feed unit
(Retraction position)
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the pull-out position of – Pull-out CN3 22 RD I/F Manual paper
position detection 2 the manual paper feed tray. position feed unit
(Pull-out position)
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of the Close Open CN9 3 SCN
[Transmission type] document cover
(document size detection
trigger).
OSM Shift motor [Stepping motor] Offsets the paper. – – CN10 A7,A8 PCU Drives with the
,A9,A 4-phase signal.
10
OZFM_CNT Ozone fan motor speed control Adjusts the rotating speed of – – CN10 B13 PCU Pulse (Duty)
the ozone fan motor. drive
OZFM_LD Ozone fan motor lock detection Detects the ozone fan motor – Lock CN10 B15 PCU
lock. detection
OZFM_V Ozone fan motor drive Discharges the ozone. Stop Drive CN10 B12 PCU
PCS Process control sensor light Detects the toner patch density. – – CN6 7 PCU Analog
reception [Reflection type] detection
PCS-LED Process control sensor light Adjusts the light emitting – – CN6 5 PCU Analog
emitting [Reflection type] amount of the process control detection
sensor.

PFM PS front transport motor Transports and drives the – – CN14 A1,A2 PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] registration front roller drive ,A3,A 4-phase signal.
system. 4
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from – Pass CN11 A11 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass – CN11 A2 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects paper exit to the right Pass – CN6 16 PCU
tray.
POFM1_LD POFM 1 lock detection Detects the POFM 1 lock. – Lock CN10 B11 PCU
detection
POFM1_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN10 B8 PCU
POFM2_LD POFM 2 lock detection Detects the POFM 2 lock. – Lock CN10 B7 PCU
detection
POFM2_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 2 Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN10 B4 PCU
POFM3_LD POFM 3 lock detection Detects the POFM 3 lock. – Lock CN10 A15 PCU
detection
POFM3_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 Cools the paper exit unit. Stop Drive CN10 A12 PCU
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. – – CN14 B1,B2 PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] ,B3,B 4-phase signal.
4
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass – CN9 B9 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of the Pass – CN9 B12 PCU
[Reflection type] registration roller.
PROFM1_L Lock detection Detects the cooling fan lock - Lock CN17 A12 PCU
D detection
PROFM1_V Fan motor Cools the process section Stop Drive CN17 A11 PCU
PSFM1_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN18 2 PCU
detection motor 1 lock. detection
PSFM1_V Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN18 1 PCU
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2 lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN17 A7 PCU
detection motor 2 lock. detection
PSFM2_V Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN17 A5 PCU
PSPS Separation solenoid Controls the separation ON OFF CN11 B7 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] solenoid.
PWM_ Controller cooling fan PWM Controller cooling fan. – – CN13 3 Mother Pulse (Duty)
CPUFAM control drive
* Control is
MFPC.
RRM Registration motor transport Transports and drives the – – CN14 A5,A6 PCU Drives with the
motor [Stepping motor] registration roller drive system. ,A7,A 4-phase signal.
8
RRMCNT Registration motor current Selects the registration motor Large Small CN17 17 PCU
select current. current current
SCOV Upper cover open/close sensor Detects the upper cover open/ – Open CN8 20 DSPFcnt
close.
SOCD Cover open/close sensor Detects the cover open/close. Close – CN9 10 DSPFcnt
SPED Document empty sensor Detects the document empty. Detection – CN9 14 DSPFcnt
SPFM* Transport motor Drives the transport motor. – – CN8 6,7,8, DSPFcnt
9,10,
11
SPLS1 Document size sensor 1 Detects the document size. Detection – CN7 2 DSPFcnt
SPLS2 Document size sensor 2 Detects the document size. Detection – CN7 5 DSPFcnt
SPM* Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed motor. – – CN8 12,13, DSPFcnt
14,15,
16
SPOD Paper exit sensor Detects paper pass. Detection – CN2 8 DSPFcnt
SPPD1 No. 1 paper feed sensor Detects paper pass. Detection – CN9 3 DSPFcnt
SPPD2 No. 2 paper feed (PS front) Detects paper pass. Detection – CN9 4 DSPFcnt
sensor
SPPD3 No. 1 (front surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection – CN9 9 DSPFcnt
front sensor
SPPD5 No. 2 (back surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection – CN2 4 DSPFcnt
front sensor
SPWS Document width sensor Detects the document width. – – CN7 8 DSPFcnt Analog
detection
SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN8 18 DSPFcnt
STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the finish stamp. – Stamping CN8 17 DSPFcnt
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density. – – CN15 A10 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TDSC Toner supply clutch Controls toner supply. ON OFF CN15 B6 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch]

TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper Full – CN11 A5 PCU
[Transmission type] exit tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects the paper exit full in the Full – CN6 3 PCU
detection right tray.
TH_DV Developing section Detects the temperature in the – – CN15 A4 PCU Analog
temperature detection developing section. detection
TH_LM Low thermistor Detects the temperature - - CN16 A7 PCU Analog
detection
TH_MY Main thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN16 B6 PCU Analog
detection
TH_US Sub thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN16 B4 PCU Analog
detection
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining Detects the remaining quantity – – CN7 6 PCU
quantity detection in the waste toner box.
TNFD Waste toner box remaining Detects the remaining quantity – – CN7 9 PCU
quantity detection in the waste toner box.
TSGOUT Toner density sensor control Controls the toner density. – – CN15 A12 PCU Analog
voltage [Magnetic sensor] detection
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end. End – CN16 A2 PCU
WEBM Web motor Drives the fusing web cleaning – – CN10 A1,A2 PCU Drives with the
(Synchronous motor) paper. ,A5,A 4-phase signal.
6
WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the ON OFF CN21 3 PCU
dehumidifying heater.

MX-M503N
[13] TOOL LIST Service Manual
1. Exclusive-use tools list

For repair or adjustments of this machine, the following tools are required.
Name Parts code Purpose

DSPF shading adjustment sheet UKOG-0333FCZZ DSPF CCD unit shading adjustment
Gray scale chart UKOG-0162FCZZ Copy density and gradation check
Color test chart (AB series) UKOG-0326FCZZ Copy density and gradation check / Void area and image loss check /
Color test chart (Inch series) UKOG-0326FC11 Resolution check
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1 CCD, DSPF CCD color balance and gamma adjustment
Stearic acid UKOG-0309FCZZ Apply to the side seal on the OPC drum cleaner section.
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ Apply to the OPC drum surface
Yellow toner CKOG-0345DS51 Apply to the OPC drum surface
DV handle UKOG-0341FCZZ Rotate MG roller of DV unit
MX-M565N TOOL LIST 13 – 1

MX-M503N
[A] EXTERIOR Service
(2) Manual
Left cabinet lower/Left cabinet
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
1. Disassembly and assembly ②
A. Cabinet
q
i d
h k
p
l
①
2) Remove the desk connection lid Remove the screw, and

remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet.
j
n
g
f e
a m
o c
Parts (3) Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left

a Rear cabinet 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
b Left cabinet lower the table glass (C).
c Left cabinet
d Upper cabinet right
e Upper cabinet left
B
f Rear cabinet upper
C
g Upper cabinet rear
h Front cabinet upper
i Operation panel base plate
A
j Right cabinet front low
k Right connection cabinet
l Right cabinet rear cover
m Paper exit cover
n Paper exit tray cabinet
o Front cover
p Right cabinet front upper
(1) Rear cabinet

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
the upper cabinet left (B).
② B
A
①
MX-M565N EXTERIOR A – 1
(4) Rear cabinet upper/Upper cabinet rear (6) Right cabinet front low/Right connection cabinet/
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper lid (A). Remove the screw, and Right cabinet rear/Right cabinet front upper
remove the rear cabinet rear cover (B). 1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
① ②
②
B
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet
rear.
③
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D).
(5) Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate ③

1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
①
front cabinet upper.
C
A ⑤
E
B
② ④
(7) Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left

cabinet rear
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
2) Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base

plate.
(8) Front cover
3) Remove the photo-conductor unit.
4) Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray cabi-
net.
5) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
6) Remove the band and the hinge, and remove the front cabinet.
7) Remove the screw, and remove the front cover.
MX-M503N
[B] OPERATION PANEL Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

A. 10.1 inch operation panel
OCSW
1 2
3
6
Signal Name Function/Operation

OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch

1 HW-KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
2 PW-KEY PWB Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
3 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal / Controls the touch panel.
4 Document size detection light emitting PWB Drives the LED for the document size detection.
5 Document size detection light receiving PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
6 USB I/F PWB USB interface.
MX-M565N OPERATION PANEL B – 1

B. 7 inch operation panel
Signal Name Function/Operation

1 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal / Controls the touch panel.
3 USB I/F PWB USB interface.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
(1) General
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS
PWB, the USB/I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the
machine operation. It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for
the firmware update, USB print, and scan to USB. In addition, the
USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with
the keyboard and the IC card reader. A document size is detected
by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the docu-
ment size detection PWB (light receiving). The detection timing of
document size is determined according to the document size
detection trigger sensor signal.

3. Disassembly and assembly 3) Slide the operation panel unit to the left and put it down.
Remove the operation panel cover.
A. 10.1 inch operation panel unit
2
3
5 2
6 3
1
Parts
1 USB I/F PWB
2 LVDS PWB 4) Remove the operation panel lower cover.
3 KEY PWB
4 LCD PWB
5 TOUCH PANEL
6 HOME KEY PWB
1) Remove the operation panel cover.

1
1
1
1 2
1
1
1 5) Turn over the operation panel unit.

2 1
1
2) Remove the operation panel upper cover.
2
1
1 3
1
2
6) Remove the clamp. Peel off the mylar and disconnect the con-
nector.
1
2
1 1

Fit the flat cable edges with sections A of the Mylar, and (3) HOME KEY PWB, LCD, Touch panel
remove slack in sections B of the flat cables. 1) Disconnect the connector and remove the HOME KEY PWB.
B
A
(1) USB I/F PWB

1) Remove the USB I/F PWB. 2) Remove the LCD holder.
1 1
2
3
2
1
1
3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD.

(2) LVDS PWB
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LVDS PWB. NOTE: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD sur-
face.
2
2

4) Remove the touch panel. 4) Remove the cable from the fixing pawl.
NOTE: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the touch panel
surface.
B. 7 inch operation panel unit

1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Remove the operation panel base plate.
5) Place operation panel unit on the OC glass..
2
1
1
1
1
3) Place electrostatic prevention protection seat to OC glass and

remove the operation panel unit.
1
6) Push down the both button at the same time and pull the cable
horizontally.
3 2
1

7) When assemble operation unit back, carefully insert the cable- (1) LVDS cable replacement
and the cable with blue color should be upper side. 1) Fold the cable.
← LVDS PWB SCN CNT PWB →
SCN CNT PWB ↑
90°
Protection sheet LVDS cable
← LVDS PWB
(2) USB I/F PWB

1) Remove the USB I/F PWB.
1 3
(3) KEY PWB

1) Remove the Mylar, the earth sheet, and remove the KEY
PWB.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequence
of the Mylar and the earth sheet.
1
3
4
4 5

(4) LVDS PWB, LCD, Touch panel 4) Remove the touch panel.
1) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the CAUTION: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the touch
LVDS PWB. panel surface.
of the earth sheet.
1
1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the LCD holder.

of the earth sheet.
1 3
2
3
3 4
3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD.

CAUTION: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD sur-
face.
2
1

MX-M503N
[C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION Service Manual

A. DSPF
(1) Paper feed section
SPUM
SPFC
SCOV
SPPD1 SPED1 SLUM
STUD
SPRDMD
SPED2
STLD
SPLS1
SPWS SPLS2

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.

SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray
MX-M565N DSPF/RSPF SECTION C – 1

(2) Upper transport section
STRC
STRRC
SPUM
SPPD2

1 No.1 registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.

SPPD2 DFPS document pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the document
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Droves the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1registration roller
(3) Lower transport section
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3
SPPD5
SPPD4

1 No. 2 registration roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position
2 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from the platen roller to the transport roller 3
3 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller

SPFM DSPF transport motor Drives the transport roller.
SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3 Detects pass of the paper.
SRRC DSPF No. 2 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.

(4) Optical section
DSPF COPY LAMP

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.

1 Reflector Converges lights from the copy lamp.
2 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
3 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
4 DSPF CCD PWB Scans the document image (optical signals) and converts it into electrical signals.
(5) Paper exit section
SPOM
SPOD
STMPS

SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor Drives the document exit roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid.
No. Name Function/ Operation

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.

B. RSPF
(1) Paper feed section
SPPD2
SPM
SCOV
2 1
SPPD1
SPED
3
SPLS1
SPLS2

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.

SCOV Upper cover open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover
SPED Document sensor Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPM RSPF paper feed motor Feeds a document
SPPD1 RSPF paper pass sensor 1 Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed
SPPD2 RSPF paper pass sensor 2 Detects paper pass

(2) Transport section
SRRC
SPFM
SPPD3 SPRS
1
2
SOCD
SPPD5
4
3

1 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing
2 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section
4 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface

SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF unit
SPFM RSPF transport motor Transports a document
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Detects paper pass
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 5 Detects paper exit and switchback
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls the registration roller (Controls the timing of document transport)

2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly
A. Document size detection A. DSPF section
Size detection on the document tray No. Name
The document width is detected by the document width sensor 1 DSPF unit
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document 2 Front cabinet
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from 3 Rear cabinet
the document width and the document length as shown in the table 4 Upper door unit
below. 5 Document feed tray
When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray, 6 Document feed unit
the maximum size is detected. 7 Lamp unit
8 Optical unit
Document length sensor 9 Drive unit
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2 10 Transport drive unit
AB series A5 OFF OFF 11 DSPF driver PWB
B5 OFF OFF 12 DSPF control PWB
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF 4
A4R ON OFF 3
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF 2
A4 OFF OFF 1
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
10
8.5" x 14" ON ON 6 9
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON 8
5
7
SPWS (1) DSPF unit

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
SPLS1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Disconnect the
SPLS2 connector from the SCN Mother PWB.
3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.
2
1

4) Open the DSPF unit to put it straight up, and remove the 2) Remove the front cabinet.
screw.
2
3
2
1 4
(3) Rear cabinet

1 1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw, and remove the rear
cabinet.
1
3
1
5) Slide the DSPF unit to the rear side, and fit the step screw with
the key hole of the hinge, and lift it up to remove.
2
4
1
(4) Upper door unit

1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the sprig. Remove the pressure release axis holder
and the screw, and remove the pressure release link lever.
4 2
(2) Front cabinet

1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
1 1
3

3) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door unit. 4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle. Remove the
snap band.
3
2
1
1
5) Remove the screw, and remove the document feed unit.
(5) Document feed tray 1

2) Remove the rear cabinet.
document feed tray. 2
1 1
2 (7) Lamp unit

2 2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Open the OC mat.
(6) Document feed unit

3) Remove the screw. Remove the paper feed cover.

4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the CONTROL 7) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.
PWB
5) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the ful-
crum plate. Remove the lower door.
(8) Optical unit

1) Remove the upper door.
2 1 2) Remove the lamp unit.
3 3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.
3
4
2
6) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
white reference plate.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the optical fixing plate.

Remove the optical unit.
1
3
2
1 2

(9) Drive unit (10) Transport drive unit
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the clutch stopper, and 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the clutch stopper, and
remove the No.1 registration roller clutch. remove the No.1 registration roller clutch.
CAUTION: When assembling, check to confirm that the clutch stop- CAUTION: When assembling, check to confirm that the clutch stop-
per section is engaged with the plate. per section is engaged with the plate.
3 3
2 2
1 1
3) Disconnect the connector, and open the edge saddle. Remove 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
the snap band. Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the transport roller
clutch.
2 CAUTION: When assembling, check to confirm that the clutch stop-
per section is engaged with the plate.
4
3
2
2
1
1
3
1
4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive unit.

1 DSPF cooling fan.
1
2
1
1 1

5) Loosen the screw, and loosen the belt tension. Tighten the (12) DSPF control PWB
screw. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws. Remove
the control PWB unit.
1
2
2
1

drive transport unit.
2 3 2
1
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws. Remove
the DSPF control PWB.
(11) DSPF driver PWB

2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove
the DSPF driver PWB.

B. RSPF section b. Separation roller, Torque limiter SPF
(1) RSPF unit 1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.
No. Name
1 Document pickup roller
2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter SPF
5 Take-up torque limiter
6 Discharge brush
7 Registration roller
8 OC mat
5
7 2 2) Remove the holder, and remove the separation roller.
4
1
3
8
1
6
a. Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller

3) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
c. Take-up torque limiter

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring. Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing,
the holder, and the take-up torque limiter.
2) Remove the holder, and remove the document pickup roller,
and the paper feed roller.
6
2 7
8 5
2
3
1 2 3 4

d. Discharge brush (2) RSPF transport unit
1) Open the document tray, and remove the discharge brush.
No. Name
When replacing the discharge brush, attach a new brush to the 3 Paper exit roller
reference. 4 Scan plate
3
1
4
2
character edge reference
OO OO
square
hole
reference
᳸OO
a. Transport roller 2, Transport roller 3, Paper exit roller

e. Registration roller 1) Clean the transport roller 2, the transport roller 3, and the
1) Open the paper feed unit, and clean the registration roller. paper exit roller
f. OC mat
1) Open the RSPF unit, and clean the OC mat.
b. Scan plate
1) Clean the scan plate.

MX-M503N
[D] SCANNER SECTION Service Manual

A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
MHPS
5
3 9
MIM
7 8
6
3
21
CLI 4

CLI LED lamp unit Illuminates the document
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position.
MIM Scan motor Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit
4 No.1 mirror Reflects the document image into the No.2 mirror
5 No.2 mirror Reflects the document image into the No.3 mirror
6 No.3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document and project it on CCD
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt
MX-M565N SCANNER SECTION D – 1

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the LED lamp, and the
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description
a. Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
b. LED lamp drive R
The LED lamp (CLI) is driven by the LED lamp drive voltage gener- G
ated in the LED drive PWB according to the control signal sent from B
the scanner control PWB.
c. Image scan/color separation (Image data for 1 line)
Light is radiated to the document by the LED lamp, and the contrast
of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three lines of
RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog).
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, R G B
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). Red component Green component Blue component
image data image data image data
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue
components. This operation is called the color separation. d. Image signal A/D conversion
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
elements, R, G, and B. into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by Each color pixel has 10bit information.
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner process section.
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. CCD PWB
Analog IC
CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
R
G
R,G,B Color filter
B
Buffer
Timing
Generator
CCD Elements
e. Zooming operation
3LINES CCD UNIT Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

2. Disassembly and assembly
A. Scanner unit Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the
(1) Scanner unit figure below and secure it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
No. Name unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
1 Drive belt shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
2 Drive wire wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
3 Rails
4 Mirror 7
6
5 Reflector
4 2
6 Scanner lamp 5
7 Lens 1
8 CCD 3
9 Table glass
10 SPF glass
11 LED PWB
12 LED driver PWB 7
6
4 1 7 8 9 10
5
2
1
10 3
3
10 9 8 7 1
9
1
7
b. Rails
8
1) Remove the table glass.
2 2) Grease each rail.
5 Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive

4 6 wires.
4 If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
11
12
a. Drive belt, Drive wire

2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
out clearance.
c. Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp
2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.

3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 2 mirror. 2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
f. LED PWB, LED driver PWB

2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
plate.
d. Lens, CCD
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
1
2
3) Turn over the sheet.
When attaching the sheet to the original position, insert the L-

shape sections into the inside of the metal plate and attach the
3) Clean the lens, and the CCD. center portion to the metal plate with double-stick tape.
e. Table glass, SPF glass

1) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.

4) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the
LED driver PWB.
1
2
5) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.
1 2
6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.
2
4
3

MX-M503N
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION Service Manual

A. Manual paper feed section
PFM
CPFM
MPFS
4 MPED
MPLD
1
2
3 MPWD

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPFS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
PFM Transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
4 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the
paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
MX-M565N PAPER FEED SECTION E – 1

B. Tray paper feed section
CLUD1 4
CPFM
CPED1
HPFC
2 CPUC1
CPFC1
DSW_C
6
1
3 5 CPFD1
CSS11
CSS13 CSS12
CSS14 CLUM1
CSPD

CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit.
CLUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPED Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CSPD Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear edge detection 1 - 4.
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 The paper size of tray 1 is detected.
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
HPFC Transport roller clutch Controls the transport roller

1 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
3 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
6 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
7 Rotating plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.

A. Bypass B. Tray paper feed
The paper tray moves up and paper feed roller press the paper sur- (1) Paper feed front operation
face, separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and send-
* Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
ing it to the paper feed roller section.
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
* The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the * The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual stops at the specified position.
transport roller. (2) Paper feed operation
* When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
ing, feeding paper.
* At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
* Paper remaining quantity levels are in four steps total. Three
steps regard paper quantity remaining and one step regards
paper empty.
(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
* The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

3) Remove the cover.

A. Manual paper feed unit
No. Name
1
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit
1
2
2 4) Remove the cover.

1
(1) Manual paper feed tray

1) Open the right door, and remove the cover.
1
1
1
2
5) Remove the shaft.
2) Remove the cover. 2

1
1
2

6) Slide the tray and remove the arms.
a. Paper feed roller, Separation roller, Torque limiter
2
2) Slide the stopper and the collar, and remove the paper feed
roller.
7) Remove the cover, and remove the manual paper feed tray.
1 2 1
3
2
1
2
3) Remove the separation roller, and the torque limiter.
(2) Manual paper feed unit
No. Name
1 Paper feed roller
2 Separation roller 1
3 Torque limiter
5 Transport roller 10 (36cpm machine)
1
2 3
4 b. Transport roller 9
1) Clean the transport roller 9.
5
3
2

c. Transport roller 10 (2) Tray paper feed unit
1) Remove the paper guide, and clean the transport roller 10. 1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Remove the right door lower.
1
2
1
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit.
B. Tray paper feed section 2

No. Name
1 Paper feed tray
2 Tray paper feed unit
No. Name
1 Paper pickup roller
2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
6 Torque limiter
2
1
(1) Paper feed tray 4

1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it. 1
2
5

a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller, Separation roller
1) Remove the paper pickup roller, and the paper feed roller.
d. Torque limiter
2) Remove the separation roller. 1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
2
2 2
3
b. Transport roller 4
2) Remove the spring, and remove the reinforcement plate.

Remove the spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
2
3
1
5
c. Transport roller 2
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
2 3) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring, and the

shaft, and remove the torque limiter.
2 2
3
2
2 3

[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
RRM
PFM
1
2
PPD2
PPD1

PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between the resist roller
and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of transport roller 5.
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
3 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
MX-M565N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 1

Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller A. Resist roller unit
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch con- 1) Remove the waste toner box.
trols ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported 3) Remove the paper feed tray.
paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the resist 4) Remove the tray paper feed unit.
motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images 5) Remove the PS unit.
are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
1
3
MX-M565N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 2

[G] LSU SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
PGM
1
3 4
5
2
LSUCFM
7
6

LSUCFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.

1 LD PWB Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 f lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as
4 f lens 2 that at the center.
5 Reflection mirror for BD Laser beams for BD are reflected to the BD PWB.
6 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
A. Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum.
In this model, the 4/2-laser system is employed which radiates two
laser beams. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system from
the laser to the polygon mirror and the scanning system of the opti-
cal elements including the polygon mirror.
B. Composition
(Primary system)
(On the polygon motor)
Number of Rotating
Model Bearing
mirror surface speed
56 cpm model 6 surfaces 30118rpm OIL
46 cpm model 6 surfaces 26575rpm OIL
36 xpm model 6 surfaces MX-M365N OIL
(Scanning system) 41339rpm
MX-M364N
20669rpm
MX-M565N LSU SECTION G – 1

C. Outline of LSU specifications 4) Remove the MFP control PWB unit and LSU mother PWB.
Since the MFP control PWB and the LSU mother PWB are
Process speed 56 cpm model: 255m m/sec connected together, use care when removing and attaching
46 cpm model: 225mm/sec them.
36 cpm model: 175mm/sec
Resolution 1200dpi (MX-Mx65N)
600dpii (MX-Mx64N)
Laser beam 4 beam (MX-M465/M565N)
2 beam (MX-M365/M364/M464/M564N)
Laser power 0.25mW ～ 0.5mW
Beam diameter Main scan = 50 to 80µm, Sub scan = 60 to 90µm ①
Effective scan width 310mm
LD wavelength 780 to 800nm ②

NOTE: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
A. LSU removal
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet. 5) Remove the LSU mother PWB unit, and the HDD unit.
6) Disconnect the LSU connectors, and remove the securing
screws to remove the LSU.
3) Remove the shield plate.
NOTE: Tip the LSU slightly to insert the alignment boss into the
LSU alignment hole. To check for proper alignment,
remove the toner cartridge to check.
MX-M565N LSU SECTION G – 2

MX-M503N
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION Service Manual
OZFM1
DM
PSPS
MC
3
TNBOX
TNF

DM Drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit.
MC Main charger Charges the OPC drum surface.
OZFM1 Ozone fan Discharges ozone generated in the machine.
PSPS Separation solenoid Separation solenoid operates separation pawls which separates paper from the OPC drum.
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste toner near end and the waste
toner full.
TNF Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste toner near end and the waste
toner full.

1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the toner collection box.
4 Ozone filter Removes ozone.
5 Waste toner collection box Collects waste toner.
MX-M565N PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION H – 1

2. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Main corona unit
Screen grid
TNBOX
TNF
High voltage unit
OPC drum
CTL
CGL
Waste toner detection is performed by two sensors (TNBOX,
Aluminum layer TNF).
The following four statuses of the waste toner box are detected
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The by the two sensors as shown below.
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid. Output level Sensor status
Pattern Status
TNBOX TNF TNBOX TNF
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
1 L H Transmitted Interrupted Waste toner
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. box not
provided
2 L L Transmitted Transmitted Waste toner
box provided
+ Not full
3 H L Interrupted Transmitted Waste toner
OPC drum OPC drum box provided
+ Near end
4 H H Interrupted Interrupted Waste toner
Laser beams box provided
+ Full
Aluminum layer
CGL
CTL
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on
the OPC drum surface.

A. Photo-conductor unit
2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it.

6) Remove the process cover, disconnect the connector, remove

the blue screws. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and hold the
handle to remove the unit.

[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
CRUM DM
TDSC

CRUM Crum PWB Stores various information of the toner cartridge.
TDSC Toner supply clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply.
MX-M565N TONER SUPPLY SECTION I – 1

The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is driven by the A. Toner cartridge
drum motor to supply toner to the developing unit. 1) Open the front cover.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is turned ON/OFF
by the toner supply clutch TDSC. 2) Pull and remove the toner cartridge slowly and horizontally.
The toner density in the developing unit is detected by the toner NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and
density sensor. When the density falls below the specified level, the inset it slowly.
drum motor and the toner supply clutch TDSC are turned ON to
supply toner in the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
When the toner density reaches the specified level, TDSC turns
OFF to stop supply of toner to the developing unit.
With the above process, the toner density in the developing unit is
maintained at a fixed level.
MX-M565N TONER SUPPLY SECTION I – 2

[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
DM
TH_DV/
HUD_DV
2
TCS
1

TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
TH_DV/HUD_DV Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and humidity of the process section for process control.

1 Developing roller Forms electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
2 Stirring roller Stirs toner and developer to charge toner negatively by friction.
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
MX-M565N DEVELOPING SECTION J – 1

This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen- A. Developing unit
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
NOTE: Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV
roller surface.
OPC drum
NOTE: Be careful not to hold the case adjacent to the developing
roller strongly.
2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it.
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Non-developing Developing mode

mode
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively 3) Remove the toner cartridge.
charged due to mechanical friction. 4) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias (negative).
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
When rotation of the OPC drum is started and stopped, some area
on the OPC drum is not charged negatively. To prevent toner from
attaching to that area, a positive voltage is applied to the drum.
OPC drum
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Non-developing Developing mode

mode
MX-M565N DEVELOPING SECTION J – 2

MX-M503N
[K] TRANSFER SECTION Service Manual
PCS
1

PCS Image density sensor Detects the toner patch density on the OPC drum in process control.

1 Transfer roller Transfers toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
2 Paper guide electrode Connected to the ground through a high resistor to maintain the paper guide at a proper potential, stabilizing the
transfer operation.
3 Separation charger Applies a high negative voltage to the paper which was charged positively in the transfer process in order to
discharge it.
MX-M565N TRANSFER SECTION K – 1

2. Operational descriptions C. Toner patch density detection in the process
control
A. Transfer operation
In the process control, the toner patch density on the OPC drum is
A positive high voltage is applied to the transfer roller to transfer the detected with the image density sensor.
toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
In addition, the sensitivity of the image density sensor is automati-
OPC drum cally performed by using reflection on the OPC drum surface.
OPC drum
Separation charger
Transfer roller
Toner patch
To PCU PWB
Transfer roller
Image density sensor
Transfer mode Cleaning mode

(Constant current) A. Transfer unit
B. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning process, the polarity of the voltage applied to the
transfer roller is made negative, and unnecessary toner on the
transfer roller is sent to the OPC drum, cleaned with the cleaning
blade, and transported to the waste toner section.
OPC drum
Separation charger
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
Transfer roller
Transfer mode Cleaning mode

(Constant current)
MX-M565N TRANSFER SECTION K – 2

MX-M503N
[L] FUSING SECTION Service Manual

A. 46/56 cpm machine
WEB-END
WEBM
1 FUM
TS_UM
TS_US
TH_MY 5
2
FPFD 3
TH_US
FRS
5
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW
TH_LM
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation

FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section
FRS Lower pawl separation solenoid Controls the lower pawl separation solenoid
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp main.
HL_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp sub.
HL_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up operation of the heater lamp.
TH_MY Main thermistor Detects the temperature.
TH_US Sub thermistor Detects the temperature.
TS_UM Thermostat UM shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (center section)
TS_US Thermostat US shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (edge section)
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end.
WEBM Web motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
3 Fusing roller (Pressing) Presses toner on paper to fuse.
4 Web roller Cleans the fusing roller (heating).
5 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (pressing).
MX-M565N FUSING SECTION L – 1

B. 36cpm machine
WEB-END
WEBM
FUM
TS_UM
2
TS_US
TH_MY
2
5
1 FPFD 3
TH_US
FRS
5
HL_UM/HL_US
TH_LM
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation

FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section
FRS Lower pawl separation solenoid Controls the lower pawl separation solenoid
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp main.
HL_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp sub.
TH_MY Main thermistor Detects the temperature.
TH_US Sub thermistor Detects the temperature.
TS_UM Thermostat UM shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (center section)
TS_US Thermostat US shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (edge section)
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end.
WEBM Web motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
3 Fusing roller (Pressing) Presses toner on paper to fuse.
4 Web roller Cleans the fusing roller (heating).
5 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (pressing).

2. Operational descriptions The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with three/two heater
lamps, which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper.
A. Fusing unit drive The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber because of
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the the following reasons and purpose.
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat 1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating) is
roller gear. of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed to
Driving by the drive motor (DC Brush-less motor) is performed separate paper upward.)
according to the control signal sent from the PCU. 2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
PCU FUM deformation.
D. Fusing temperature control

The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fusing roller
B. Heater lamp drive (heating).
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermis- The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and the
tor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained at
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to the specified level.
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
E. Roller cleaning
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and The upper fusing roller is cleaned by the web.
heating the heat roller. 1) Remaining toner on the upper fusing roller is cleaned by the
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, web with silicon included.
the thermostat is provided for safety. The web unit is provided in the upper section of the upper fus-
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the ing roller, and is composed of the feeding section of the web
heater lamp is cut off. sheet, the winding section, and the backup roller which
pressed the web sheet onto the upper fusing roller.
C. Fusing operation
Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat 46/56 cpm machine.
roller.
Web roller
Fusing roller
（Heating）
Fusing roller
（Pressing）
36 cpm machine.
Fusing roller (Heating)

Fusing roller (Pressing)
Web roller Fusing roller

（Heating） Fusing roller
（Pressing）

F. Web end detection 3. Disassembly and assembly
The judgment of web end is made by the fusing web send counter
for near end, and the web life end detection, whichever is earlier. A. Fusing unit
When the web life end is detected, the warning display is made,
and the machine is stopped the operation. a
Warning display content: Maintenance required. Code: FK3
b
When the web is replaced with a new one and the web counter is
cleared, the warring display disappears. c
The new web is not automatically detected.
WEB-END
Parts
WEB-END a Thermostat (main)
b Thermostat (sub)
c Heater lamp
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit.Turn it to the arrow A direction that Web is flabby in
the state that excluded a fixation unit and may coil itself around
a roller. Never turn it to the B direction

(1) Thermostat (main/sub) 4) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the screw,
and remove the terminal. Remove the screw and the washer,
and remove the thermostat.
NOTE: When fixing the thermostat and the harness, tighten the
screws at the following torque:
1.0 - 1.2 Nm
10 - 12 kgfcm
0.7 - 0.9 lbft
5) Disconnect the connector. Remove the blue screw, and

remove the lamp holder. Remove the heater lamp.
(2) Heater lamp

2) Remove the screw, and remove the web unit.

[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. Duplex section
POD3
ADUGS
TFD3
5
4 APPD1
DSW_ADU ADUMH
3 1
APPD2

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUMH ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 13.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.
4 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to the right tray.
5 Paper exit roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
MX-M565N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION M – 1

B. Paper exit section
TFD2
HPOS
OSM
POFM_1 POM
POFM_3
POFM_2
POD2
POD1

HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Performs offset of paper.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper exit from fusing after detection fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_1 Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the paper exit unit.
POFM_2 Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the paper exit unit.
POFM_3 Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the paper.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.

A. Duplex
* Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide. 4
* When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
* By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
* The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
* Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
3
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
1 2
* Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans- 3 3
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray. a. Transport roller 7, Transport roller 8
* When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the 1) Open the ADU open/close door, and clean the transport roller
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely. 7, and the transport roller 8.
Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
charged to the right tray.

A. Right door unit
(1) Right door unit
No. Name
3 Paper exit roller 3
b. Paper exit roller 3
1) Open the right door unit, and clean the paper exit roller 3.
4
3
c. Paper exit roller 2

1) Open the right door unit and remove the cover.
Open the right door. Remove the gear, and remove the right door. 2

2) Open the right door unit, and remove the cover. B. Fusing rear unit
(1) Fusing rear unit
No. Name
1
1

2) Remove the fusing rear unit.
1
2
1 1
4) Remove the cover, and clean the paper exit roller 2.

a. Transport roller 6
1
2

C. Paper exit unit
(1) Paper exit unit a. Paper exit roller 1
1) Clean the paper exit roller 1.
No. Name
2 Discharge brush
1
2
b. Discharge brush
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. 1) Remove the holder.
2) Remove the paper exit tray.
3) Remove the paper exit unit.
2 1
2) Remove the earth plate. Remove the discharge brush.
When replacing the discharge brush, attach a new brush to the

reference.
When connecting the paper exit unit connector, rotate the harness
one turn clockwise as shown in the figure below so that the harness
faces toward the arrow A, and connect the connector. Thoroughly clean the frame surface of any old glue residue
This procedure is necessary for preventing the paper exit sensor before attaching the new seals.
from disconnecting by contact with the harness.
1
1
Bump reference
Folding reference

MX-M503N
[N] DRIVE SECTION Service
(1) Manual
Drum motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet
2) Remove the flywheel.
3) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
A. Main drive unit drum motor.
a
c
d b
Parts
a Drum motor
b Toner supply clutch
c Separation solenoid (2) Toner supply clutch
d Temperature/humidity sensor
1) Remove the rear cabinet 2) Remove the flywheel.
2) Remove the flywheel. 3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear. Disconnect the
* After installing, check to confirm that the flywheel is not in connector, remove the toner supply clutch.
contact with the harness.

main drive unit.
(3) Separation solenoid

2) Remove the main drive unit.
3) Remove the E-ring and the screw, and remove the separation
solenoid.
MX-M565N DRIVE SECTION N – 1

(4) Temperature/humidity sensor B. Paper feed drive unit
1) Remove the main drive unit.
2) Remove the drum motor and the toner supply clutch
3) Disconnect the connector from the frame. Remove the screw,
and remove the grounding plate. Remove grease from the a g
shaft.
NOTE: When reassembling, apply conduction grease (UKOG-
0012QSZZ). b
e
Conduction f
Grease
c
Parts
a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch
e Transport roller clutch
f Paper transport clutch
g Resist motor
4) Remove the E-ring, the screw, and remove the frame. 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive
unit.
5) Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and remove the
temperature/humidity sensor. Disconnect the connector from (1) Transport motor
the temperature/humidity sensor. 1) Remove the rear cabinet
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the transport motor.

(2) Paper feed motor (4) Paper feed clutch / Transport roller clutch / Paper
1) Remove the rear cabinet transport clutch
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 1) Remove the rear cabinet
the paper feed motor. 2) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
3) Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.
(3) Paper tray lift-up motor

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.

5) Remove the paper feed clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.

6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch. (5) Resist motor
resist motor.
7) Remove the gear, and remove the paper transport clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
8) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper transport clutch 1.

MX-M503N
[O] PWB SECTION Service
A. ControlManual
box

(Countermeasures against static electricity)
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
e
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag Parts
(case), use an earth band as shown below: a DIMM memory PWB (1GB)
? Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the b MFP control PWB
machine. c HDD
d PCU PWB
e LSU mother PWB
(1) DIMM memory PWB/MFP cnt PWB

1) Remove the left cabinet cover.
2) Remove the MFP shield plate the MFP cnt PWB.
? When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

procedure on an anti-static mat.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.
MX-M565N PWB SECTION O – 1

* Inserting position an inserting procedure when the DIMM 5) Release the lock, and insert the memory PWB.
memory is removed
6) Be sure to lock after inserting memory PWB.
DIMM
3) Open Stopper with your finger to release the lock holding the
memory PWB.
7) Disconnect the connector and remove the MFP cnt PWB.
4) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out.
* Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out.
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB.

(2) HDD (4) LSU mother PWB
1) Remove the left cabinet cover. 1) Remove the left cabinet.
2) Remove the MFP shield plate. 2) Remove the MFP shield plate.

the HDD unit.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the LSU mother PWB.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
(3) PCU PWB

the PCU PWB.

B. Power unit C. Others
0
b
Parts
a ACWH PWB Parts
b DC power PWB a Scanner control PWB
b HL PWB
(1) ACWH PWB c HV PWB (High voltage PWB)
2) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector, (1) Scanner control PWB
and remove the ACWH PWB. 1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screw and the scanner control PWB.
(2) HL PWB
1) Remove the paper exit cabinet.
2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
(2) DC power PWB
the HL PWB.
2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the DC power PWB.

(3) HV PWB (High voltage PWB) 4) Note for assembly of the HV PWB (High voltage PWB)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. When inserting the connector into the high voltage output ter-
2) Remove the scanner control PWB. minal of the HV PWB (High voltage PWB), check to confirm
that the connector is securely inserted into the high voltage
output terminal as shown in the photo below.
If the high voltage output terminal is on the outside of the con-
nector, it is NG.
NG NG
≒1mm
3) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the high volt-
age PWB.
OK
≒2mm
OK
NG NG

[P] FAN SECTION
MX-M503N 4) Remove Manual
Service the process duct.

A. Fan motor
d
e
c
5) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and the ozone

fan.
Parts
a Ozone fan
b Power cooling fan 1
c Power cooling fan 2
d Process fan
e LSU fan
(1) Ozone fan

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screw, and the plate.
(2) Power cooling fan 1/2

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screw, the plate.
3) Remove the process duct.
MX-M565N FAN SECTION P – 1

4) Remove the plate. 8) Remove the power cooling fan 1.
5) Remove the scanner control PWB.
(3) LSU fan

1) Remove the left cabinet.
6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and the DC

power unit.
2) Remove the MFP shield plate.
7) Remove the power cooling fan 2.
3) Remove the MFP control PWB, LSU mother PWB.

4) Remove the LSU unit. 3) Remove the MFP control PWB, LSU mother PWB.
5) Remove the screw and LSU fan.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and duct.
(4) Process fan

1) Remove the left cabinet.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw and fan.
2) Remove the MFP shield plate.

[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
MX-M503N (2) Front door
Service open/close switch
Manual
1) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close
1. Disassembly and assembly switch unit.
A. Sensor/Switch Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the front door open/close switch.
a
c
d
(3) Right door open/close switch

1) Remove the front cover and the cover.
Parts
a Main switch
c Front door open/close switch
d Right door open/close switch
(1) Main switch

1) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector, disengage the pawl, and remove the main switch.
* Attach the main switch and the harness so that they are fit
with the marks on the back surface of the mounting plate.
ON
W B Harne ss color
Swi tch po sition W W
C on n ector color the right door open/close switch cover unit.
R R
OFF
MX-M565N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q – 1

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2016 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008,
Windows® Server 2012 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Company
Quality Assurance and Environmental Affairs Unit
CS Promotion Department
First edition: January 2014

Latest Edition: January 2016

MXM365N Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MXM365N Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MXM365N Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What sections are covered in the manual?

What sections are covered in the manual?

What types of parts are discussed?

What types of parts are discussed?

TopPage

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

2) Place of much vibration

2. Warning for servicing

MX-M565N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-M565N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

MX-M565N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-FN17 MX-PN11A/B/C/D MX-PC12

MX-DE12 MX-DE13 MX-DE14 MX-DE20

MX-KB11 N MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1

MX-AM10 MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0

MX-UN01A MX-UN05A MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA

MX-M565N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

MX-FN17 MX-PN11A/B/C/D MX-PC12

MX-DE12 MX-DE13 MX-DE14 MX-DE20

MX-KB14 N MX-PK11 MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1

MX-FWX1 MX-FR45U MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-USX1

MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-UN01A MX-UN05A

MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA MX-EB13

MX-M565N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

MX-PNX6A/B/C/D MX-DE12 MX-DE13 MX-DE14 MX-DE20

MX-M565N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 3

Document DUPLEX SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― STD STD ― ―

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Installable. ―: Cannot be connected.

MX-M565N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 4

MX-M565N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

MX-M565N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 2

MX-M565N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 3

MX-M565N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 4

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 2

No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(10) (11) (12) (13)

(14) (15) (16) (17)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 4

No. Name Function/ Operation

(2) Sensors and Switches

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 5

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M565N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 6

No. Name Function/Operation

LO A LOW Developing 0 - 700 -475V±5V L： 5 5 ： T C I N TE R V AL BI A S　 MI D